HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JULY 1959 CenOCon SENDING CERTIFICATES BY MAIL When sending certificates by mail, always roll them up very carefully and place inside a rigid tube. The tube should always be longer than the roll of certificates. Make sure that the certificates are secure in the tube by passing a string through lengthwise and/or sealing the ends of the tube with wadding and gumstrip paper. It has been found that this method is the most successful so long as the tube is really rigid and of sufficient diameter so that the certificates do not have to be too tightly rolled. Send them by first class surface mail, not usually by airmail. Peter Hemery HCO Communicator WW PH:brb.mc.cden Copyright (c) 1959 0 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 AUGUST 1959 CenOCon CERTIFICATIONS In order to get an HPA/HCA or BScn/HCS Certificate, it is not necessary to wait one year. It is necessary, however, that the student be fully trained and have all Extension Course work completed and corrected. HCO Secretary WW` NW:brb.rd Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 171 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 DECEMBER 1959 Cert Depts ROUTING OF CERTIFICATES FOR STERLING AREAS The following arrangements will apply to the routing of certificates in Sterling Areas. HCO Area See London arranges for blank certificates to be printed. When other HCOs require certificates, they should send the route sheets completed to HCO Area See London, who will have the details written on the certificates. Always make sure the names are supplied in legible form exactly as they are to appear on the certificates. When the certificates have been completed, HCO Area See will then send them to LRH for his signature. They will then be sent back to HCO Area See London, who will airmail them to the appropriate HCO. HCO Area See London will also keep a world wide certificate log book. FINANCE: Area HCOs will pay to HCO Area See London the cost of the certificate and printing of the name, plus 5% to cover the time spent. The local HASIs will pay all postage costs, as this is a service we are doing for them. This system should simplify the routing of certificates, and at the same time ensure that the quality of certificates is standardized. LRH:js.cden.rd Peter Hemery Copyright(c) 1959 HCO Secretary WW by L. Ron Hubbard for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1 HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 FEBRUARY 1960 CenOCon (Reissued from Sthil) HCO Board of Review HPA QUALIFICATIONS Policy states that an HPA/HCA certificate may not be awarded until all requirements including Extension Course, are completed. However, students who have completed the academy course and have graduated successfully and have passed the HCO Board of Review examination are in fact entitled to start practising professionally even though they may not have completed the Extension Course work. Sometimes also a student may have passed all the requirements and yet may not be in possession of a certificate because he has not completed paying for the course. In all such cases, provided that the HCO Board of Review is satisfied that the student is fully competent to start practising professionally, the student should be given a letter of Certificate Pending by the HCO Board of Review. This letter would give the student a grace period to complete his qualifications, say 6 or 8 months, and would state that he is entitled to audit professionally during this period. Each letter would be dated and would state the limit of the grace period, set according to the individual's circumstances. This procedure would regularize the position of the new auditor who is waiting for his certificate, and will also encourage the individual concerned to complete his requirements, including paying off his account. LRH:js.mm.cden.rd Peter Hemery Copyright (c) 1960 HCO Secretary WW by L. Ron Hubbard for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD 172 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 APRIL 1960 BPI HCO Secs CenOCon MA IMPORTANT CERTIFICATION CHANGE Effective at once all persons satisfactorily completing an HCA or HPA course at a Central Organisation Academy and passing an HCO Board of Review Examination at course end shall be given their certificates as soon as administratively possible, keeping in mind they have to be prepared and airmailed to me for signature. All auditors who have been trained at an academy shall be certified immediately that they pass their Board of Review Examination. A 1960 validation seal, Red, shall be affixed to the certificate when the auditor has completed his Extension Course and has passed further examination on the CCHs and Model Session ability. The Extension Course is still necessary for a Red validation seal. LRH:js.cden L. RON HUBBARD Copyright(c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1960 CenOCon CERTIFICATION CHANGE As regards the HCO Policy Letter of April 25, 1960, entitled "Important Certification Change", this policy of issuing at once HCA or HPA certificates to all persons satisfactorily completing an HCA or HPA Course at a Central Organization Academy and passing an HCO Board of Review Examination at Course end does not apply to persons who have not completed full payment for their course. The regulation concerning the requirement that no certificate can be issued until such time as the student has paid for his course in full, still applies. LRH:js.cden Mary Sue Hubbard Copyright (c) 1960 Organizational Supervisor, WW by L. Ron Hubbard for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD 173 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 MAY 1960 Reissued from Sthil Assoc Sees HCO Sees Board of Review CenOCon CERTIFICATIONS It is important that the project for issuing outstanding certificates should be carried through successfully, and as quickly as possible. One reason is that all of these old certificates which have been "hanging fire" should be issued before HASI Ltd becomes a fact. It is greatly to the advantage of Central Orgs to get these certificates into the hands of all who are qualified to have them-it means more trained auditors, more memberships in good standing. To qualify for a certificate, a person must pass, or have passed an HCO Board of Review examination based on the data he was taught rather than new data. His course fees must either be fully paid up or (in the sterling area) he must be making regular payments on a banker's order. A certificate may be used if he signs a banker's order and starts making regular payments, (in sterling areas). If the person is not already entitled to a validation seal, he may qualify for the 1960 Red Validation Seal if he complies with certain provisions. These provisions may be modified from time to time as technology and training alters. At present, a person may obtain a validation seal when he has completed his Extension Course successfully and passed an HCO Board of Review examination on CCHs and Model Session (HCO Policy Letter of April 25, 1960). The person immediately responsible for seeing this project carried through is the HCO Board of Review. Until it is completed, it may be necessary to place a person on this post full time and make arrangements for part time assistance for correspondence, practical examinations, etc. HCO Secs and Assoc Sees are requested to assist in every possible way to ensure that this project is pushed along until every certificate which is now outstanding has been issued. (Note: This does not alter the policy that in order to keep a certificate in force an auditor must have a membership in good standing.) Peter Hemery HCO Secretary WW for L. RON HUBBARD LRH:js.gh.cden Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 174 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint HUI Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 FEBRUARY 1961 CenOCon HCO Bds of Review CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS REVISED LIST The following certificates only may be promised and issued effective immediately. All are issued by "HCO on behalf of the Academy of Scientology" except as indicated: Certificates Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist Smaller than HPA/HCA. Signed by Letter Press with a small L. Ron Hubbard signature. Issued by Address Unit with the person's name and date typed on with a very large type typewriter. Issued on receipt of a pc Invoice to pc Course Instructor before Friday of the week of enrolment. Must carry the words "Does not authorize professional processing." Given for one week's attendance on pc Hubbard Practical Scientologist Same size as HPA/HCA. Same wording except it adds clearly - "Does not authorize professional processing for a fee". Issued by HCO Bd of Review on request of Academy. Requires 8 weeks of day training or a full course of evening or week end training. Requires minimal oral examination. Signed L. Ron Hubbard by means of an embossing seal. Hubbard Professional Auditor (Commonwealth) or Hubbard Certified Auditor (US) Same wording as always. Issued by HCO on behalf of Academy. Issued only after repeat weeks needful for passing Academy, a stiff oral and written exam by HCO Bd of Review and certain time spent on a staff of a Central Org. Costs not more than 1/3 more than an HPS. Signed by LRH personally or his signature at HCO WW. B.Scn. (UK) or Hubbard Clearing Scientologist (US) Same conditions of issue as HPA/HCA with course examination and a good case history as requirement. Signed by LRH personally or at HCO WW. D.Scn. (Commonwealth) or Hubbard Graduate Scientologist (US) Issued by HCO only on its own behalf after meeting requirements stipulated for any given course. Awards Clear Bracelet. Issued on LRH Authorization only after requirements met for HCO Bd of Review in an area. Fellow of Scientology- Issued by LRH for some contribution to the knowledge of Scientology. L RON HUBBARD LRH.-js.cden Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 175 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1961 CenOCon HPA/HCA REQUIREMENT With the advent of the certificate Hubbard Practical Scientologist, and the long term no use of Validation Seal, it is hereafter established that: IN ORDER TO OBTAIN A VALIDATION SEAL ON ANY CERTIFICATE, THE PERSON MUST HAVE SPENT A ONE YEAR INTERNESHIP IN AN HGC. This suggestion, put forth by Smokey Brand, HCO Area Secretary DC, has been sent to most organizational personnel throughout the world for their comment. The reply was an overwhelming affirmative. Hereinafter, no Validation Seal may be stamped on a certificate without the above requirement. Effective at once, all personnel on HGCs who will have been on an HGC one year by May 12, 1962 will receive a Validation Seal of a new style stating the fact of interneship. As a special award all auditors who have served in an HGC one year beginning January 1, 1960, may receive a Validation Seal, old style, on any and all their certificates at once. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jl.cden Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 NOVEMBER 1961 CenOCon STABILIZATION OF CLEARS All Clears who have been made on SOP Goals procedure must be run again on Routine 3D, to ensure stabilization. In many cases this will not take long, since Modifiers or Opposites will blow on assessment, if not already found and blown on previous assessments. In future, no Clear bracelet will be issued until the Clear has been run on Routine 3D and is recognized to be thoroughly stable during a period of three months. The Clear should then be checked out again, and a bracelet applied for in the usual way. LRH-.jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 176 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 SEPTEMBER 1962 HCO Secs HCO Board of Review CERTIFICATE APPLICATION FORM Any person who has qualified for a certificate should be required by the HCO Board of Review to complete a Certificate Application Form, as under. HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Confidential This form is for BOARD OF REVIEW first issue of certificate only, (address appropriate) not RE-issue CERTIFICATE APPLICATION -------------------------------------------------------------------- Address .................................................. hereby apply for an HPA (HCA) B.Sen (HCS) HGS D.Scn certificate from the Hubbard Communications Office, which is the only examining and certifying body in Dianetics and Scientology. I have duly completed all the requirements for this certificate. I understand that the certificate is given to me free of charge and I have not paid for it to HCO or any agency which could be connected to HCO, or construed to be connected. Signature Date I understand that I may continue to hold this certificate only as long as I subscribe to and abide by the Code of a Scientologist, the Auditor's Code, and the rules and regulations that apply to an auditor in professional practice as they appear from time to time. Signature Date I hereby affirm that I am not a Communist nor do I have criminal or communist connections. I also affirm that I have no unpunished crimes in my past in the eyes of the law and that I do not have a criminal record (THIS LIFETIME). Signature Date This space for Office use only. Checked by HCO Board of Review on E-Meter (signature) OK to issue certificate: HCO Board of Review (signature) (name of Org or Continent) Any other comments: 177 If the student has not yet completed all the requirements for certification, he may yet partially complete the form, and in fact should receive the meter check before leaving the Central Org. This form is given to the student upon his request by the HCO Board of Review of the Organization where the student has completed, or will complete, his course. When it is finally completed and signed by the Central Org Board of Review, it must be sent to the HCO Board of Review, Continental, by the student applying. (However, the Central Org Board of Review should see that the student understands the procedure and sends in his application when all requirements are complete.) Board of Review Continental then checks the applicant's check sheets (which should have been received from the Central Org Board of Review). If the check sheet is complete, the HCO Board of Review Continental issues the certificate. If it is not complete, the HCO Board of Review Continental informs the student via the Central Org Board of Review, which has the direct responsibility for seeing that the check sheet is properly completed. HCO Board of Review Continental should not issue a certificate until it has in hand both the completed check sheet and the certificate application of the applicant. The E-Meter check required shall consist of being checked out on O/Ws and missed withholds which the applicant may have accumulated while at the Org concerning the staff, students and preclears; and a check on the last question of the application form. The person checking should also determine the general case level of the applicant by observing TA, needle and person while being checked. If the case level seems poor or bad, the Central Org Board of Review should require the person to be audited before completing the application form. THE HCO BOARD OF REVIEW CONTINENTAL IS NOT TO ALLOW THE CERTIFICATION OF ANY PERSON WHOSE CASE LEVEL IS NOT UP TO HCO STANDARDS, OR WHO HAS NOT HAD THEIR O/Ws FROM COURSE CLEANED UP. Finally, it is emphasized that every effort should be made to expedite the issue of certificates. HCO Boards of Review should make sure that graduating students complete all their requirements and send in their applications for certificates as soon as possible after graduation. Issued by: Peter Hemery HCO Sec WW for L. RON HUBBARD Authorized by: L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 178 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO Secs HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 OCTOBER 1962 HCO Board of Review Central Orgs PREPARATION OF HPA/HCA CERTIFICATES No HPA/HCA graduate should be considered released from the Academy until he has fully completed Course requirements and he has passed his Oral and Written examinations and has satisfactorily completed his Certificate Application Form. Delays in completing these last three items should be minimal. Providing his Course fees have been fully paid, or satisfactory arrangements have been made for completing payment, on the day that he is released from the Academy the new Graduate is to be handed his HPA/HCA certificate. Therefore, instead of waiting until Course' completion for preparation of certificates as previously, on date of commencement of HPA/HCA Course a despatch is written by the Director of Training to the HCO Board of Review giving the full names of the new students who have commenced on Course. HCO Board of Review will then proceed immediately with the preparation of these certificates, This follows the normal procedure except that after I have signed them and sent them back, they are placed in the Valuable Documents Safe and remain there until date of issuance. They are NOT to be embossed with the HASI Seal until the date on which the certificates are actually handed to the new graduates. Delays in certificate issuance are to be obviated completely. LRH:gl.cden.rd Copyright (c) 1962 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex CenOCon HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 DECEMBER 1962 BPI R2-12 VALIDATION Change all Certificate Validation seals to read: 0 > HCO When a student or staff member or retread has passed Class Ilb for Routine 2-12, so validate. I Disseminate this datum broadly in magazines. LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 179 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 AUGUST 1963 BPI CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS (Changes earlier policies where these are at variance) The certificate of HUBBARD GRADUATE AUDITOR (ST HILL) CLASS will hereafter be issued for successful completion of the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course. The certificate HUBBARD CLEARING SCIENTOLOGIST will no longer be issued but may be converted to HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST. No further courses for this level may be enrolled in Academies until such time as Scientology Three is codified. HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST may be given for HCA/HPA retread. The certificates HUBBARD CERTIFIED AUDITOR for the US and HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL AUDITOR for the UK and Commonwealth will continue as the professional certificate issued by Central Organizations. It is given for successful completion of an Academy HCA/HPA Course. This certificate and no other (except HDA as follows) is requisite for the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course. The certificate for Scientology One is HUBBARD BOOK AUDITOR. This is granted under various conditions in the Orgs. The reason being that no book auditor should audit without a certificate. It replaces HUBBARD APPRENTICE SCIENTOLOGIST and this certificate may be exchanged by anyone for a HUBBARD BOOK AUDITOR certificate. (I do not personally sign this certificate. It is signed by letterpress.) CLASSIFICATION Classification is in addition to certification and is by additional examination by HCO. Classification is sealed on any certificate by "Class" and large Roman Numerals and a Hubbard Communications Office ring, the Roman Numerals denoting Class to be huge and in the centre of the seal. HBA may be sealed with a Class 1. HCA/HPA may be sealed with a Class I or a Class Il. HSS may be sealed with a Class 11 or Class 111. HGA (St Hill) may be sealed with a Class III, Class IV or a Class V. The object of class is that course completion alone may award a certificate. But course proficiency is denoted by a Class Seal. Auditors who have difficulty getting results should not be classed. Classses and certificates are now fully aligned and permanent in comparison with the five levels of Scientology HCO Policy Letter of August 2, AD] 3 and Classification Policy Letters. Classification is not a matter of obligation to HCO. It is a special award and is not owed to anyone. HANDLING OF ISSUE It is required that the following policies of issue be followed. HBA - Issue certificate to anyone who is auditing industriously. Give Class I only to such as also take new Comm Course training. 180 HCA/HPA - Issue only to Academy students who complete their check sheets. Classify certificate as Class I inevitably but as Class II on the basis of staff employment or retread, HSS - Issue certificate to HPA/HCA retread if promised. Classify as 11 or III only on the basis of further retread or staff employment. HGA (St Hill) - Issue certificate on completion of check sheets. Classify III on basis of competent auditing. Classify IV on basis of excellent showing in results on pcs or on retread at Saint Hill. Classify V only on reaching OT and retread at Saint Hill. DOCTOR OF SCIENTOLOGY This is an honorary degree, not granted for scholastic reasons but is purely an award to those who at Class III or IV perform signal service to Scientology activites. An HCS or HGA (St Hill) is understood to qualify. FELLOW OF SCIENTOLOGY This is an honorary award for signal contribution to Scientology technology beyond the scope of a new process. The work must be complete and approved. Usually reserved for Class IV or V auditor. HUBBARD DIANETIC AUDITOR This certificate remains in full force. It may however be exchanged for an HPA/HCA without further examination and at cost of certificate and preparation of it. However, HDA is the single exception to acceptance for Saint Hill training for which it is valid, waiving then the HCA/HPA requirement. HONOURS Any classification may be issued "with honours" providing the candidate has exceeded the check sheet requirements by a notable degree and is also eligible for the upper classification range of that certificate. HBA Class I is the exception. It is the classification that is given "with honours". "With honours" however may not be given without the written recommendation of the candidate's own instructors. ADMINISTRATIVE CERTIFICATES Three new certificates totally devoted to administrative actions and skills are announced herewith and are now available. The certificate HUBBARD ASSISTANT ADMINISTRATOR will be issued to properly qualified persons who have served one year or more in an HCO or Scientology organization in the Administrative Division and who have successfully passed the examination of a permanent staff member as issued or amended; or who has successfully completed a course in administration given by a Scientology Organization. The certificate HUBBARD ADMINISTRATOR will be issued to properly qualified persons who have served two or more years on the staff of an HCO or Scientology Organization in the Administrative Division and who have passed the required examination; or who have successfully completed a course in administration given by a Scientology Organization. The certificate HUBBARD EXECUTIVE will be issued to properly qualified Hubbard Administrators who have successfully completed the studies required. Permanent staff member certificates will no longer be examined for or issued but may be retained and also converted to the certificate. Permanent Executive certificates will no longer be examined for or issued but may be retained and also converted to Hubbard Administrator certificates. 181 RELEASE Release buttons (an "R" set in the S and double ARC Triangle of Scientology) may be (and should be) issued to HGC pcs who have attained its requirement by HCO Sees without charge. CLEAR BRACELETS Silver Clear Bracelets are issued by HCO Sees at the expense of the HGC or the field pc to those who meet clear requirements. (Note: No such bracelet shall be issued until procedure of test is established in HCO Policy Letters after this date, all former such tests being cancelled.) OT AWARDS Gold OT Bracelets will be issued when requirements are specified and met. SCIENTOLOGY PINS Associate Membership is the sole requirement of a Scientology pin issue. MINISTERIAL AWARDS AND INSIGNIA These are not properly Scientology awards but are authorized and issued only by Church boards. They are handled by courtesy by HCOs attached to Churches. These include Doctor of Divinity, Minister of the Church and Spiritual Counselor. There are no other valid Dianetic or Scientology awards. Any former certificate legally issued by a Scientology organization may be turned in for any of the above comparable certificates. Illegal certificates in Dianetics and Scientology, meaning any issued by an agency not authorized by HCO, should be seized and the issuing agency sued by HCOs for violation of trade mark and copyright and fraud. ISSUING AGENCY Hubbard Communications Office has full control of all certificates and awards of Dianetics and Scientology and may issue according to policy, and suspend or cancel at discretion. The basis of issue is competence. The basis of suspension is violation of ethical use. The basis of cancellation is failure to comply with the conditions of an order of suspension. VALIDITY OF CERTIFICATES No certificate is valid without my personal or printed signature, that signature now being fully copyrighted and trade-marked. IN FORCE It is considered as of the date of one day after this policy letter that all those certificates and awards ever issued are to be considered in full force regardless of circumstances except those suspended between March 13, AD13 and August 12, AD13. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.aap Copyright (c) 1963 [Modified by HCO P/L 16 June 1964, Personnel Records by L. Ron Hubbard Admin Certs, page 184. See also Class and Grade Programme, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Volume 4, pages 360-403.1 182 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 FEBRUARY 1964 Central Orgs Franchise Field ISSUING OF CERTIFICATES HUBBARD APPRENTICE SCIENTOLOGIST Certificates and Level I Classifications are authorized by Field Auditors and HAS and Class I Course Instructors. They are issued by the Area Central Org upon application to the Field Auditor Consultant in the Central Org. The certificate is signed by Letter Press with a small L. Ron Hubbard signature. Application approved by a valid HQS certificate holder is the only requirement necessary for issuance of an HAS Certificate or Level I Classification. HUBBARD QUALIFIED SCIENTOLOGIST Certificates are issued by the Area HCO Board of Review upon completion of Course requirements and application to the Area HCO Board of Review. The certificate is signed by Letter Press with a L. Ron Hubbard signature. Level 11 Classification is issued by the Area HCO Board of Review upon passing the Level 11 examination given by the Area HCO Board of Review. HQS certification and Level 11 Classification standards are the responsibility of the Area HCO Board of Review following current policy regarding HQS and Class Il requirements. HQS Certificates and Level II Classification are not sent to Saint Hill for approval or signature. The only change of procedure for HPA/HCA and HCS level is that certificates are issued upon completion of the course, but classification depends upon examination by the Area HCO Board of Review. HUBBARD ADVANCED AUDITOR, HUBBARD SENIOR SCIENTOLOGIST and HUBBARD GRADUATE AUDITOR Certificates, as well as Level V, VI and VII Classifications, are issued by HCO Board of Review, Saint Hill, only, for L. RON HUBBARD upon completion of the requirements on the Saint Hill Course. Any changes or modifications in the supply or format of certificates will be notified in directives from time to time as necessary. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.rd Copyright (c) 1964 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 183 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 JUNE 1964 Cent Con HCO Secs Assoc Sees PERSONNEL RECORDS ADMIN CERTS (Modifies HCO Pol Ltr of August 12, 1963) As a special project, Admin Certs are being issued to all current and past staff members of Scientology Organizations on the following basis: Hubbard Administrator certificate: Will be issued to (1) any staff member, currently on staff, who does not qualify for a Hubbard Executive certificate; or (2) any person who has previously worked on the staff of a Scientology Organization, no matter how briefly, who does not qualify for a Hubbard Executive certificate. Hubbard Executive certificate will be issued to: 1. Any staff member currently on staff, who can claim to have served on an Executive post in a Scientology Organization for a period of at least one year. 2. Any person who has previously worked in a Scientology Org, who can claim to have served on an Executive Post for at least one year. Executive posts are defined as follows: In HASI: In HCO: Assoc (or Org) See HCO Continental Secretary pc Director HCO Area Secretary Director of Training Director of Processing Director of Enrolment Chief Registrar (Body) Director of Material Letter Registrar Director of Accounts. IN ORDER TO OBTAIN THE CERTIFICATE, THE ATTACHED APPLICATION FORM MUST BE FILLED IN AND SENT TO HCO WWI SAINT HILL, VIA YOUR ASSOC SEC AND HCO AREA SEC. HCO Area Sees: 1. Distribute these forms to all current Org staff, including HCO personnel. Route to Org Supervisor WW, with Assoc See comment and HCO See comment, which are confidential, after completion by the staff member. 2. Send a form and explanation to every past staff member known to you or recorded in your files. Get them to send the application back to you for Assoc See comment and your comment, and then route to Org Supervisor WW. 3. Advertise the offer in your Continental magazine, telling them to send to you for an application form. The Admin Certs will be printed and issued by Saint Hill only. They will supersede the current Permanent Staff and Permanent Executive certificates, which are now abolished. Holders of Permanent Staff and Permanent Executive certificates must however send in their application for the new certificates. The deadline for this project ends on 3 Ist December 1964, after which the Admin Certs will be available only to current staff members and requirements will be harder. So send in your application form NOW. LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1964 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 184 ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH BLUE ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex APPLICATION FORM FOR ADMIN CERTIFICATE Org location Date I wish to apply for a Hubbard Administrator/Hubbard Executive certificate. I am a current/past staff member. I have filled in my staff record below. signature Name in full: (Print in capitals please) Current address for posting cert: (Print in capitals please) Scientology certs hold and dates obtained Staff posts held (Name of post and approx dates) (Give name of Org also): If service on staff continuous, or broken, name approximate dates of service (dates only) Total service (in months or years) Total service on Executive posts (in months or years) Assoc Sec/Org Sec comment (confidential) HCO Sec comment (confidential) 185 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF I JULY 1964 HCO Sees Assoc Secs Address Depts CERTIFICATION AND CLASSIFICATION There is no intention at present of issuing all certificates from HCO WW. HCO Boards of Review should therefore be prepared to continue their present system of preparing, issuing and recording certificates of all kinds, as before. Supplies of blank certificates of all levels up to IV are now obtainable from the Book Department of HCO WW at Saint Hill. These are: HAS - LEVEL I HQS - LEVEL II HCA - LEVEL III HPA - LEVEL III Class III HCS - LEVEL IV HAA (Level V), HSS (Level VI) and HGA (Level VII) are however still obtainable only at Saint Hill at this time. In addition, the honorary DScn, FScn and in the US, ministerial certificates, are still obtainable as before. The supply and issue of certificates should be an easy, rapid process. The system is briefly as follows: As soon as a student enters a course, his certificate is prepared, his name lettered on it and if necessary (HPA and above at present) the certificate is sent at once to HCO WW to be signed by LRH. The certificate is therefore ready to be presented to the student as soon as he graduates from the course and passes his examination, if any, Before receiving the certificate, however, at Level 11 (HQS) and above, he should complete an application form for the HCO. This application form is in duplicate. One copy is sent to HCO WW Address Dept for their information, when the student receives his certificate or classification. The application form should include a mailing address. Check sheets for routing certificates should be kept in the usual way. A roll book should be carefully kept of certificates and classifications at Level III (HCA) and above. For levels below 111, it is sufficient to keep track of it in C/F and Address Depts. The HCO Area Sec is responsible for seeing that certifications and classifications are speedily and efficiently handled, though the actual function may be delegated to another personnel. The actual function of certification and classification for a whole area is centralized at the Area HCO of the main central org of the area. At present, these are: London for UK and Europe; Washington DC for America and United States (except California); Los Angeles for California; Johannesburg for Africa; Melbourne for Australia and ANZO. HCO WW also does its own certification and classification at Levels V, VI and VII. Certificates at Levels I and 11 may also be issued by other offices at the discretion of the central issuing offices. However, Franchise holders and individual auditors must apply to HCO for issue of HAS or HQS certs to their students. In addition to certification, the HCO Board of Review is now also responsible for classification, at Level III and IV. Classification is stamped on a gold seal in the lower left hand corner of the appropriate certificate. It consists of a large roman numeral surrounded by a circle, sample as under: 186 The address department at HCO WW is to be notified, as a routine procedure, of all classifications, This can be done by sending a copy of the application form when the classification is awarded, The application form should include a mailing address. It is emphasized again that a student receives a certificate on completing course, and receives a classification seal on the appropriate certificate after successfully completing further training at that level. Every effort should be made to keep this system moving smoothly, and to ensure that students receive their certificates and classifications immediately on graduating or passing exams. LRH:nb.rd Issued by: Peter Hemery Copyright (c) 1964 'International Org Supervisor 0 for LRH by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Authorised by: LRH HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 31 DECEMBER 1964 General Non-Remimeo The Auditor CERTIFICATES You will note all our certificates bear a place for signature by the "Examining Board" in addition to my signature. New Classification policy states that an Academy student may be certified at the end of his course but that he is examined for classification before the beginning of his next course. Therefore the signature on our certificates for "Examining Board" is left blank when the student is merely certified. If the student is classified for any class, the examiner only then signs as the examining board. At the same time the certificate is sealed with a -old seal with Roman Numeral for the Class awarded. In case the student has a higher certificate but passes only for a lower class, the certificate is signed by the examiner on the highest certificate held. But the stamp and seal is only for the lower classification obtained. Classification can easily lag behind certification and is the important point on the certificate for pcs to watch for, as an auditor cannot charge fees for the processes of a grade higher than that auditor has been classified for. Thus classification is more important than certification in judging an auditor's skill and finding what processes he can run professionally. LRH:jw.rd Copyright (c) 1964 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 187 HUBBARD, COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 MARCH 1965 Remimeo Franchise HCO (DIVISION 1) BPI CERTIFICATES AND AWARDS NEW STATUS OF HONORARY AWARDS (Cancels earlier policies on honorary awards) The only honorary awards (DScn, etc) that now may be given are only for the application of Scientology processes, principles, books or literature. For new ways to apply existing processes or levels or for successful applications to new areas or stratas of society with actual results, any one of various honorary awards may be given. These consist of memorial medals or honorary certificates. For successful, broad application of training procedures or arrangements in new areas, memorial medals or honorary certificates may be given. For new methods of dissemination or ideas which when applied resulted in markedly broader successful dissemination, memorial medals or honorary certificates may be given. For excellent application of Scientology administrative procedures such as in forming or recovering the status of an organization, or applying Scientology to the reorganization and better of business, group and government memorial medals or honorary certificates may be given. No awards will be issued for new processes as nearly all those so proposed in the past already existed in the research technology or were less workable variations of existing processes. No awards will be. issued for new principles as these are usually cognitions routinely rising from applied Scientology principles and lead astray from advancement, hanging the person in a personal win which the person then seeks to pass on to others who in actual fact would have similar cognitions if run on standard processes. No awards will be given for new training procedures or drills. We have far more of these than we can ever apply. But awards may be given for adapting existing drills to new zones of education providing they are standard drills for new uses. No awards will be given for new administrative procedures anywhere. But honorary awards will be given on the application of our standard administrative procedures outside orgs providing they are not varied and are accredited to us. Award nominations are made to HCO (Division 1) officers and are forwarded on routine channels. It would not be usual to request a specific honorary award. The scope of the application and the tests made and the actual results of it should be properly detailed. The award itself is recommended to the board by HCO Sec WW and, bearing a Hubbard signature, is then passed back through channels. TYPES OF AWARDS Certificates denoting courses taken are issued as an obligation to the student as soon as feasible after the course is completed. This is a standard award. It must bear a Hubbard signature at board level. This is true also of Admin certificates. Classification and seals are given in local areas totally at the discretion of HCO (Division 1) and after examination. A record of these is forwarded to HCO WW. No other signed document is issued than a seal and a letter from an HCO Secretary. No classifications given locally are credited on the Saint Hill Course when the student comes to Saint Hill for training and are re-awarded as Saint Hill Classifications. 188 These consist of a letter and as feasible a seal, the letter bearing only a Hubbard signature at board level. If no classification is awarded at Saint Hill, local area classification may be resumed. Classification is never promised. It is entirely at the discretion of HCO. It is never owed anyone. Certificates for courses and classification are elsewhere given. Grades are awarded preclears (or students) by HCO in the area attained. These consist of a nomination to Grade by Division 2 (Training and Processing) and are written as letters on LRH stationery and signed for him (per pro) by the HCO Area Secretary, who specifies area in which given, and issued by HCO through the Registrar. Staff certificates or grades resulting from staff training or processing in technical, instructional or administrative subjects are nominated by Division 2 (Training and Processing). They are then handled as above; certificates are locally drawn up and forwarded to Saint Hill for signature. Classifications are drawn lip and signed locally by HCO, Grades are drawn up locally and signed by HCO and all are issued to the staff by HCO. HONORARY AWARDS All certificates and awards obtained not as a result of courses or examination are termed honorary. All honorary certificates are marked "Honorary" in distinct lettering. An honorary certificate may not be substituted for a standard certificate or classification and may not be required as a qualification for anything and does not waive any requirement to have a certificate or classification. Honorary certificates and awards are only given for achievement in application. They do not however grant any now right to apply. Lists of honorary certificates are to be issued from time to time. Memorial awards are medals or plaques and have the same conditions as honorary certificates. Scientology pins, release pins, and clear pins are the more usual memorial awards, signifying an event or an achievement in application, the first of which is becoming a Scientologist, the next consisting of obtaining a known case gain and the clear pin signifying the attainment of a meter condition. These three are awarded by HCO locally as follows: The group, field auditor,. franchise auditor or org sends to their local area HCO a list of the names and addresses of persons who have joined. A Scientology pin is mailed as a matter of course to the home address of each person by Prom Reg, at no cost to the nominator or recipient. A Release pin candidate is nominated to their local HCO by a field auditor, Franchise auditor or Division 2 (Training and Processing) and is awarded by the Area HCO by mail or hand. A clear pin is nominated to HCO by a Franchise auditor or Division 2 of' an org, is attested by the nominator as to the meter condition and grade of the former preclear and is then awarded by the Area HCO, usually by a request to Continental HCO to send it. A clear pin is issued at no cost to the nominator or the recipient but the recipient may buy a silver identification bracelet from the org if he or she wishes. Scientology pins, release pins and clear pins are paid for out of the HCO Book Fund Account of the area in which they are issued. Supplies are obtained as feasible and economic. The design and quality Of the award article is passed upon by HCO WW to which designs for all intended manufactures and samples of all manufactured must be passed upon at HCO WW before actual issue in the area. Memorial medals and awards will be described and issued from time to time. LRH:jw.rd Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 189 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Gen Non Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 APRIL 1965 HAT Quals See HAT Dir Exams HAT HCO Dissem See QUALIFICATIONS SEC HAT Dir Prom Reg HCO DISSEM SEC HAT Letter Reg BOOK AUDITOR The old old practitioner THE BOOK AUDITOR must be recognized as a valid practitioner of Scientology. Unclassed, the Book Auditor cannot legally charge fees or be a field staff member. But the Book Auditor may be given a certificate on application to the Qualifications Division. The certificate is HUBBARD BOOK AUDITOR It must say "not examined" somewhere on it, small, and it is signed by HCO's Office of LRH. The offer of this certificate may be made in mailings to persons who have bought books. The application for it should also ask if they want processing or formal training at its end. "My future plans for Processing are .... (3 lines) .......... "My future plans for Training are (3 lines) The application they must make should give us a profile of the person such as what magazines they read and what they do, all that. Age, sex, schooling, financial status. Things required by Letter Reg so she can handle their want. The SOLE requirements are that they have read the book and done "some" processing on another successfully. The application is for a certificate as HBA. A facsimile copy of the cert with SAMPLE across it may be printed up as the flier, enclosing the questionnaire. The flier would be mailed by Prom Reg, received by Qual Sec, the certificate made up at once and mailed and the questionnaire carefully preserved and given the Letter Reg. Such questionnaires must never be put in CF until they bear a stamp on them: Answered by Letter Reg. These questionnaires express wants and questions. The Letter Reg stamps "Answered by Letter Reg", forwards the original to Address where an HBA plate is cut. The questionnaire then goes to CF for a folder. This is a routine action to all book buyers who have not yet been trained to the level of HAS. Sending such an offer to an HAS could be very confusing to a new Scientologist. Therefore, in sending such a mailing in the first place Address-in-Charge is responsible that no HAS or certified auditors are included in the addresses being supplied. This is a STANDARD promotion to book buyers who are not yet trained. It can be made to pcs, of any grade if they are not also auditors. There must be NO CHARGE for this Certificate. LRH:wmc.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 190 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 APRIL 1965 Gen Non-Remimeo Sthil Students Sthil Executives URGENT Instructors Board of Review CORRECTION TO POLICY LETTERS ON CERTIFICATION AND AWARDS Not on Saint Hill Special Briefing Course or any other course is it required of a student to be classified or that he or she take the classification examination. Classification is a vital necessity for professional practice at the level, and no auditing fee may be charged by an auditor who has not been classified. For the sake of maintaining the quality of auditors turned out by Saint Hill, I do, however, require that on the Saint Hill Course, check sheets be satisfactorily completed before the award of a certificate, and exercise my prerogative to examine students for the basic competency of an auditor before signing the final certificate-this examination not leading to Classification. It is called to attention that a Saint Hill certificate does bear the word "Saint Hill" and must be safeguarded even when no classification is awarded. However, a Continental certificate may be issued when competence is not considered up to Saint Hill standards. The definition of a Saint Hill certificate is t ' hat it is granted for complete check sheets-not amount of time on course-in Theory, Practical and on Auditing check. sheet on others. PC GRADES On the Saint Hill Course a student is only audited according to the Gradation programme of Grade Certificates, so that it is possible to have an HGA certificate with a lower grade auditing certificate as a preclear. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 191 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 APRIL AD 15 Remimeo Staff Hats All Staff BASIC CERTIFICATES UNCERTIFIED PERSONNEL For purposes of Org Status all staff members to have a staff status number must have a Basic Staff Proficiency Certificate This consists of (a) A specified period on staff (variable from 2 weeks to 3 months depending on employment conditions at the time); (b) A demonstrated proficiency or outside training in his type of work; (c) A completed check sheet demonstrating prescribed study of specified materials (such as have been staff hat materials); (c) A completed check sheet of prescribed materials covering the character of the organization and its pattern and purpose; (e) A thorough knowledge of the Org Board and Comm System used by orgs; (f) A clearance from the Ethics section. (g) A final examination. None of the above requires any technical certificate or technical knowledge of Scientology beyond that contained in (c) above. CERTIFIED PERSONNEL All staff members of an org whose duties bring them into any contact with technical activities or who perform them must already have a Scientology Auditor's certificate to be placed on such a post. For technical personnel to have a staff status number the following is required: Basic Technical Certificate. This certificate is required in addition to the Basic Staff Proficiency Certificate for all such personnel. This certificate requires (a) A specified period on staff to be set from time to time; (b) A demonstrated proficiency in technical matters and a certificate from an Academy HQS or above; (c) A completed check sheet of basic org technical procedures for Estimations, the HGC, the Academy, Examinations, Review, Certification, Classification and Ethics. (c) A completed check sheet of prescribed materials covering the relationships of various technical posts and their policies, and admin procedures; (e) The recommendation of a senior technical executive in the org; (f) A final examination. STAR RATED Although the materials are simple and brief the check sheets are all star-rated. CURRENT ACTION These materials are under issue and check outs on them before a final check sheet is received will all be credited to the staff member by entering them on a sheet marked with his name as checked out by an examiner. No status of any kind of any person will be assigned until the required Certificate or Certificates are in the staff member's hand. LRH:wmcrd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 192 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JULY 1965 Remimeo Tech Hats Qual Hats Tech Div Qual Div RELEASE DECLARATION RESTRICTIONS HEALING AMENDMENTS The following three policies emerged from a Comm Ev conducted at Saint Hill 23 July 1965. RELEASE RESTRICTED No person who is dependent for his or her livelihood upon a Suppressive Person or Group, may be awarded any Release award declaration or pin as such a person is riot released in his environment. No person who is dependent for his or her livelihood upon compensation being paid for physical or mental disability, may be awarded any Release award declaration or pin as there is too much vested interest in remaining disabled. HEALING AMENDED All students of any course are debarred from visiting any medical or healing practitioner unless they are given an Ethics clearance first and all possibility of 11 roller-coaster" (sudden case decline) has been looked into and any suppressives or bad auditing precisely isolated. The exception is an emergency involving severe injury or infectious disease, but in this case the student must be cleared by Ethics to be permitted back on course or even in the org. This includes all accidents. Course Supervisors are subject to Comm Ev in not so routing students requesting to see a doctor. All students must have permission to see a medical doctor except in cases of severe emergency. LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 AUGUST 1965 Remimeo Franchise CERTIFICATION OF FRANCHISE STUDENTS In order to ensure that Franchise Auditors are able to get their students certified for Beginning Scientologist, Hubbard Apprentice Scientologist, and Hubbard Qualified Scientologist, a Franchise Auditor is permitted to make an Attestation As to the competence of the students as regards their practical and theory work as laid down by policy covering the above named courses. Such Attestations are to be sent in to the Director of Examinations of the nearest Central Org and are then passed by that post to the Department of Certificates and Awards for making out and mailing of the certificate to the student. The nearest Central Org may charge for such service. LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 193 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 AUGUST 1965 Issue 11 Gen Non-Remimeo CREDITING OF AUDITOR IN RELEASE LOG BOOK In logging a Release in the Release Log Book, Certs and Awards is to credit as auditor, the HGC auditor who was on the case at the time of Releasing. In some cases, other auditors will have worked on the case, but as auditor reassignment is usually due to the auditor having goofed too often, only the auditor who gets the final result will be credited.. Review action in Qual is not to be credited, as this is Review of the result, and not the actual auditing to Release. If the person was not Released and had to be finished by Review, meaning a process had to be run, the Review Auditor is credited. In the case of a Rehabilitated Former Release, Certs and Awards is to credit the HGC auditor who did the rehabilitation and is to enter a "(Rehab)" after the name to show that it was a rehabilitation. LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 196S L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 OCTOBER 1965 Remimeo BPI Qual Div GRADE AWARD INSIGNIA The standard Scientology pin is a plain gold S and double triangle. When a Red "R" is mounted on the face of this pin it signifies a RELEASE, Grades O-IV. When the preclear has attained Grades V or VI the Release pin is the S and double triangle with the Red "R" surrounded by a gold disc larger than the pin itself. Grade VII CLEAR is signified by a silver identification bracelet with the S and double triangle on it. Operating Thetan is signified by a gold identification bracelet with the S and double triangle on it. The Release pins for Grades O-IV and for Grades V and VI are given by Certificates and Awards without charge when awarded. The silver CLEAR bracelet is purchasable at Saint Hill after the completion of the Clearing Course when Grade VII is attained. The gold Operating Thetan bracelet may be purchased when the grade is attained and has to be specially made up. LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 194 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 NOVEMBER 1965 Remimeo Exec Sec Qual Personnel Certs and Awards Dissem Dept Pubs RELEASE PINS Grade 0 to Grade IV Release awards (in addition to the Grade Certificate) consist of one pin to each pc for all these lower grades. One does not give a separate pin for each grade. The Release is given his Release Pin as an award for Grade 0. He is issued no further Release pins as he attains Grades 1, 11, 111 and IV. If he has lost his Release Pin and so states, he may sign a Certificate of loss in Certs and Awards and may purchase a new Release Pin for the grade to which he is entitled for 5 shillings sterling or $0.75. The Certificate of Loss is then sent to Ethics for their files so that this pc can't keep "losing Release Pins". The Certificate of Loss simply states "I have lost my Release Pin and attest that I have not given it to another person". And is signed legibly so that the name can be read. It is of course grounds for false attestation if the matter ever comes up. Grades V, Va, and VI have a larger pin given when the pc attains the higher grades. This pin similarly is issued for Grade V, Power Release only. Subsequent Releases (Va and VI) do not obtain another pin. In case of loss the procedure is the same as for the lower grade pin but the charge may be higher. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd. Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 195 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1965 Gen Non-Remimeo NUMBERING OF CERTIFICATES All certificates are numbered by Certs & Awards WW. The system used is chronological numbering from 0 onwards. One number, once assigned is continued for that person, regardless of where he may later be trained, and appears on any certificates he gets. It is preceded by the area code of the area where the first Cert was awarded and this area code is kept in the number regardless of where later training is accomplished. Example: A person gets a cert, say an HRS. The next available number, written on a chalk board on the wall in Certs & Awards at WW, is assigned. Say it's 504-that's his number, and when he gets his HRS cert prepared, it is numbered 504 preceded by the code of the area where trained. If in London, then it would be UK 504. When he gets his next level, his HTS, it is numbered UK 504 also and so on. When he comes to St. Hill and gets his HSS, it is also numbered UK 504. Where someone moves from one area to another, say he got his HRS at Scientology Twin Cities in Minnesota, and was assigned TC 505, and then goes to DC to get his HTS, his HTS Certificates will be numbered TC 505. When he gets his HSS at St. Hill it will be numbered TC 505. End of Example. This number is also the number that goes on his Scientology Passport when issued. It is a number perforated through all the pages of the passport book by a machine that is designed to do this. The Passport is issued with his first certificate. When the passport books are ready, they can be numbered from the logs in Certs and Awards, at St. Hill. As this changes somewhat the numbering system used in the past, logs must be brought into PT using this new system. This is initiated at WW and as these logs are brought into PT (HGA-the highest Cert first), numbers are assigned to these certificates, the certs prepared and numbered and issued from the top down. That is: HGA, HSS, etc. New Cert applications from Orgs are dealt with, priority given always to the highest level first, that number given being the next in line, soon, this will find the new Scientologist assigned a number, passport & certificates, when he completes his first course. No priority being necessary as the higher cert will always have a number already when applying for his next certificate as well as his passport showing this number. Invoicing & Assignment of number, passport & cert to be done immediately upon arrival of a cert application. (The "in lieu of" letter from orgs.) Older certificate holders, where numbers are already assigned will not turn in these certs, these will be honored as they stand and the numbers already assigned will stand on these certificates, and in Org Logs where they were issued. Where the highest cert has already been attained, the number already assigned will be used as the person's number under the new system. Where new certs are issued to an old cert holder, numbered under past systems, a new number as assigned will become the person's cert number for all new certs and will be his passport number. All numbers are assigned by WW and Certs are charged to and routed for final preparation, i.e. Classification seals and presentation by the Org awarding, who will note the cert number in their logs after receiving the cert from WW and before presenting the cert to the student. The new certificates will name the Org training the person at any level, this being printed on the Cert by Certs & Awards WW, when the Cert is prepared. No Area Code need be shown beyond the one originally assigned. LRH:emp.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 196 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1966 Gen Non-Remimeo Franchise UNCLASSED CERTIFICATES HAS, HBA, HQS HBA, HAS, HQS Certificates are available to orgs as per See ED 146 Int. These may be prepared and awarded by Div 5, Dept 15, on completion of Course Requirements by a student, The numbering of these NON-CLASSED Certificates is as follows: The Certificate is invoiced N/C to the candidate. The number of the Invoice is taken, the last 2 digits of the year added and the cable code added after that to complete the number. A Dispatch is sent to Saint Hill giving the student's name, address and cert number, and also the org awarding. Example: Invoice number F 6840 year 1965 area Washington DC Resulting Certificate Number = F684065/DC End of example. The cert number is then entered on the space provided on the certificate. This applies only to non-classed certificates and this numbering system is used exclusively on non-classed certificates. All classed certificates will bear the number assigned per Pol Ltr of 13 Dee 1965 and the number must be obtained from Certs and Awards, Saint Hill. When a course has been run by a Franchise holder, which awards an HAS, HBA or HQS, the Franchise holder should make out a letter of attestation to the student naming the award and stating that the student has completed. The letter should be letterhead and name the Franchise Centre or give the Franchise auditor's name and address. A copy of this letter is then airmailed to your nearest Central Org who will issue a Certificate invoicing the costs to the Franchised auditor applying for his student in this way. The name and address of the student must appear on the carbon copy. The Franchised auditor should keep , p a log book for any certs he issues, to obviate the possibility of loss of records through mail being undelivered, etc. The org awarding for a Franchise holder should, when having completed the certs and mailed them to the Franchise ordering them, send the letter copies, having written the invoice number and date issued on the letter, on to Saint Hill for info of Certs and Awards Logging Officer. Certs and Awards, Dept 15, of course keeps a complete log for any and all certificates issued by it. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd Copyright (~) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 197 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF I AUGUST 1966 Remimeo SIGN UPS AND DISCOUNTS As a result of a Board of Investigation, WW, No. 1653, 27 July 1966, Monica Quirino, Chairman, the following policies are adopted regarding sign ups and discounts in all organisations: I . A separate contract shall exist for each item signed up for, including all processing and training. The contract covers what is actually being paid for. A copy of the contract shall be handed cashier who is to verify its accuracy and receive the money for service and who is then to file this copy. The contract shall specifically note all discounts being allowed and if any allowed, the status of the person signing up shall be noted on the contract. 2. Persons shall verify their status of membership or staff member for discount purposes by displaying a current membership card or a staff member card signed by the HCO Area Sec. Where a person is not currently a member he shall be signed up for membership by the Registrar and this shall be paid at the time the other sign up is paid for. 3. The Cashier in issuing an invoice copy for any different type of membership or service than the pc or student now has, shall issue a card directing the person to Certs and Awards. 4. Certs and Awards, to which the student or pc or staff member is so routed shall issue, after examination of the invoice, a badge. These badges are plastic transparent covers with a pin as used in Congresses. They are flash-marked with a card on them as follows: (a) SHSBC Student RED (b) Preclear BLUE (c) Solo Audit Student GREEN The person's name and the status is marked on each card and signed by Certs and Awards. The person is told to wear it at all times when around the org. Certs and Awards issues the Membership card, if purchased, at the same time. 5. Staff members, on being employed, are to receive badges from Certs and Awards as follows: (A) Temporary Staff Member - Plastic Badge (GREY) marked "Temporary Staff Member" with the person's name. (B) Provisional Staff Member - Plastic Badge, Divisional Colour, with the person's name and post. (C) Contracted Staff Member, non-executive - a metal badge, gold coloured, to be designed and issued. Executive - a larger badge. Until such time as such badges are available, a gold card shall be used bearing the person's title and name. 6. The Personnel Control Officer routes on staff members to Certs and Awards for badges by a mimeoed initialed slip. All cards must be signed by Certs and Awards. Falsifying a card shall be classed as a Crime. Persons not wearing badges may not have any service. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 198 HUBBARD COLLEGE OF SCIENTOLOGY Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 AUGUST 1966 All Students Director of Examinations Pc Examiner Certs and Awards Secretarial to Exec Dir Franchise RELEASE GRADES The only Release Grades delivered by Certs & Awards are mentioned in HCO Bulletin 27th September, 1965 "Release Gradation" and available as well in 26th September, 1965, Routing and Gradation Chart. There is no particular declare for Keyed-out OT or any certificate such as Grade I OT, Grade 11 OT, etc. These states are simply acknowledged by the auditor without any further action apart from getting the actual, grade declared. LRH:ec.rd Copyright (c) 1966 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 11 JULY 1969 Remimeo DIANETICS AUDITING COMPLETION CERTIFICATE When a PC is completed on Dianetic auditing the Department of Certificates and Awards issues a certificate stating that this person has been audited on Standard Dianetics at (Org concerned), that the person at this time is complete on Dianetic auditing and may proceed with Scientology Grades (or Advanced Courses if that is his or her next step). The certificate is signed and dated. The main function of the certificate is that of a passport to Scientology auditing. It is presented by the Registrar who signs him up for his next auditing. When signing up for Scientology processing at another Org the certificate is shown to the Registrar of that Org by the PC. It is recognised that the person may require further Dianetic auditing at a later date. It is therefore not a Grade Certificate. Brian Livingston LRH:bl.ei.kd CS-5 Copyright (c) 1969 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder (important: See also HCO Policy Letter of 17 November 1969, Dianetics & Scientology Services, Volume 4, page 401.1 199 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 SEPTEMBER 1969 Students ASHO & SH (HCO Policy Letter of 20 January 1969 Academy Students Certs & Awards Amended and Reissued) CLASSIFICATION On completion of his or her checksheets and passing of provisional certification examination the student may be awarded a Provisional Certification and Classification for the level he is trained up to. A provisional Certification and Classification remains in force for one year only. At the end of the year the Provisional Certificates are automatically cancelled. To obtain full permanent Certification and Classification the auditor must apply to the Qualifications Secretary of the Central Scientology Organization of his area (not necessarily the Continental Org) three months prior to the expiration date of his provisional Certificate. Permanent Certification and Classification will be judged on 1. Application of technology-10 case folders must be sent in by the auditor of 10 persons he has audited-this is verified by the organization. 2. Activity in Scientology and what he has done to further the purpose and goals of Scientology; this is to be listed by the applicant and attested to before an Ethics Officer. 3. Clean Ethics record-must obtain an attestation from Ethics Officer of his local organization that his ethics record is clean and no lowered conditions have been assigned-if this is not possible then full details must be sent. 4. Acceptability exam. 5. Judgement exam. 6. A letter stating the auditor's plans, intention and goals in Scientology. 7. Full international membership in force for the next year. The cost of handling the application is paid by the Organization of the person applying for permanent Certification and Classification. 11 If the student flunks his application or does not apply for permanent Classification his provisional Certification & Classification is cancelled and he will be required to retread. If the student passes he will be awarded full Permanent Classification and Certification by the Qual Sec of the Area Org. Philip Quirino LRH:ei.rs.ei.rd CS-5, Tech and Qual Aide Copyright (c) 1969 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder [Note: This issue amended the 20 January 1969 issue of same title by: having the application for permanent Certification and Classification made to the Qual Sec of the local area Org instead of the Sea Org; changed the payment of cost of handling from "the person applying" to the "Organization of the person applying"; deleted the requirement "No permanent Classification will be awarded until the expiry date of the provisional certificate." I [Cancelled by HCO P/L 29 July 1972 Issue 11, Fast Flow in Training, in the 1972 Year Book.] 200 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 NOVEMBER 1969 HCO ES Hat Issue 11 HCO Area See Hat Dept C & A Hat Gdn Hat Legal Hat DIANETICS RIGHT TO AUDIT The following pledge is required to be signed and witnessed by any applicant for HDC before issue of the actual certificate. HDC CERTIFICATE APPLICATION Location Date I of Block Letters Permanent Home Address hereby apply for a certificate as a HUBBARD DIANETIC COUNSELOR. I hereby solemnly pledge myself: 1. To use the AUDITOR'S CODE well known to me whenever employing DIANETICS or STANDARD DIANETICS. 2. To use only STANDARD DIANETICS in processing persons at Dianetic levels. 3. Not to use DIANETICS or STANDARD DIANETICS or its technology or principles under another name or to alter the technology in processing. 4. 1 recognize the right of the Guardian WW or her officers to intervene in matters where the misuse or abuse of DIANETICS or STANDARD DIANETICS occurs. 5. 1 recognize the Hubbard Organizations as the only certifying body for Dianetics. 6. 1 realize gross errors in Dianetics can be corrected by Scientology Reviews. 7. 1 swear that I have been through the STANDARD DIANETIC MATERIALS three times, have passed a comprehensive examination on them with a 100% grade and have audited several sessions consecutively with excellent results according to the preclear. 8. 1 swear that I will use DIANETICS and STANDARD DIANETICS to the best of my ability to help my fellow man and Mankind. SIGNATURE Witness Witness TO LEGAL FILES WW L. RON HUBBARD LRH:rs.ei.rd Founder Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 201 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 NOVEMBER 1969 HCO ES Hat Issue III HCO Area See Hat Dept C & A Hats Legal Hat Gdn Hat DIANETICS RIGHT TO TEACH An HDG (Hubbard Dianetic Graduate), to obtain his actual certificate as an HDG and to obtain his right to teach must sign and have witnessed the following statement and application of his HDG certificate. HDG CERTIFICATE APPLICATION Location 1, Block Letters do hereby apply for my Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Certificate and my right to TEACH Dianetics and to obtain HDC certificates for my qualified students by application to an official Hubbard Dianetic or Scientology organization. By witnessed signature hereon I pledge myself: 1. To use and abide by and require my students to use and abide by THE AUDITOR'S CODE. 2. To teach STANDARD DIANETICS. 3. To use the term STANDARD DIANETICS in communicating any of the technology of STANDARD DIANETICS. 4. To use the term DIANETICS in communicating any of the basic or older materials of Dianetics. 5. To publicly state to students or classes that anything that may have been added or evaluated to a general course of instruction that is not STANDARD DIANETICS that it is not Dianetics or STANDARD DIANETICS when it is not. 6. To require three times through the materials, theory and practical and a 100% passed examination and several well done sessions in a row before I recommend any student for certification or give him a course completion. 7. To inform all my students that errors made in Dianetics are reparable by Scientology Reviews. 8. Not to give support or encouragement to activities calculated to injure measures or persons seeking to safeguard and continue the teaching of Dianetics or Standard Dianetics in a pure state. 9. 1 recognize the right of the Guardian World Wide to intervene in matters where the misuse or abuse of DIANETICS or STANDARD DIANETICS occurs. 10. 1 recognize Hubbard Organizations as the only valid certifying body for Dianetics and Standard Dianetics. 11. To teach and use Dianetics to the best of my ability to help my fellow man and Mankind. (Seal) Witness Signed Witness TO LEGAL FILES WW LRH:Idm.rs.ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright 1969 Founder H by L. Ron ubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 202 HUB13ARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 APRIL 1970 Remimeo Tech Sec Hat (c) of T Hat Supervisor Hats C&A Hat Dir Pubs Hat Registrar Hat GUARANTEE OF SERVICE DELIVERY A new line is to be added to Scientology training and processing Certificates. On student Auditor certificates, above the HCO signature line is to be added: "I guarantee that I have trained this student to the best of my ability", with a line for signature. The Supervisor signs his or her whole signature. On preclear certificates, the following is added: "I guarantee that I have audited this preclear on the above Grade or Grades to the best of my ability and standard tech has been applied to full End Phenomena," Auditor signs the cert in full, and before HCO signs it. When a student or preclear signs up for training or processing, when the student or preclear reaches Tech Services, Tech Services takes the Routing Form to the Tech See for the following to be guaranteed: "I guarantee that the above named preclear/student will receive very good service in this Organization and will attain the expected Grade or level of training." The Tech See signs his full name to this guarantee. This line is to be added into all Routing Forms immediately after the student or pc's arrival at Tech Services. This procedure is needed to alert Tech Sees, Auditors and Supervisors to their full responsibility for real training and effective processing in Scientology Organizations and to ensure that we do deliver what we have, promised. CS-5 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 203 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1971 Issue III Remimeo OES Qual Sec C&A Examiner ATTESTATION AT CERTS AND AWARDS Following the completion of the entire auditing and examiner cycle, per HCO P/L 25 June 1970, "Expanded Lower Grades", the pc is then routed to Certs and Awards where he signs the following attestation form: ATTESTATION 1, , having completed (action or grade) , do hereby attest by my signature below that 1, have, through processing, gained, the ability (filled in by C & A per latest issue Routing and Gradation Chart) to my complete satisfaction. This statement is made entirely on my own cognizance and without reservation. Preclear Signature Date Witness, C & A Auditor's Name Note that this is the final step and is only initiated AFTER the action or grade the preclear is being audited on has been completed to correct and complete end phenomena to the satisfaction of the preclear, the case supervisor, and the Examiner, This is as outlined in standard technical procedure. Craig Beeney, D/G Tech US for Robert H. Thomas, D/G US for Jane Kember, G WW for Mary Sue Hubbard, CS G for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:CB:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 204 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London WA HCO BULLETIN OF 6 APRIL 1957 [Excerpt] MEMBERSHIP HANDLING Memberships are handled by, and are the exclusive property of, the File Clerk. The File Clerk also handles memberships, It will be found that memberships in active times, if the files are up to date and the stencils are well handled, will occupy from a third to a half of the File Clerk's time and that is a very routine procedure and people make so much work out of memberships and all you do is, you take in the membership and you fill out the card and you have a little letter or note of some sort and send it to the person. The reason memberships is hard to do is because everybody runs into memberships everything else. All Membership consists of is telling people to renew, and renewing, and making out cards and so forth and that's all it consists of. If there's anything else comes up on the line it is somewhere else. Now part of memberships is "change of address" and when your change of address comes in you may have to cut some new addressograph stencils, something of that order. Membership consists of two channels. It has two incoming baskets. One basket is memberships (which is just renewal or a new membership) and the other basket is change of address and all Changes of address and all memberships, go to CF, and they have two baskets that sit side by side marked IN and two baskets that sit side by side marked OUT, and you park those things (there's a special arrangement of a table you can make with memberships which is very good). We worked this out and it did prove to be good. We take two baskets on the left of the table and then two baskets at the extreme right of the table and the one which is to the edge of the table is the membership basket and the one which is at the back of the table is the change of address basket and we have them "in" and "out" and then we put on that table and never disturb, all of the materials necessary to do a membership or a change of address and we just lay those materials out on the table. Stacks of paper and the membership cards and everything we have to make out and do and it's all on the table in plain sight in the order that they're used. Thereby we can take, change of address and go straight through them and take change of memberships and get them through quickly so it doesn't take much time. Otherwise a membership clerk is always going "Oh, what do I do now?" What they will send you in the guise of memberships is fabulous. Somebody wants a book list, what is my discount, and all that sort of thing; they have nothing to do with memberships but come under business administration. If you can tell people brutally that they are off-line when they try to disturb the membership chain you'll find memberships don't occupy very much time. But if everything comes in on the line that appertains to members, including the policy that the Association Secretary should make, which they try to throw away, why then you have a mess. LRH:rs.cden.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard [Excerpted from HCO Bulletin of 6 April 1957, Central Files and ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Procurement. A complete copy can be found in Vol. 2, page 248.1 [Note: Certs and Awards is now the point of issuance of Membership Cards and "pushes the Scientology Membership programme along heavily." - FDD 18 Qual Int page 34. Two of its Promotional Actions are: "82. Issues credentials that will be seen around-pins that people will wear, certificates they will hang up, cards they will show. 85 a. Pushes along the Free Membership programme and makes sure Accounts sends a bill for the next year's Membership the moment the six months expires AND IS ITS STATISTIC." HCO P/L 15 December 1965, see page 4.] 205 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 MAY 1960 CenOCon KEEPING MEMBERSHIPS IN FORCE In order to deal with the problem of professional auditors who allow their memberships to lapse, the following routine action is authorized: When a membership lapses, the memberships clerk should write three reminder letters. If the membership is not renewed HCO Area See should then be notified by the memberships clerk. The HCO Area See will then write a letter informing the person that if he does not renew his membership within one month, his Certificate will cease to be valid. If the membership is still not renewed, Memberships and Addressograph must then be notified by the HCO Area Sec. Addressograph should then remove the person's HPA or other qualifying letters from his Address plate. However, the tab should not be changed; in this way the person will still receive mailings to auditors, and there is still a chance that his interest will be revived and that he will eventually renew his membership. Peter Hemery LRH:js.rd HCO Secretary WW Copyright (c) 1960 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JUNE 1962 CenOCon PERMANENT STAFF PRIVILEGE Staff Members who complete Permanent Staff requirements may receive the benefit of International Membership while they are on the staff of a Central Organization or City Office. A N/C invoice is made out by Accounts (so that records exist) upon application by a staff member. If a Permanent Staff Member leaves the Org voluntarily or is dismissed for a valid reason, the International Membership fee becomes payable (part of a year's membership to be worked out pro rata). L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jw.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 206 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JULY 1963 CenOCon SALES OF LIFETIME MEMBERSHIPS OR SHARES Due to projected changes in the corporate status of Scientology organizations, no further sales of HASI Ltd shares or Lifetime memberships are permitted anywhere in the world, effective immediately, L. RON HUBBARD LRH.jw.cden Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 APRIL 1965 BPI Gen Non-Remimeo MEMBERSHIP ATTESTATIONS Notary and Justice of the Peace notarizations are no longer necessary on any member application forms. These have been made unnecessary. A simple, signature is adequate. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:wmc.kd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 207 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF I SEPTEMBER 1965 Issue V Gen Non-Remimeo MEMBERSHIP POLICIES 9Preserved Policy from former Policy Letters which have been cancelled) Memberships Members enrolling must be furnished their cards at once. However, this is also done by application form and on that form the person signing must pledge himself to abide by the rules, codes and policies of the organization and that he understands there is no refund of membership and that he does not belong to or work for any hostile organization or group or any group undisclosed to us that is dedicated to the harming of Mankind. Only a signature is required, not a notary. Pins Wherever possible, make it easy for persons to obtain and wear Scientology pins, the S and double triangle. Such a pin as available should be given new members. Pins should be purchasable for a small sum along with books in the reception office. Policy as to who wears a Scientology pin is governed only by their being a member and subscribing to the membership application statement. However there is no penalty for non members wearing general pins that do not bear notation of class for grade or state of case. Membership Not Part of 10% No 10% administrative percentage is to be sent to Saint Hill on memberships sold. It all goes into the HCO Book Account in the area where the membership is bought and is not part of the organization's weekly gross income. Membership monies go to dissemination. Memberships Non-Refundable No membership monies are ever refundable even for a portion of a year since the purchaser of one usually receives many times its value in discounts within a few days or months. International Membership for Staff Members Staff members, full or part time, continuously employed and under contract are given their International Membership yearly without charge. Their Lifetime Membership must be purchased by themselves. On departure from staff a staff member's International Membership is cancelled as of that date, but may be renewed on proper payment. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.kd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard (Note: The original PLs, now cancelled, from which these were ALL RIGHTS RESERVED preserved, are in Volume 3, Price Engram section, pages 91-136.] 208 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE SECRETARIAL EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR Office of LRH SEC ED 147 INT 10 December 1965 Applies to Org Exec Secs for Execution Address, Certs and Awards and Accounts MEMBERSHIP BILLING Your six months free memberships are beginning to expire. Be certain to send all free membership members a bill for a year's membership for the next year on their expiry date and stating, "Your membership in - is expiring. Please send us your cheque or money order to renew." As this was the whole point of issuing free memberships and as the majority will pay for renewal, the action is worth a lot to your org and must not be neglected. It is a continuing action. Be sure the line is in. [seal] I 0 L 0 G L. RON HUBBARD At - .......... I F 0 [Note: Further Policy Letters on the Membership Programme can be found in Volume 3, pages 143, 150, 151, 157, 165, 245-254 and 258.) 209 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 FEBRUARY 1972 Remimeo All Staff Aft Auditors Add to Qual Personnel Hats IMPORTANT URGENT THE PURPOSE OF THE DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT The Department of Personnel Enhancement Division V, Qualifications is held responsible for these things. 1. THAT NO MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS EXIST AMONGST STAFF, AUDITORS OR IN ORG PUBLIC. 2. THAT ALL TRAINING AND AUDITING PROGRAMS OF STAFF, STUDENTS, AUDITORS, INTERNES OR IN ORG PUBLIC ARE IN CORRECT SEQUENCE, WITHOUT SKIPPED GRADIENT AND DONE. 3. THAT ALL STAFF CASES ARE PROGRESSING SATISFACTORILY WITH GOOD OCA (APA) GAINS AND THAT NO NO CASE GAIN CASES ARE ON STAFF. If there is an outness in any of these three purposes, it is the DIRECTOR OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT who is held responsible, regardless of where the violation occurred in the org or why. Breakdown in Cramming (through no Misunderstood words being found), breakdowns in training (because of skipped gradients), failures of staff members (through no mis-U word handling, programming for hatting and case) and counterintention of persons on org staff or public lines (through no case gain) all lead DIRECTLY to the breakdown and lack of prosperity of THE WHOLE ORG. Thus the DIRECTOR OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT and his or her staff HOLD THE KEYS TO STAFF AND ORG SUCCESS. They do not hold HCO responsible or Tech responsible or C/Ses or Supervisors. THEY GET THE JOB DONE! Word Clearing is Priceless tech. They are the Custodians and appliers of it. Programming on smooth gradients is priceless tech. They are the Custodians of it. Staff personal cases and health make or break the org. The personnel of Personnel Enhancement are the Custodians of these. PERSONAL The whole operating basis of Personnel Enhancement is PERSONAL. There is no mass, disinterested, bureaucratic approach. "Problems of Work" is the key to operating this Department. Particle by Particle, step by step, each individual is HANDLED and MAINTAINED. 210 REACH The Department does NOT just sit in one place waiting for others to originate. A good Personnel Enhancement staff member REACHES. And in spite of all rebuffs, gets the job done. It looks for business all over the org and brings it in. ANATOMY An org is made up of individuals. The customers are individuals. If each part of the whole is handled then the whole will be complete and successful. And what can go adrift with these individuals? Words are misunderstood. The individual then goes blank on his materials and does not act. Training and auditing skip gradients and leave the person confused and inactive. Cases bog or are neglected or health deteriorates and the individual is a drag on himself or the group, or gaining not at all is destructive. SUMMARY So with these three guiding purposes, the DEPARTMENT OF PERSONNEL ENHANCEMENT can make an org rise and rise and rise. With all departmental lines adjusted to these purposes and with each of its staff in full agreement and in action on them, the even partially established org cannot fail. This is the repair crew, which, functioning well individually and on an all hands basis at need, keeps the most vital part of the org, its beings, in shape to run. This department keeps each individual staff member running. And at need it keeps the In Org public gaining. It is a very great trust. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:ne.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 211 FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY 1812 19th Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 16 MAY 1957 All Staff INTENSIVES FOR STAFF Superseding all earlier arrangements, staff intensives may be had in the following manner: I . The staff member pays the units of the staff auditor. 2. The staff member getting the auditing also forgoes his own pay (or units) for the period audited. 3. Only 25 hours may be had at any one time. (Tip: Under a unit pay system, if one picks a low week one (a) gives the staff auditors something to do and (b) pays little for his intensive.) No staff intensives may be had when all auditors are needed on outside pcs. These have priority. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:md.rd [Note: The above P/L was first issued on 11 April 1957 from HASI London.] NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I ASSOCIATION SECRETARY DIRECTIVE OF I I JUNE 1957 STAFF INTENSIVES Staff Intensives cost the amount of the Auditor's unit for that week plus room rent if any. No staff member may have more than 25 hours in one block. Staff receiving an intensive forgo their unit pay for that week. The Department head must notify the Association Secretary of the fact that a staff intensive is to take place no later than the Thursday of the week prior to the intensive. In the event of the Clinic being fully booked no staff intensive may be had in that week. It must be clearly understood that in the Clinic outside preclears have priority and that if a preclear comes in which makes a staff intensive difficult to fit in the staff intensive will be immediately cancelled and carried forward to another week. No later than the Monday morning of the intensive the staff member receiving an intensive must pay to the Registrar the sum of 8 units of whatever value the unit is for the following Friday plus any room rent which may be necessary. Staff intensives cannot be charged against an account. Jack Parkhouse 212 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE WASHINGTON, D.C. HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JULY 1958 STAFF CLEARING The Director of Processing is in charge of Staff Clearing. LRH:bt.rd L. RON HUBBARD H.A.S.I. L.A. POLICY Effective 27 October 1958 (Refer to HCO Bulletin of 9 July 1958) No staff member is to be processed by anyone other than another staff member, assigned by the Dir of Processing who is in charge of all processing. Julia Lewis Salmen Executive Director HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W. 1. HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1959 Issued in Saint Hill CenOCon PROCESSING OF STAFF MEMBERS No person may be ordered to processing in any organization without being suspended without pay for the duration of the processing. The duration of the processing must be such as to totally resolve the case if the person has been ordered to it. LRH:brb.mc.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 JUNE 1960 Sthil STAFF AUDITING Staff auditing, the auditing of staff and by staff during regular working hours is herewith suspended due to a new work programme. Co-auditing or auditing arrangements after hours or on week-ends is encouraged. L~ RON HUBBARD 213 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 DECEMBER 1960 Re-issued from Sthil All Central Orgs All Staff Member Hats STAFF CLEARING-NEW POLICY All staff clearing co-audits are abolished herewith. Instead, the following plan is effective immediately on receipt in order to benefit staff personnel with more hours of processing than were available in staff clearing courses. HGCs will at once, put on staff one, two or three extra auditors on a continuing basis, if they have no extra auditors as a normal rule. Staff members, providing they are permanent and full time and on units may have 121/2 hour intensives as regular HGC pcs, during any one week. The staff member can be audited mornings or afternoons, 21/2 hours per day. In the case of a staff auditor only a 25 hour intensive may be given or an evening 12 1/2 hour intensive. The staff member does not necessarily surrender his whole pay for a 121/2 hour intensive. He surrenders half a staff auditor's units from his own units. The surrendered units go only to the salary sum. In the case of a staff auditor receiving a 25 hour intensive, his units are surrendered. If he takes a 121/2 hour evening intensive, the person auditing is paid extra the units that were surrendered. All processing is handled as in the case of any HGC pc by the (c) of P. All testing and admin and interview is the same for a staff member as for any HGC pc. The staff member enrolls for this through the Registrar with the usual steps and invoice. The invoice is marked only the number of units surrendered. The Registrar, checked by HGC admin, carries a staff processing roster. No staff member may have consecutive intensives. If a staff member has an intensive, he must "fall in" afterwards at the bottom of the waiting list. Only when no staff intensives are otherwise in demand could this rule be violated. During the remaining hours of his work day during a week when he is getting an intensive a staff member is expected to be busy at his post as usual. On posts where time off must be covered, the staff member should arrange with someone to cover for him or her the 21/2 hours he is being audited (as in the case of an instructor having a lecture). On a staff of 35, two auditors should be added to HGC strength permitting 4 12 1/2 hour intensives to be given per week. This permits a staff member to have an intensive about every eight weeks. HCO Board of Review is requested to expedite the examination of permanent staff members on the Org Board, comm system and knowledge of a general staff member's hat. The (c) of P may use the extra two staff auditors to take up slack on a sudden influx of pcs but the scarcity may not be permitted to continue more than one week. In a slack period any HGC auditor may be used for intensives for staff but not for more than two weeks. LRH:js.gh.oden L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 214 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 MARCH 1961 Central Orgs One to each Staff Member STAFF MEMBERS ORDERED TO PROCESSING The Association Secretary or the HCO Area Secretary can order a staff member to processing, if it is considered necessary. The maximum -number of hours allowed for this is 121/2, but 5 hours is preferred. In this time, the rudiments, mainly withholds, and Formula 15 should be flattened. On a person ordered to processing nothing else may be run but these processes. The processing must be carried out in the HGC, and supervised by the (c) of P. When the processing is completed, the HCO Area Secretary checks the staff member to see if he or she is ready to resume his or her post in the organization. A full report of all such processing must be forwarded to HCO Technical Secretary WW'. Should longer than 121/2 hours be considered necessary, the HCO Area Secretary must submit a full report to the Executive Director, for approval before any longer period than 121/2 hours is undertaken. It is unlikely that it would be okayed due to the staff intensive programme. This processing should be taken in ordinary day schedule auditing, and the staff member does not receive units for the time spent in processing. If after 121/2 hours, the HCO Area Secretary does not consider the staff member is yet able to resume his post, the staff member should be told this, and that it is up to him to get his case up to the level where he can ably handle his post. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jl.rd Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 215 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 APRIL 1961 CenOCon STAFF INTENSIVES (Modified) I have some particular goals in clearing. I want to see the Association Secretary or Organizational Secretary and the HCO Secretary cleared first, then the (c) of P, then the Chief Registrar and Letter Registrar, then the remaining executives and then the staff. Although the HCO Policy Letter of Dee 21, 1960 lays down equal amounts of auditing for each staff member, the rule was made before speed of SOP Goals clearing was established. The programme should be: I . Abolish all former staff auditing arrangements for persons who do not intend to stay with the Org any time (who are temporary and have balked at signing a year's contract). These go on List 3 below. 2. For a Central Org, make 2 lists of staff. List One is the Assn See (Org See), HCO Continental and/or Area See, the (c) of P, the Chief Registrar and the Letter Registrar. Make up List Two which consists of other executives and long term staff. Make up List Three of staff balance as below. Put an auditor on List One and rotate 121/2 hour intensives on it. Put another auditor on List Two and rotate 12YZ hour intensives on it. As you have deleted temporary staff members from List Two it is not too long a list. For the moment, pay these two auditors from units (but don't take their units back from other staff members). Make no charge to executives or staff members for their auditing who are on Lists One or Two. 3. Make List Three. This comprises all temporary staff. Permit them to have auditing when a staff auditor is idle, 12 1/2 hour intensives, meaning two intensives each time a staff auditor has no pcs. Temporary staff pay in half their units for the week they have a 12 1/2 hour intensive. LIST ONE The Assn (Org) See and others on the list may be audited on 121/2 hour intensives for which they do not pay or may be audited straight on up to release, whichever is best in the opinion of their auditor, depending on how far their case has gone and what state they are in. If the 121/2 hours are extended, it must be to another 12 1/2 hours. Other intensives for List One are put back that much. LIST TWO The persons on this list are rotated equally, regardless of where they have arrived. LIST THREE The persons on this list are rotated equally. 216 4. City Offices should have one staff auditor auditing staff, paid on units. Until the Assn Sec and Area Sec are Releases, they receive 12 1/2 hours per week every other week, and remaining staff take the remaining 12 1/2 hours in rotation. When a state of release is obviously attained by the Assn Sec and Area Sec they receive then their auditing in rotation with other staff. Now that we have easy releasing and faster clearing, let's take advantage of it and get principals and staff clear before the rush begins. AUDITORS MANDATORY A Central Org may not refuse to assign two auditors for Lists I and 2 and may not use these auditors for paying pcs. A City Office may not refuse to employ a staff staff auditor for auditing staff only, and may not use said auditor for outside pcs. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ph.rd Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER 1961 Sthil AUDITING SCHEDULES Now that there is so little uncertainty on clearing persons, we are now to invest both time and money in clearing all Saint Hill Staff. We have, and must continue to have, a Technical Secretary who is a willing and able auditor. Under the general supervision of myself, under the case supervision (check outs on correctness of rudiments, goals, terminals, levels and engrams) of Mrs. Hubbard, under the assignment supervision of the Technical Secretary, Philip Quirino, the programme is now launched. All auditing shall consist of Routine 3 on whatever case. This consists of finding goal, terminal and Pre-Hav levels and running them, Security Checking and running engrams on the goalsterminal chain. Some auditing is to be done by staff members, as authorized, some by the Technical Secretary, some by any assistants agreed upon for the Technical Secretary. LRH.il.rd L. RON HUBBARD 217 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 OCTOBER 1961 Sthil STAFF CLEARING The Saint Hill Staff Clearing Programme will begin on Monday October 9, 196 1. Overall supervision of cases shall be done by Mary Sue Hubbard. All assignments to auditors, auditing rooms, auditing reports, book-keeping and time sheets, all files and administration of this programme shall be handled by the Technical Secretary. Anyone on staff, Scientologist or non-Scientologist, office or domestic staff may have auditing under this programme. Auditing is not compulsory. It must be requested by the person himself and the request routed to the Technical Secretary. Any certified auditor on staff, holding a certificate of Hubbard Professional Auditor or higher may act as a staff auditor to staff. Application must be made to the Technical Secretary. AUDITING FEES All auditing shall be free to the staff member. The staff member is not paid by us for receiving auditing. We will pay each auditor 7/6d per hour for every hour of auditing actually delivered providing it is delivered after working hours (9.00 a.m. - 5.30 p.m.) and on all weekends. Auditing delivered during working hours shall be unpaid. To be paid for auditing, the assignment must have been made by the Technical Secretary, must be signed on a regular Purchase Order Form by the auditor, the Technical Secretary and finally initialled, by myself, and a regular report of the session must be turned in to the Technical Secretary. PROCESSES The allowed processes of this auditing are only 1. Processing Security Checks, 2. locating goal and terminal, 3. Pre Hav Scale running and 4. engram running when specifically authorized by the Technical Secretary. All goals and terminals found must be verified by Mary Sue Hubbard before being run, or at her discretion, checked out by an auditor of her designation. An auditor doing checking will be paid for his time. The Technical Secretary working after hours will be paid for his time when devoted to this programme. It will be seen, then, that only processes leading directly to clearing are authorized. Assists are not authorized for this programme. REPORTS A special foldered file for each case being run will be kept by the Technical Secretary and will be retained in confidence in a locked file drawer, Each session report will be reviewed by the Technical Secretary, commented on and enclosed in the file. The file will be made available to the auditor before session and must be turned in at session end. The Technical Secretary also shall make a weekly progress report to me on cases being run. Accounts must be given by Thursday noon of each week all session purchase orders if they are to be paid that same week. Accounts shall file these purchase orders in the personnel pay folder of each auditor employed on this programme. The amounts shall be paid not as pay but as bonuses. SUMMARY This is an opportunity for auditors to earn bonus money and help Saint Hill. This is an opportunity for all staff members to get clear, using evenings and week-ends to be audited. They do not receive money or pay for being audited but will receive more lasting benefit in their lives, as witnessed by the stable gains now being made. LRH:jl.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 218 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 MAY 1962 Central Orgs STAFF STAFF AUDITOR'S HAT The following write up of a Staff Staff Auditor's hat, as used in Washington DC, can be used everywhere as a model hat for a Staff Staff Auditor. STAFF STAFF AUDITOR HAT THE PURPOSE OF A STAFF STAFF AUDITOR: To keep Staff morale high, by keeping missed withholds cleaned up. To see to it that Staff gets best auditing possible. To Release and Clear Staff. AN OUTLINE OF THE DUTIES OF A STAFF STAFF AUDITOR: 1. He accepts his pc for processing. 2. He releases his pc from processing. 3. He maintains his schedule. 4. He is responsible for his part in the routing of staff preclears. 5. He routes and handles all dispatches routed to him. 6. He answers all mail routed to him. 7. He makes out his auditor report neatly. S. He arranges missed withhold interviews with the Technical Director for his preclears. 9. He helps maintain his auditing and testing room. 10. He maintains his hat and is responsible for knowing his hat. 11. He is responsible for the E-Meter issued to him. 12. He is responsible for the results he gets on his preclears. 13. He follows auditing procedures as issued in HCO Bulletins. 14. He maintains the Auditor's Code and the Code of a Scientologist. 15. He keeps auditing ability good. 16. He clears staff members. 17. He follows all organization policies. 18. He sets a good example for HGC Staff Auditors. 19. He does other duties as assigned by the Technical Director such as checking Staff Auditors on HGC Bulletins, or helping give missed withhold checks on HGC preclears. 20. As staff deserves the best auditing in the world, the Staff Staff Auditor must do all that is possible to keep his skill high and handle his post in a business-like and orderly fashion. 21. He follows the Technical Director's advice regarding his preclear. ACCEPTANCE AND RELEASE OF PRECLEARS I . A Staff Staff Auditor can refuse only a preclear he feels he cannot help. 2. He may refuse to process a preclear for whom he has a marked antipathy. 3. He can refuse to release from processing a preclear whom he feels it would be dangerous to the survival or morale of the Organization to release at that time. SCHEDULING The Staff Staff Auditor should maintain quite exactly the working hours of the 219 Organization and his auditing schedule. It is a violation of the Auditor's Code to be late to sessions with the preclear. This is most important, then. Any time lost in processing which is due to the lateness of the Staff Staff Auditor will have to be made up by that Staff Staff Auditor. Any time lost due to the lateness of the preclear will not be made up by the Staff Staff Auditor. SCHEDULING The Staff Staff Auditor will follow the schedule posted by the Technical Director. He should check the Information Board in the Auditors' Room for his auditing schedule, the room assigned, and for special interviews requested by the Technical Director for his preclear. Also for any further assignments after his auditing day has finished. AUDITOR REPORTS The Staff Staff Auditor makes out, daily, an Auditor's Report in duplicate. The carbon of this is kept in his preclear's folder; the original is sent to HCO WW. The Staff Staff Auditor places the carbon in his preclear's folder and puts the original in the HGC Administrator's "In Basket". This must be kept orderly since we don't want staff preclear's Auditor Reports floating around all over the Organization for anyone to read. CONDUCT The Staff Staff Auditor is not auditing a follow staff member and "buddy". He is auditing a preclear, and should conduct himself with an orderly, business-like and professional attitude while auditing his preclear. A Staff Staff Auditor's preclear should be treated like any preclear. A Staff Staff Auditor should understand that he's auditing a preclear who has a bank, and should not let the fact that he's a staff member and a Scientologist colour his decisions in auditing that preclear. Neither should he let this fact excuse him from conducting his sessions with a professional attitude. A preclear is a preclear no matter who it may be. RESULTS The Staff Staff Auditor must get results on his preclears. He should attend any auditor training provided by the Organization. He has the Technical Director (c) of P'ing his auditing and should fully co-operate with the Technical Director in the auditing of his preclears. The Staff Staff Auditor helps the survival of the whole Organization to the degree that he makes staff members more able to handle their jobs. Issued by: Peter Hemery HCO Sec WW for L RON HUBBARD LRH:cw.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 220 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 SEPTEMBER 1962 (Reissued from Sec ED No. 397 of Washington DC) CenOCon STAFF CLEARING PROGRAM This replaces all programs; there are no other Staff Clearing Programs of any kind, no auditing is being given to Staff. This doesn't disturb Staff families and so forth being fed into the HGC at unit rates as offered for DC only when you have a spare auditor or intern or something like that. But it does knock out all other Staff Clearing Programs and it immediately releases and relieves Staff Staff Auditor Number One and Two, and Three, and cancels all directives as pertaining to these people. That's gone. In its place we put a Staff Clearing Program which we will call the Staff 3GA Clearing Program. The essence of this is goals finding and administration. The personnel required for it are a Goals Finder and an Assistant. The Goals Finder has no other post or activity of any kind. He is simply Goals Finder and keeps more or less regular auditing hours; he has an office and auditing room which are the same thing-this auditing room also has in it an administrative desk for use after auditing hours. The Goals Finder finds goals on Staff Members when they are ready. The readiness of a Staff Member to have his goal found is determined by the availability of the Goals Finder and by the readiness of the case to have a goal found. If there are many cases ready to have a goal found, it is selected by lot-bamboo sticks, shake the lucky number out of the box and that's you for next week. All other auditing activities are either leading to finding the goal or listing the goal out. This program does not halt with one goal, it goes on through-but no second goal may be found on anyone as long as there is a person who hasn't had their first goal found. The only thing that could derange this is some unlocked for circumstance such as somebody's just broken his neck and will be in the hospital for 17 weeks or some such thing. Then the Goals Finder would start right through on his next series. The activity of the staff who are auditing each other is as follows:- A Problems Intensive; goals listing for the 850 list; then it just skips right there, the person gets another Problems Intensive if they are waiting, they can't be hurt by that many Problems Intensives. Then there's this area where they pass in to the hands of the Goals Finder-he snaps them off post and audits them full auditing hours until that goal is found. That is not by intensive, but is by how long it takes. If he finds the goal in 5 hours on Monday, then the next person on the list is taken on Tuesday; somebody else he takes a week and a half to find their goal, so he takes a week and a half to find their goal. It's not by intensive, it's by goal. Then that gives us the remainder of our activity of mutual auditing on staff which is the listing out of that goal. Of course the Assistant to the Goals Finder and the Goals Finder keep their eye on that listing activity to make sure that the goal is cleaned up at the beginning of each session, and that it is going smoothly. Now there are two zones of activity: 1. For the inexperienced, the untrained, or the fellow who doesn't think he is too competent to audit somebody. This we call the Staff Co-audit and that meets at least twice a week in the evening for a three hour session. They would give three hours and receive three hours. Like, they would give 221 three hours on Tuesday, and receive three hours on Thursday. Now this activity is supervised by the part time Assistant of the Goals Finder who is also the Administrator-he comes on duty at the end of the day's auditing in the HGC and does his administrative action, and on the off evenings, when he's not supervising any class, he can catch up on his administrative work, reports and so on. This fellow has a board which denotes the Staff Co-audit and how many people are on that. Now we come to the second activity on staff which is a mutual auditing activity and everybody has a pc, and everybody is a pc. These hours of auditing are given at the discretion of these people. They can audit in their own rooms or most anyplace. Everyone of their sessions has to have a full auditing report which must be brought into the Administrator of the Staff 3GA Clearing Program, who is the Staff Auditor who is also the Supervisor of the Staff Co-auditand that auditor report must be checked out and OKd and eye must be kept on the progress of the sessions. There's a rule here that a person may not receive more auditing hours than they give, so therefore the number of auditing hours received and given must be posted as part of the posting on the lists of this mutual auditing activity. Of course the Staff Co-audit keeps itself more or less straight, but if somebody's absent from that, God knows what happens. This must be discouraged. On goof-offs no persuasive action will be taken-we will just say, "This is the way it is, this is what you do, and God help you if you don't. If you're not interested in clearing somebody in the Staff 3GA Clearing Program we don't think you're interested in being part of this Org." We won't threaten with immediate excommunication because people get restimulated and everything else, but don't expect on a Clearing Program everything is going to go smooth and everybody's going to stay in session-because they're not. There will be a lot of randomity and it takes just pure unadulterated force to keep it in line. Now there must be checking of Rudiments, and checking for Missed W/Hs and such activities as that. How these are arranged is relatively unimportant but they must exist. If the Goals Finder finds that a Staff Auditor is goofing up on his Staff Clearing Program pc, there should be an investigation of HGC to find out what that Staff Auditor is doing to the public pcs. The Goals Finder moves as rapidly as possible to get as many goals found and checked out as possible. He will ordinarily want these goals checked out by somebody else, so there should be somebody else ready to check them out-it won't amount to more than one or two a week. As soon as we have completed all the Staff all the way around on finding the first goals we go back to the beginning again and find the second goals. When a new person comes on staff he is added to the bottom of the list. Order of seniority must be established. There is no other complication on this Program. There are no check sheets required from these people, there's nothing required from these people. The Goals Finder finding bad sessions going on should make some duressful action-he should say, "The bulletins were available, you didn't read them-what the hell was wrong with you?" This is tough. This program is not the courtesy staff mutual co-audit or staff clearing we've had in the past where we were being nice to everybody and marking time. There's a vast difference here-this is our determination to get everybody cleared on Staff. It takes somebody's determination to get people cleared; a person himself bucking into this line is apt to quail and fall back, so therefore you have to keep the determination high to get the project completed. It's not courtesy; our feeling is if a person does not want to get cleared or help clear somebody he has no business whatsoever in the Organization. That's just that! Bang! 222 The Administrator makes the team assignments, but appeal may be made to the Goals Finder, whose adjudication is final. You can have an additional Part Time Administrator to help outand if you have another Goals Finder well fine. There's no limit on this except the amount of talent. YOU MUST NOT PUT A NON STHIL GRADUATE ON THE POST OF GOALS FINDER. It would cause the demise of the Org. This program abolishes the responsibility of the (c) of P for Staff state of case, that all goes under Goals Finder Hat. Co-audit teams which exist already on staff and which are successful should not be broken up. This would be a breach of the Auditor's Code-"Do not permit a frequent change of auditors." That is the program as I see it. If this is carried forward quite forcefully and quite persuasively and without anybody listening to any nonsense, and so forth, you're going to wind up with, in a very few months, a bunch of clears on Staff. If you kept this program going forward and furnished people for training to Sthil on whom you could count when they came home in sufficient number so that you've got them for the public and you've got them for Staff you'll wind up with a completely OT Staff before you got through. And I can see that this is well within our existing Technical Reality. Two further notes: An eye should be kept on the listing after goal is found and it should be part of the Goals Finder's Hat to check such cases that are listing to clear, and frankly his time from the time he ceases to audit on his regular auditing period during the day, to the end of the working day, should be more or less consumed with checking over cases and seeing how they are going rather than doing administration. These cases should be checked over for free needle and this and that and the other thing. The Missed W/H Programme run on staff by Org See or through HCO or by HCO or by the Org See See or anything else, any security programme of any kind or any missed W/H programme of any kind, has absolutely nothing to do with the Staff 3GA Clearing Programme. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED (Amended by HCO P/L 17 June 1963, Staff Clearing Program, page 226.) 223 HUB13ARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex (Reissued from Washington DC) HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 SEPTEMBER AD 12 CenOCon GOAL PROCESSING - IMPORTANCE OF It is of the importance of Policy that Staff Members are not left with unfinished cycles of action on goals processing. It has come to my attention in many instances on the return of an Organization Member from Saint Hill, or after an Organization Member's goal has been found in an Organization and checked out, that a state of utter neglect sets in which is highly detrimental to the efficiency of the Organization as well as the case of the individual. The longer a goal is left unlisted the more trouble is going to be had in listing it. Recent research has revealed that the earliest goals found on individuals were probably the right goals, and if these goals are checked out they should be listed as soon as possible. Finding a Dynamic and finding an Item may be of the utmost therapeutic value, and finding a Goal may be of considerable interest to the pc and the auditor alike, but the most important step is not undertaken until the goal is listed. That listing is sometimes long and arduous is no reason to forget to do it. The full effect of goals processing and indeed any lasting effect from goals processing is only attained when the state of clear is reached. I am cross-in having found out that nearly every Saint Hill Graduate returned to an Organization has been given no auditing on the subject of Goals Item Listing. Finding a Dynamic and an Item or finding a Goal does not make a Clear. It is only listing that makes a Clear. Listing should be accomplished to a state of complete free needle on all lines. There is no substitute for this. We do not want a bunch of 1/3 or 1/4 cleared persons about who are still enturbulated with their cases and who still do not have a subjective reality on clearing. The utmost attention will be given this at once by all Technical Directors, Directors of Processing, Staff Goals Finders, as well as HCO Sees and Org Sees. The essence of the Policy is-do not let half cleared persons stay half cleared around staffs. Audit them out to Clear-check it out to clear. We do not want to be the cobbler's children. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:jw.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 224 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 APRIL 1963 Sthil THE SAINT HILL STAFF CO-AUDIT All Co-auditing on Saint Hill staff is under the general charge of the Course Secretary and under the direct handling and supervision of the Co-Audit Supervisor. Any session given to any staff member must become a matter of a proper auditor's report and all auditor's reports must be turned in to the Co-audit Supervisor within 12 hours from session end. All permanent records and Case Folders are retained by the Co-audit Supervisor and must be made available to auditors before the start of sessions. All auditing assignments are made by the Co-audit Supervisor after consultation with the Course Secretary. Any disagreement with assignments as to time, auditor or preclear, should be made directly to the Co-audit Supervisor and if not satisfactorily settled may be appealed to the Course Secretary whose decision shall be final. Disagreements with technical directions should be taken up with the C Co-audit Supervisor before the session to which the directions apply and if not satisfactorily settled may be appealed to the Course Secretary. This makes it important that folders be examined by auditors well before session time. Departures from technical directions given may not be undertaken at the beginning of or during a session. If there is no time to appeal, do as directed and appeal afterwards before the next session to be given. Adhere to current auditing practice and technology. Ignorance of it is no excuse, and no allowances will be made. Do your best in any session and find out about any questionable points as soon as possible. Auditors will receive in so far as possible as many hours as they give. No all audit-no auditing, or the reverse, all receiving and no giving will be tolerated. Any staff member if auditing or being audited by Saint Hill staff, or auditing as a staff member on such things as assists, are members of the Co-audit. There are no exceptions, special arrangements or "withdrawals from the Co-audit". If a Scientologist staff member is on staff he or she is part of the Co-audit. If a Scientologist staff member is not on the Co-audit he or she is not on staff. Exemption to this rule may be obtained only by permission in writing from both the Co-audit Supervisor, and the Course Secretary to be exempted. By Scientology staff member is meant any staff member ever awarded any certificate or Course, completion at any time in Dianetics or Scientology. A family member of the Co-audit is one who is related by blood or marriage to a Saint Hill Scientology staff member and who has been awarded at, any time a certificate or Course completion in Dianetics or Scientology. Such a person may join the staff Co-audit but may not do so temporarily or for only some of the sessions. Permission for such membership in the Coaudit is proposed to the Co-audit Supervisor and must be passed on by the Course Secretary. No fees are paid by members of the Co-audit for auditing or being audited regardless of the time or length of sessions. Fees are paid for auditing only for assists or auditing nonScientology staff and only when arranged in advance by the Course Secretary, and only for the period stated in the arrangement. Clear bracelets at the expense of the organization will be awarded members of the Co-audit cleared on the Co-audit when clearing requirements are met. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.cden Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 225 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1963 (Amends HCO Policy Letter of September 10, 1962) CenOCon STAFF CLEARING PROGRAM This replaces all programs: there are no other Staff Clearing Programs of any kind, no auditing is being given to Staff. This doesn't disturb Staff families and so forth being fed into the HGC at unit rates as offered for DC only when you have a spare auditor or intern or something like that. But it does knock out all other Staff Clearing Programs. In its place we put a Staff Clearing Program which we will call the Staff R3 Clearing Program. The essence of this is supervision and administration. The personnel required for it are a supervisor (Saint Hiller) and an Assistant. He has an office and auditing room which are the same thing-this auditing room also has in it an administrative ' desk for use after auditing hours. The activity of the staff who are auditing each other is as follows:- A Problems Intensive, if necessary; then running on current goals procedures. A Saint Hiller is appointed as Staff Supervisor of Staff Cases. He calls them in during the day, checks over cases and progress-can even audit them. Does anything and everything to clear them. Now there are two zones of activity: 1. For the inexperienced, the untrained, or the fellow who doesn't think he is too competent to audit somebody. This we call the Staff Co-audit and that meets at least twice a week in the evening for a three hour session. They would give three hours and receive three hours. Like, they would give three hours on Tuesday, and receive three hours on Thursday. Now this activity is supervised by the part time Assistant of the Supervisor who is also the Administratorhe comes on duty at the end of the day's auditing in the HGC and does his administrative actions, and on the off evenings, when he's not supervising any class, he can catch up on his administrative work, reports and so on. This fellow has a board which denotes the Staff Co-audit and how many people are on that. Now we come to the second activity on staff which is a mutual auditing activity and everybody has a pc, and everybody is a pc. These hours of auditing are given at the discretion of these people. They can audit in their own rooms or most anyplace. Everyone of their sessions has to have a full auditing report which must be brought into the Administrator of the Staff Clearing Program, who is the staff Auditor who is also the Supervisor of the Staff Co-audit-and that auditor report must be checked out and OK'd and an eye must be kept on the progress of the sessions. There's a rule here that a person may not receive more auditing hours than they give, so therefore the number of auditing hours received and given must be posted as part of the posting on the lists of this mutual auditing activity. Of course the Staff Co-audit keeps itself more or less straight, but if somebody's absent from that Godknows what happens. This must be discouraged. On goof-offs no persuasive action will be taken-we will just say, "This is the way it is, this is what you do, and God help you if you don't. If you're not interested in clearing somebody in the Staff Clearing Program we don't think you're interested in being part of this Org." We won't threaten with immediate excommunication because people get restimulated and everything else, but don't expect on a Clearing Program everything is going to go smooth and everybody's going to stay in session-because they're not. There will be a lot of randomity and it takes just pure unadulterated force to keep it in line. Now there must be checking of Rudiments, and checking for Missed W/Hs and such activities as that. How these are arranged is relatively unimportant but they must exist. If the Supervisor or Technical Director finds that a Staff Auditor is goofing up on his Staff Clearing Program pc there should be an investigation of HGC to find out 226 what that Staff Auditor is doing to the public pcs. The Co-audit Supervisor moves as rapidly as possible to get as many goals run out as possible. When a new person comes on staff he is added to the bottom of the list, Order of seniority must be established. From time to time introduce any necessary training to keep the members of the Co-audit abreast of current technique. The Supervisor finding bad sessions going on should make some duressful action-he should say, "The Bulletins were available, you didn't read them-what the hell was wrong with you?" This is tough. This program is not the courtesy staff mutual co-audit or staff clearing we've had in the past where we were being nice to everybody and marking time. There's a vast difference here-this is our determination to get everybody cleared on Staff. It takes somebody's determination to get people cleared; a person himself bucking into this line is apt to quail and fall back, so therefore you have to keep the determination high to get the project completed. It's not courtesy; our feeling is if a person does not want to get cleared or help clear somebody he has no business whatsoever in the Organization. That's Just That! Bang! The Administrator makes the team assignments, but appeal may be made to the Supervisor or Technical Director, whose adjudication is final. You can have an additional Part Time Administrator to help out - and if you have another, well fine. There's no limit on this except the amount of talent. YOU MUST NOT PUT A NON STHIL GRADUATE ON THE POST OF SUPERVISOR. It would cause the demise of the Org. This program abolishes the responsibility of the (c) of P for Staff state of case, that all goes under the Supervisor's hat. The Supervisor could be the Technical Director or another Saint Hill graduate working under Technical Director. Co-audit teams which exist already on staff and which are successful should not be broken up. This would be a breach of the Auditor's Code-"Do not permit a frequent change of auditors." That is the program as I see it. If this is carried forward quite forcefully and quite persuasively and without anybody listening to any nonsense, and so forth, you're going to wind up with, in a very few months, a bunch of clears on Staff. ARC Break assessments are done where necessary. Anything and everything is done to help clearing of staff. If you kept this program going forward and furnished people for training to Sthil on whom you could count when they came home in sufficient number so that you've got them for the public and you've got them for Staff you'll wind up with a completely OT Staff before you get through. And I can see that this is well within our existing Technical Reality. Two further notes: An eye should be kept on the progress of cases and it should be part of the Supervisor's Hat to check such cases that are listing to clear, and frankly his time from the time he ceases to audit on his regular auditing period during the day, to the end of the working day, should be more or less consumed with checking over cases arid seeing how they are going rather than doing administration. These cases should be checked over for free needle and this and that and the other thing. The Missed W/H program run on staff by Org Sec or through HCO or by HCO or by the Org See Sec or anything else, any security program of any kind or any Missed W/H program of any kind, has absolutely nothing to do with the Staff Clearing Program, L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.rd Copyright 0 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 227 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 AUGUST 1963 CenOCon ARC BREAK ASSESSMENTS ON STAFF (Cancels previous similar policies on Staff O/Ws, Missed W/Hs, etc) An ARC Break Assessment, as per HCO Bulletin of July 5, AD 13, should be done on all Staff weekly, replacing any Missed Withhold or By-Passed Charge checks currently being done. This check is primarily the responsibility of the HCO Area Sec but may be delegated to the Tech Dir, (c) of P, or whoever is in charge of the Staff Clearing Programme, but no delegation of the action relieves the HCO See from responsibility for getting it done well and weekly. L. RON HUBBARD LRH.jw.rd Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 DECEMBER 1963 CenOCon ORG STAFF W/H CHECKS (Cancels earlier Pol Ltrs on Missed W/H Checks) All Central Org and City Office Staff Members must be given a W/H session each week, particularly execs and staff auditors. By new Classification Chart, only general O/W may be run at Level 11, and Itsa on the org below that level. The (c) of P is responsible under guidance of HCO Area See. As these sessions are longer, possibly an hour or so, Co-audit assignment and a chit for it should be arranged, L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 228 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1963 Sthil Only CO-AUDIT Co-audit will hereafter concentrate only on OT processes. A period of training for all Co-audit members will be entered upon as of December 16, 1963. Until after Christmas Basic Auditing and TRs and general O/W will be concentrated on during scheduled auditing periods. After Christmas special training will be given in: I . Basic Auditing for Goals 2. Nomenclature and Definitions 3, Technique of running. It is expected that by February 15, 1964, all the data will be instinctively known by pcs, and auditors and goals processes will then be entered upon by all Co-audit members. No further goals processing or other processing than the above will be done on the Sthil Coaudit until further advices. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:gl.rd Copyright (c) 1963 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 229 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 MARCH 1964 CenOCon STAFF REGULATIONS STAFF INTENSIVES Any permanent staff member of a Central Organization may buy auditing from that organization's HGC by: (a) Paying one half the staff auditor's units. (b) Giving up his or her own units for that week. (c) Arranging during the week of the intensive to have his or her post covered adequately. Any such intensive must be taken the full 25 hours in that week and may not be proportioned into other weeks for any reason. Such intensives are made available through the Registrar but may be scheduled only by the Director of Processing, No staff intensive may be scheduled by deferring auditing purchased by non-staff members. Outside pcs, have priority. STAFF TRAINING Academy Training is not available to any staff member solely by reason of being a staff member. A staff member must take a leave of absence to be trained. No staff member may be ordered to training. (See earlier regulations.) STAFF CO-AUDITING Staff Co-auditing arrangements may be made by the Case Supervisor on the staff's own time. All folders of staff co-audit members are submitted to and reviewed by the Case Supervisor, not less than once for every five sessions. Staff co-auditing should be on a co-audit pair basis with turn-about, the auditor auditing and then being audited by his pc Sessions should alternate one for one. No co-auditor should give more hours than he or she receives. No co-auditor should receive more than he or she gives. All pairing of teams is under the direction of the Case Supervisor whose word in such matters is final. Pairing of teams should be on the basis of comparable class. In staff co-auditing particular attention should be given to completing any auditing cycle begun as per the tape of March 19, AD 14. The tapes of April and March AD 14 are a requisite for both members before any co-auditing may be done. Only concurrent HGC allowed processes are permitted by staff co-audit members with the addition of Itsa for supervised teams. Certain co-audit teams may be required by the Case Supervisor to audit and be audited in a central place under direct supervision. No staff co-auditing may be undertaken without I . Specific permission from the Case Supervisor. 2. Without routine auditing schedules adequate to obtain case gain and 3. Without making a regular and factual auditor's report and enclosing it in a folder for the pc. Husband-wife teams are permitted but under the above regulations and with ARC Break assessments available by another auditor in case of bad consequences or cessation of auditing. LRH:dr.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1964 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 230 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1965 Remimeo Staff Hats ALL DIVISIONS BONUSES The only bonuses which may be awarded staff members shall consist of courses and intensives. Courses awarded will consist of one course under the Academy system employed after this date. Intensives: shall consist of 12 1/2 hour or 25 hour intensives according to the bonus awarded. STAFF CO-AUDIT All routinely scheduled staff co-auditing is cancelled effective I July 1965, except for assists including ARC Break, PTP and Missed W/H assists. Solo auditing successfully carried out, but subject to (c) of P supervision, is permitted, and solo auditors are permitted to do auditing by list to give each other assists. REVIEW Bonus auditing award may include Department Review auditing to handle various case types and ease scheduling. GRADES Staff Members must be audited up through the Grades properly in the HGC or in Review. The additional processes of a Grade may also be run. POWER PROCESSES No staff member may be run on a Power Process except by an auditor properly qualified in the Review Case Cracking Unit. EMERGENCY No staff member or executive of a section, department or division or org under Emergency Condition may have auditing. AFFLUENCE Staff, members in a section, department, or division designated as in Affluent Condition are favoured in bonus awards. FIELD STAFF MEMBERS A Field Staff Member who has sent twenty persons into the org may have a course or a 12 1/2 hour intensive at his or her election. EXTRA STAFF Enough Tech or Review extra staff must be on hand to give every staff member in the org a 12 1/2 hour intensive every 6 weeks. But this staff may not be counted in computing the tech-admin ratio. These are the staff staff auditors. This balance may not be cancelled out by overload. But other auditors may be used, such as Review Auditors in this programme. QUALITY Staff members should have fully qualified auditors in their auditing. To qualify additionally as a staff staff auditor, a staff auditor must also have an 231 excellent record of personal case gains and good T.A. STAFF STAFF AUDITORS DURING EMERGENCY When an entire org is under Emergency, staff staff auditors are assigned to promotion duties such as mailings, etc. COURSES A staff member awarded a course instead of an intensive may have only one course and may be only on quarter pay or units for that period. SAINT HILL COURSE AWARD Only the higher status staff member may be sent to the Saint Hill Course as an award and only for a very praiseworthy accomplishment. The Saint Hill Course is awarded a staff member only by the Office of LRH. This does not prevent staff members from undertaking their own training at Saint Hill with some org assistance on expenses. SAINT HILL AUDITING A staff member of very high status in any org may be awarded auditing at Saint Hill, but only for praiseworthy accomplishments. This award is only at the personal orders of LRH. LIMITED AMOUNTS A staff member may only have 121/2 hours at a time in the HGC from staff staff auditors of the HGC or, in Review, only to a result, which may vary from 8 hours to 50. But unless specified no staff member may be awarded Review auditing more than once in an org which has a Case Cracking Section. There are no Review staff staff auditors. Auditing there is done only by the regular Review staff. PARTIALITY Aside from Emergency and Affluent Conditions the bonus of auditing and courses should be spread evenly. No executive has any right to order a staff member to auditing for several intensives at the expense of other staff. Staff of portions of an org in other Conditions than Emergency and Affluence should be treated fairly. STAFF MEMBER FAMILIES No members of families of staff may have staff staff auditing. They may however, as a special favour, be given professional rates. An org does not owe auditing to a staff member's family. The Hardship Section of the Department of Certificates and Awards often will have auditors on fist for the auditing of the staff members' families. COMM EV No Comm Ev or Court or executive may after this date sentence anyone to auditing. Such Ethics bodies may, however, deprive a person of auditing or training or technical communication or any communication. RECORDS All records of course and auditing awards and rotation thereof amongst staff are kept by the Department of Certificates and Awards. AUTHORITY OF AWARDS All authorities for bonuses for intensives or courses must stem only from the Office of LRH in the org. LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard 232 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1966 Remimeo Dist Staff Students REGULATIONS FOR AUDITING OF STAFF AND STUDENTS In HCO Pol Ltr of 24 May 1965 Student Guide to Acceptable Behaviour, it states under # 15, "Do not give any processing to anyone under any circumstances without direct permission of the Course Supervisor (Emergency Assists excepted)", and # 16, "Do not receive any processing from anyone under any circumstances without the express permission of the Course Supervisor" (now (c) of T). In HCO Pol Ltr of I April 1960 Regulations for Staff Members and Ex-Staff Members, # 2, "Any Staff Member of the organization may not audit any current preclear or student unless that preclear or student has been signed up for processing in the Hubbard Guidance Centre by the Registrar and has been assigned the auditor by the Director of Processing" (now HGC Admin). These policies are still in effect. Any Staff Member, student or Interne requiring an assist or Review (unless an Emergency) must notify their Dept Head who arranges with Qualifications Div, Dept of Review for an assist to be given if the Dept Head deems it necessary. The only exception is the Clearing Course Student who is handled entirely by the Clearing Course Supervisor and may not be audited, sent to Review, or given an assist (except in an Emergency like an Injury) by anyone. The Clearing Course Supervisor is notified if a Clearing Course student is having difficulty with their case at home, at work, etc and the Clearing Course Supervisor handles it. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED ' 233 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JULY 1970 Remimeo (TECHNICAL) All Tech Hats C/0's Hat Exec Dir Hat Chaplain's lain's Hat Qual Sec Hat Dept 13 Hat C/S Hats C/S Checksheets HCO Area Sec Hat E/O Hat CASES AND MORALE OF STAFF Two recent circumstances have called to attention urgently a relationship of the VIABILITY (survival value) of an org and STAFF CASES. X Org was failing. It was causing trouble on world publication lines. An independent survey on cases found 47 percent of the cases on that staff were failed cases, mainly because of lack of auditing. The 4th Mate Athena began a single handed project to straighten up these cases and get them functioning. Because of this (and other admin actions) the org began to function, outstanding actions were done and the org became solvent where it had previously not even been paying its staff. It is now fulfilling its obligations over the world. Y major Org was found to be down morale, non-functional and dwindling. A survey showed 57 percent failed cases with 87% mentioning no wins. It was not paying its staff and was being bolstered by the SO. The early action is to handle staff cases. The SO has the situation well in hand. But it shows graphically what staff case neglect will do to an org. Many earlier cases are on record. Varying degrees of poor tech, altered tech and almost total loss of tech have illustrated gruesomely that INATTENTION TO STAFF CASES CAN ALL BUT DESTROY AN ORG OR ACTIVITY. The reason why squirrel groups fail in the first year or two is the alter-is and abandonment of actual tech plus guilt. Here the cases, if handled at all, get butchered. The factor therefore is a very important one. The policy therefore is: THE CASES OF STAFF MEMBERS REQUIRE ATTENTION AND CASE GAIN. There are multitudes of reasons why this "can't happen". "No auditors", "have to handle the public", "GI would crash if any people were off post being audited", "can't afford extra auditors", and thousands more can be offerred in excuse for not auditing staff. Financial reasons are so unreal as to be treasonable. As when cases aren't handled the GI crashes. It's all rather like "if we put any fuel in the car we won't have any money to make the trip". It is not generally recognized that when lower grades and full tech slipped out, ethics came crashing in. It was just the time when quickie auditing began to be done that ethics in orgs became a problem. The HCO org board slipped from Dept I (Routing and Recruitment functions) to Dept 3 (Ethics functions) because Div IV (the Tech Division) ceased to handle staff cases as well as public. Div V (Correction) neglected to notice and tech slid into it. Div 2 (Dissemination) slid into the Public Divisions because new public had to be gotten-there "wasn't enough to audit" to use Central Files pcs, In short, when tech lost full use and was not used and used well on staff cases even the org board scrambled. All this when analyzed and found is of course being put right. But from this we learn 234 1. SHORT CUTTING TECH DELIVERY IS FATAL. 2. LOSS OF AND FAILURE. TO USE VALID DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY TECH FOR WHATEVER REASON IS FATAL TO AN ORG'S SURVIVAL. 3. FAILURE TO HANDLE STAFF CASES WITH FULL TECH AND GOOD AUDITING CRASHES AN ORG. Quite obviously then the intent of any of these counter intentions is treasonable. For it results in a crashed org. Thus resistance to full tech delivery, dropping tech off checksheets and not auditing staff cases to good wins are charges of the most serious nature and should result in immediate dismissal of the instigator when proven beyond reasonable doubt in a properly instituted Comm Ev. SYSTEMS To get over this hump of staff cases where it backlogs there are several solutions. A. The staff staff auditor was an essential post in the 1950s and was very successful. It was never authorized to be abolished. There should be two staff staff auditors for every fifty staff members, doing each other's C/Sing or C/Sed on usual lines. For 75 staff there should be two staff staff auditors and a C/S. B * A staff lacking auditors can train part time and co-audit. The co-audit would be by groups of comparable levels of training. This is a more expensive (in terms of org time and GI) arrangement. It should be in progress anyway as far as part time training goes. It can be combined with A in which the staff trains but does not rely on co-auditing for case progress. AUDITING PRIORITIES Staff staff auditors should do their own scheduling or with cooperation from tech services exactly on this pattern and no other: The folders of the staff are arranged in four files under these categories. Staff Case Category 1: Those who have had VGls F/Ns at Examiner and OK as to Case Gain. Staff Case Category 2: Those who haven't had VGI F/Ns at Exam recently. Staff Case Category 3: Medically ill in need of thorough Assists and Medical Attention. Staff Case Category 4: Consistent no change, no case gain in their auditing history. Obviously to pick up staff morale and general effectiveness SO THAT MORE ATTENTION CAN BE AFFORDED it is of great interest that the cases are scheduled only in this fashion. Staff Case Category 3 (Medically Ill) gets priority and full auditing to put them into Category No. 1. Staff Case Category No. 2 (no recent VGIs F/Ns) are audited to get them into Category No. 1. Staff Case Category No. 4 (Consistent no case gain) is routed to Ethics lines for Sec Checks, production examination, etc and if status unrelieved and unproductive, off staff lines into a pc category. Staff Case Category No. I is programmed to bring them on up their grades (or Progress and Advance to get them back to their last grade) in an orderly fashion apportioning the auditing fairly. If this scheduling is followed and continues to be followed and if the C/Sing and 235 Auditing are normal in quality, then the majority of staff will at all times be in good case condition. If other scheduling of staff is followed, then the cases and the org will suffer. STATISTIC The Staff Case Supervisor statistic is percentage of staff who are in good case gain condition measured by the last Examiner reports and cancelled by any adverse Exam report. The stat is simple to calculate. It is simply the number of folders in Staff Case Category No. I divided by the number on staff. If 39 staff cases were doing well out of 52 on staff, it would be about 75. 1 %. The C/S would also have number of staff case folders C/Sed. The staff staff auditors would have number of hours of well done auditing sessions. If no C/S they would share the percentile stat. STAFF AUDITING SECTION This unit belongs in the new Department 13-Dept of Personnel Enhancement as the Staff Auditing Section. Any purely auditing goofs in the last session can be repaired by Dept 15 Case Review and returned to the Staff Auditing Section. Or if there is any danger of wait, repaired by the staff staff auditor (since any wait in repairing an auditing goof occasionally winds up in a Medical Category). LACK OF SECTION Lack of this section or a condition of no auditing on staff is an Ethics Charge that can result in removal. Its presence as a section and the state of staff cases should be the point of first importance to any investigatory body or SO Mission to that org. It should be realized that an unflat or undone Grade I (Problems) when not fully handled causes no case gain and the suppressive tendencies of the society to move right on into the org. Above and beyond any efficiency factor, staffs work hard ordinarily and it is very unjust to deny them by any excuse or mechanism the technology which they handle. Any and all trouble occurring in orgs during a long period of heavy enemy attack on them was traced not to the enemy BUT TO LOSS OF TECH MATERIALS, REDUCTION OF THE USE OF TECH (as in quickie grades) AND IGNORING STAFF CASES. , Thus these points are spotted as the points most likely present when an org is failing or failing to take and hold its area. THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS POLICY LETTER CANNOT BE OVERSTATED. Follow it, get it in! L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 236 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HOD POLICY LETTER OF 21 SEPTEMBER 1969 Remimeo STAFF TRAINING OFFICER A Staff Training Officer (STO) is the head of the Staff Training Section Dept 14 Div 5. The purpose of the STO is: TO HELP LRH Train individual staff members and applicants from his own and other orgs in Ethics, Tech and Admin, keeping track of them, guiding them through org courses, giving them checkouts, expediting their training, seeing that their personnel records in Dept I of their org are factual as to training and assisting them in every way to get training and to be trained rapidly, with the end product that orgs have no untrained staff members. As the STO deals in large measure with staff members and staff applicants from another org than his own he must keep close liaison with the STOs of other orgs. For instance, Foundation staff members are largely trained in the Day org. And Day org staff members are largely trained in the Foundation. As the office and files of the Day STO and Fnd STO are the same, this presents no file or board posting problem as long as they are kept up and as long as they co-operate to get all staff members through their courses. The STO does not conduct those courses which are regular courses in the org. The staff member is simply enrolled onto them as just another student. BUT the STO makes sure these particular students appear for training, get trained fast, get sent to cramming and review at the first sign of slow and in general pushes hard. The Day STO will find himself pushing Fnd staff members directly as they are in class while he is on duty. The Fnd STO will find himself mainly dealing with Day staff members. However each STO is answerable to the EC for their staff members' progress so he must know the whole picture. Reports are required by the STO weekly on the progress of a staff member or applicant. This STO student report is filed with the STO files. A board is kept so that staff member progress is visible. The more visible the board to staff members the better. Staff members are quite commendably dedicated to their posts in the org and often look on training as a distraction. Without slowing down that dedication, the STO must still see that they get in their training, Otherwise the best staff members wind up the least trained and least audited. Case has a lot to do with training. Where no other person is directly responsible for staff cases, the STO should take this over and be sure tech is USED where staff members are ill or where they are going unprocessed. When a staff member is sent to a higher org for training or grades, the STO is the one who keeps track and pushes from a distance. This is still his staff member. He must get in touch with the STO in the higher org and say "George Jinks is arriving there for his Cl VI. He is an org staff member here. Put him on your STO list and push." And the STO of the sending org gets reports. IF THE STO OF THE SENDING ORG CONSIDERS PROGRESS TOO SLOW IN THE HIGHER ORG he can report the matter to his own EC and assign the distant student a Condition and his EC can write WW proposing the higher org STO be assigned a Condition. It sometimes happens that a staff member sent to a higher org is pirated by the higher org. This costs the STO a completion, his org one of its better staff members and breaks a contract. The abuses on this have in past years been so great that lower orgs often refuse to send staff members. When this happens, the higher org should be reported to WW and should be made to pay the lower org (a) Full fees for lower courses given in the lower org (b) all fees paid by the lower org to the higher org for the training (c) all pay paid to the student since departure from the lower org (c) a fee for the contract. The time to transfer to a higher org is when one's contracts are completed. 237 The person to handle and keep track of this and make it prominent in the staff student files is the local org's STO. It hurts his post and personal security and even pay to lose a staff member by reason of higher training and without recompense to his org. It also messes up his planning and slows his programme. STO TRAINING The STO must be an expert on Study technology as contained in the HDG pack on Course Supervision. He must know more about Course Supervision than Course Supervisors. The entire speed of progress will come from the STO insistence on following all Course Supervision technology. STATISTIC The stat of the STO is the number of training points run up in the week by the staff students being trained in his org whether from his own org or not, plus a second curve on the number of completions by staff members from his own org, meaning courses or, in Academy, classes of training, HDC and HDG count separately. INCOMPLETE CHECKSHEETS The STO retains in STO files any fragmentary or incomplete checksheet of any staff member. He can furnish copies of it on request. It sometimes happens that a senior requires one of his staff to check out on an HCOB or Pol Ltr. This is done (the checkout) by the STO. The STO also credits a cheeksheet that has that HCOB or Pol Ltr on it and places the checksheet in the staff member's STO file. Checkouts are always credited against courses by the STO so they are not lost. TRAINING ABUSES The staff member who is a student must know, by being told by the STO, that any training or case complaints must be taken to the staff member's own STO. These complaints you will find are seldom capricious. Whenever you straighten out a training or case snarl for a staff member you often straighten out something indirectly for the public also. People make progress or they don't. The answer to the problem is always to be found in the fields of Ethics, Tech or Admin or violations of study know-how. INDIVIDUALS Classes are too often taught as classes. The STO must work with the individual staff student as an individual. Where one is doing very well he should be commended. Where he is doing slowly or not at all, the problem is an individual one and can be handled. LIAISON POINTS The STO's points of most constant liaison are (a) Individual staff students (b) Other STOs (c) The (c) of T (c) The Ethics Officer (e) Course Supervisors (f) The Dir of Review (g) The EC of his org. SUMMARY If the STO carries out his duties interestedly and well, he can achieve the target of fully trained competent staff members and with this comes a far better operating environment, higher stats and a greater advance toward a higher civilization. It is a very important post. If he does his job without distracting the org from its public service and duties, he is very very valuable indeed. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:rs.ei.rd Founder Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard [See also HCO P/L 3 December 1972 issue 1, The Value of ALL RIGHTS RESERVED a Staff Training Officer, in the 1972 Year Book.) 238 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH NOT GREEN ON WHITE ASSOCIATION SECRETARY DIRECTIVE 3 JUNE 1957 QUALIFICATIONS OF A PERMANENT STAFF MEMBER ADMINISTRATIVE: 1. Must have been with organization three months. 2. Must know the Code of a Scientologist. 3. Must have passed an examination on the Organization Board and Comm Centre given by HCO Board of Review. 4. Must be accepted by a staff majority vote, an Advisory Committee majority vote and finally must be passed on favourably by Association Secretary. TECHNICAL: I . Must have been with organization three months. 2. Must have a certificate in force in Dianetics or Scientology. 3. Must have passed successfully five levels of Indoctrination. 4. Must know the Auditor's Code and Code of a Scientologist. 5. Must have passed an examination by HCO Board of Review for validation. 6. Must have passed an examination on the, Organization Board and Comm Centre given by HCO Board of Review. 7. Must be accepted by a staff majority vote, an Advisory Committee majority vote and finally must be passed on favourably by Association Secretary. BOTH: A permanent staff member cannot be dismissed except by a unanimous vote of the Advisory Committee or by L. Ron Hubbard. He has the rights of vacation with pay. There may also be an honorary staff member who is neither temporary nor permanent. Permanent Staff Member Examination is given by HCO Board of Review. Jack Parkhouse (Note: Originally issued in two sections, Administrative and Technical, as FCDC P/Ls of 2 May 1957 by L. Ron Hubbard, with an additional point between 6 and 7 which read: "7. Must have a minister's certificate in force and must keep it in force."] 239 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HASI POLICY LETTER OF 5 SEPTEMBER 1957 To: All Staff Bulletin Board VALIDATION OF STAFF All Technical Staff not validated or who have not passed an Admin examination by the time of the Congress shall be: I . Considered temporary 2. Shall lose certain pay units. All Administrative Staff who have not done the following by the Congress shall be considered temporary with a lower pay rating: 1. Passed an examination on the Org Board. 2. Passed an examination on the Comm Centre. 3. Passed an examination on the telephone systems, PO and internal phones. 4. Passed an examination on the Purpose of the HASI. 5. Read "Problems of Work". Those receiving Permanent Staff rating will receive higher pay than those not so rated. LRH:rs.cden L. RON HUBBARD HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W.1 HASI POLICY LETTER OF 10 MARCH 1959 PERMANENT STAFF MEMBERS Permanent Staff Members are entitled to claim Permanent Staff Member privileges when they become in possession of their certificate. These privileges naturally cease should a Permanent Staff Member leave staff without a formal leave of absence neither can they be claimed if a Staff Member has given notice of leaving. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:cden Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 240 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 18 JANUARY 1960 CenOCon (Issued as Sec ED in Washington DC) QUALIFICATIONS OF PERMANENT STAFF MEMBERS (Cancels previous Directives) 1. Knows Organization Board. 2. Knows Communication Centre. 3. Meets OCA (APA) and IQ Standards. 4. Has worked for Organization for three months. 5. Has been checked clear on all present life overts and withholds. LRH:js.rd Copyright (c) 1960 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 JUNE 1960 CenOCon (Cancels previous directives) REQUIREMENTS FOR STAFF POSTS Applicants for staff positions in HCOs or Central Orgs must pass: I . A security check demonstrating no criminal record or intentions; 2. A "help check" showing normal help ability; 3. An acceptable (not wholly below centre line) profile on a personality test; and 4. An IQ of at least 110. Persons showing criminal background this life may not be employed. STAFF AUDITOR REQUIREMENTS A staff auditor must have the following: I . A professional certificate in hand and in force except where certificate is awaiting only final signature when the interim letter maybe substituted. 2. A knowledge of modem processes. A staff auditor, to obtain permanent staff status, must have: I . A thorough knowledge of an EMeter, pre-sessioning and model sessioning. 2. A thorough knowledge of the CCHs. 3. A free needle on help. 4. A profile in the upper third of the graph. 5. An IQ of 120 or more. 6. A knowledge of the comm centre. 7. A knowledge of the Org Board. A permanent staff member in any division must meet the above requirements. REGISTRAR POSTS No person may serve in a letter writing or registration capacity who is not reasonably released on "help" (does not consider help impossible in the field of action of PrR). Such persons should be specially processed on help. LRH:js.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1960 [Modified by HCO P/L 21 July 1972, Issue IV, Staff by L. Ron Hubbard Qualification Requirements for Hiring Cancelled, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED with regard to checks and qualifications on hiring.] 241 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 37 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 NOVEMBER 1960 Reissued from Sthil All Central Orgs Already issued in SA PERMANENT STAFF MEMBER REQUIREMENTS (Effective I April 1961) To qualify for staff intensives, vacations, sick leave and other benefits in an HCO or Central Org a person must be a Permanent Staff Member. The following are the requirements of a Permanent Staff Member: I . Any certificate in force (including HAS). 2. Security check passed. (No Criminal, subversive or Commie background.) 3. Help button in good condition. 4. An acceptable (not wholly below centre line, and majority of points not lower than the centre line) graph. 5. IQ 110 or above. 6. A knowledge of the Comm System and HCO Policy Letter April 8, 1958. 7. A knowledge of the Org Board. 8. 3 months on Staff. Note: (Persons showing a Criminal, subversive or Communist background may not be employed.) REQUIREMENTS FOR AN EXECUTIVE POST I . Permanent Staff Member. 2. A Professional Certificate in force. 3. Control button free needle. 4. Help button free needle. REQUIREMENTS FOR A TEMPORARY STAFF AUDITOR 1. Professional Certificate in force. (Or a letter showing exam has been passed and certificate is being prepared.) (Letter from (c) of T.) 2. A thorough knowledge of the E-Meter. 3. A thorough knowledge of the CCHs. 4. No inversion on help. 5. No inversion on control. REQUIREMENTS FOR A PERMANENT STAFF AUDITOR 1. Permanent Staff Member. 2. Free needle on Help. 3 ' Free needle on Control. 4. Adequate case gains on pcs, processed. Note: The pay grade of a staff member should be regulated in view of the above as well as his actual position in the. Org. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:aec.gh.rd Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 242 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 FEBRUARY 1961 CenOCon PERMANENT STAFF REQUIREMENT CHANGES (Modifies HCO Policy Letter of November 26, 1960) Instead of passing an examination on the Org Board, effective on receipt of this policy letter, a permanent staff member applicant must pass a stiff examination on "The Pattern of a Central Organization", HCO Policy Letter 14th February, 1961 and The Staff Information Bulletin that gives the paper colour flash system and other data and has long been in staff hats, being a condensation of many earlier bulletins. (HCO Policy Letter of April 8, 1958.) Further, if a staff member has not qualified for permanent staff member by deadline, he may not receive staff rate processing under the (c) of P. Deadline on the earlier policy letter is relaxed until June 1, 196 1. LRH:js.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 FEBRUARY 1961 CenOCon QUALIFICATION OF EXECUTIVES See HCO Policy Letters on Executives and Personnel, 13th February and 17th February, 1961. I will qualify and issue a Qualification Certificate to any staff personnel who meets executive requirements regardless of whether they occupy an executive post or not. This means that an Executive Qualification Certificate for a Central Organization executive post, does not demand or command that the holder occupy the post or receive executive units. A person who does not actually hold an executive post but who wishes to receive an Executive Qualification Certificate must pass all requirements for that executive post and must receive as well a high mark on a Hat check of that post. Having once occupied such a post in the organization does not automatically qualify a person but will be taken into account. Such persons seeking an Executive Qualification Certificate, should be handled exactly as an executive is handled in their application. Having extra qualified persons on staff for all executive posts means faster expansion and quicker filling of vacated posts, with immediate executive units rather than filling posts on a temporary basis with the consequent long wait for units. LRH:jl.cden.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 243 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 MARCH 1961 CenOCon PERSONNEL POLICIES STAFF POST QUALIFICATIONS PERMANENT EXECUTIVES TO BE APPROVED (Modifying HCO Pol Ltr of Feb 17, 196 1) I desire now to approve of all executives appointed to post in Central Organizations, before the appointment is given permanent status. I desire a full report from HASI attendant to the dismissal of any permanent executive before the dismissal occurs. The data to be submitted to me, to qualify a department head as a permanent holder of post includes: I . A minimum of 45 days successful performance of duty on post. 2. A statement from the (c) of P taken from pc graphs of the Auditor quality and ability of the person being appointed. 3. The appointee's own graph and IQ. 4. A summary of his Scientology career. 5. A security check sheet on the person. 6. An E-Meter assessment, particularly on Help and Control. 7. His exam results for permanent Staff Member. 8. Report on Hat Check of post by HCO Sec. 9. SOP Goals procedure fully flattened. No new executive, not approved by myself on the above basis, may draw the salary of his executive post, but only the salary formerly drawn on a non-executive post until my approval is received by the Assn Sec, effective on receipt of the letter. No executive may continue as an executive on permanent status, unless approved by myself, on or after 1 August 1961, and if not approved will revert to pay as a leading auditor even while retaining post. For the purpose of this Policy Letter the following posts are defined as Executive Posts: In HASP Association (or Organization) Secretary pc Director Director of Training Director of Processing Director of Promotion and Registration Chief Registrar (Body) Letter Registrar Director of Material Director of Accounts. In HCO: HCO Continental Secretary HCO Area Secretary. All persons permanently so appointed by myself shall be given a small certificate to that effect. The assembly of the materials required, I to 9 above, is solely the responsibility of the person being appointed 244 Temporary Executive Appointments to be Passed by HCO The HCO Continental Secretary must pass upon any temporary appointment of an executive, before the person is given post. This does not mean such temporary appointment may receive the pay of the post. The authorization to appoint a temporary executive may be refused only on the following grounds: I . Past unsuccessful experience with the appointee on that post. 2. Graph points lower than centre. 3. IQ less than 120. 4. Security check not passed. 5. Control and help buttons get very bad reaction on E-Meter. 6. Examination of staff profiles and longevity show other persons better qualified for post. If no person can be found who qualifies for the temporary executive post, it may not be filled. In event of abuse or confusion of this section the Assn Secretary may stop any action in progress and send full details to me for decision. Temporary and Permanent Defined A Temporary Executive fills the post on a temporary-, basis, using the word Temporary in the post title. He or she does not draw the executive post's units, but draws former units or the units of a leading auditor, whichever is higher. He or she may be removed from post with or without cause by the Assn See at any time, or a qualified HCO See during the time that HCO See is handling a State of Emergency. A Permanent Executive uses the full title of and draws the full units of a post. He or she may be transferred to a similar post by the Assn Sec, or by the HCO Sec who is handling a state of emergency that applies to that department. He or she may be suspended for no longer than two weeks in any three months from post without pay, to be processed in event of a consistent failure in that department. He or she may be removed from post only by myself after due investigation, and reports are received by me. Appointment to Staff Posts No appointment may be made to any post on staff until the following procedure has been followed. An application form (green ink on pink since it belongs to Accounts and affects pay) is made available at the office of the Assn See's Secretary. People desiring employment are directed by Reception to the Assn Sec's Secretary (or a small stock of forms may be left with Reception). The application form is self-directing. The person fills in his own various qualifications and vital statistics. It then sends the person directly to Test in Charge to be given a test or (as is more likely) to receive the test from his files. The person then goes to the HCO Sec. The HCO Sec marks the application form in spaces to review the test, makes a brief security check and marks in that result and then states either (a) The person is employable on staff or (b) This person cannot be employed on staff until processed or (c) This person cannot be employed. If the results are (b) or (c) the person is so told at once. If the results are (a) the person is sent to the Assn Sec (or his Secretary) for interview and results of interview are marked. The person is then told when to come to work or that he or she will be informed if there is an opening. If the person is employed (now or later), the application has the units or pay marked on it by the Assn Sec's Sec and is sent to the Accts Dept, when employment is begun. The Accounts Dept makes a folder for the person in the creditor file. Accounts may not pay out a cheque until the form is in the Accounts Dept, and is initialled OK, throughout. 245 The routing of the form is written on the left margin in each case. Important: After August 1, 1961 the Accounts Dept may not pay out pay even to old staff unless an application form is in the Accounts file. Termination of Employment When employment is terminated, the person terminating, to receive his or her final pay, must be routed on a similar form. The form is obtained from the Assn Sec's Sec, who is custodian of all forms, by the Dept Head of the leaving person's department or by the Assn See. The form is self-routing on the left-hand margin. It is green ink on pink paper. The form is headed: Termination Form Without this form you cannot receive your final pay or any recommendation to future employers. The leaving person fills in name and date and writes his given reason for leaving, He gives the form to Dept Head for his or her remarks. The leaving person then reports to HCO and gets checked out for ARC breaks and withholds, and may be ordered to processing at Organization expense, but not longer than, 12 1/2 hours, preferably 5 hours, If the leaving person then changes his or her mind about leaving the form is destroyed by the Dept Head. The person reports again to Dept Head for the form to be continued, or destroyed in event of person staying, and then takes the form to Director of Material to turn in his supplies and any equipment, and get an initial. This includes E-Meter and any such and in the case of a Dept Head or an Assn Sec may require a full inventory by a paid company if the amount is great. The person now goes to Accounts with the form and receives with the form his or her final pay. Accounts, while keeping the creditor folder of the person in a "dead file" at the back of creditors file, until the year's storage of files is made, places the person's original application for employment and the termination form (stapled, termination at the back) into Comm lines to the Assn Sec's See who files. The person's final pay cheque is sent to HCO by Accounts and may not be paid directly by Accounts to the person. HCO hands over the final cheque when the person has been checked out by HCO or has received any auditing recommended. Seeking Personnel Dept Heads seeking personnel may procure it wherever they wish, and however they wish, but must first look in the job application file of the Assn See's Sec in order to save time. To keep the file straight, the Assn Sec's See should divide the file into live (with 3 months) and inactive segments. In times of expansion a mailing can be sent to the whole list. This would serve to freshen the file and the replies can be filed with the original applications. Until they lose a body, these applicant people do not get "dead filed". Keeping this application file up prevents the randomity of Emergency Hiring and by-passes of security. The most fruitful sources of new personnel are the pc and Academy, and permanent help wanted notices should be posted in each. LRH:ph.cden L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L Ron Hubbard [This 28 March 1961 reissue of HCO P/L 17 February 1961 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED added the parts shown in this type style.] 246 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1961 CenOCon EXECUTIVES' PAY HCO Policy Letter of March 28, 1961 is modified as follows:, All permanent Executives (who were to meet the August 1, 1961 deadline or have their pay revert) are extended to October 1, 196 1. SOP Goals Clause The qualification of persons having to be flat on SOP Goals by August 1, 1961 as per HCO Policy Letter March 28, 196 1, is changed to "Must be flat on Routine I A by October 1, 196 1 LRH:jl.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 OCTOBER 1961 CenOCon PAY OF EXECUTIVES (Modifies HCO Policy Letter of July 22, 196 1) The deadline of executive pay is extended to February 1, 1962. The process to be flattened now is "Problems Intensive" as per Saint Hill data of October, 196 1. LRH:iet.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 23 JANUARY 1962 CenOCon PERMANENT EXECUTIVES (Amends HCO Pol Ltr of February 17, 196 1) The award of Permanent Executive status has hitherto been delayed by changes in the processing requirements set forth in HCO Pol Ltrs of July 22, 1961 and October 23, 1961. Effective immediately, the award of full permanent Executive status shall only be made to an executive who has fulfilled all the requirements as laid down in HCO Policy Letter of February 17, 196 1, Staff Post Qualifications, and who has also been checked out as stably clear by HCO. Meanwhile, any Executive who has fulfilled all the requirements of HCO Policy Letter of February 17, 196 1, except the processing requirements, and who is not yet stably clear, shall be awarded the status of Provisional Permanent Executive. This will entitle him/her to draw the full pay for his/her post. But he/she will not be allowed to draw permanent staff bonus units as an executive until such time as he/she is checked out by HCO as stably clear. LRH:sfrd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 247 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 MAY 1962 CenCCon PERMANENT STAFF (Cancels earlier directives) When a staff member has completed a contract with the organization, has passed an examination on the Pattern of a Central Org and has received a cleaned Prepcheck on the last two pages of the Joburg and Form 6A, Saint Hill, informed of this, will issue a Permanent Staff Certificate for that staff member. L. RON HUBBARD LRH-.jw.jl.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Cancelled by HCO P/Ls 9 August 1971 issue IV, Urgent-High Crime PIL-Operation Staff Stability and Personal Security, 16 September 1971 Issue III, same title, and 8 January 1972 revision of 9 August 1971 Issue IV, in the Year Books.] HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JUNE 1962 CenCCon PERMANENT STAFF PRIVILEGE Staff Members who complete Permanent Staff requirements may receive the benefit of International Membership while they are on the staff of a Central Organization or City Office. A N/C invoice is made out by Accounts (so that records exist) upon application by a staff member. If a Permanent Staff Member leaves the Org voluntarily or is dismissed for a valid reason, the International Membership fee becomes payable (part of a year's membership to be worked out pro rata). L RON HUBBARD LRH.jw.eden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 248 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 JANUARY 1966 Remimeo Issue V All Staff Hats A copy given to ea new person employed PERSONNEL STAFF STATUS (This is a Policy Letter. The basic law of this organization and its rules are found only on letters such as this one, printed as this one is, green ink on white paper and signed as this one is.) A Staff Status is a number giving the value and promotion eligibility of a staff member in this organization. The number appears after a person's name on the organization board in the Communication Centre. The numbers run from zero to ten. They designate the type of post to which a person may be promoted or the status of the person. It is important to have a higher status number. Therefore do all you can to increase yours. The status numbers most important to a new staff member are 0 (zero), I and 2. 0 = Temporary I = Provisional 2 = Permanent Above that are the promotional numbers which must be earned by study and experience in the organization. There are also technical status numbers. These are not necessarily required of personnel in nontechnical departments and are elsewhere described. If you do your job in this org and study how to be a better staff member you will advance and will be secure. The first three status numbers and the states follow: TEMPORARY A staff member who is newly hired is designated 0 (zero) status after his or her name on the organization board. The person is classed as TEMPORARY until he or she has been to Review after a few weeks on post. The TEMPORARY must obtain a slip from their immediate senior saying they are doing fine on post and present this to Review. Review may require they have a knowledge of the org board and comm lines and their own department before passing them. Review may give the person who bears a recommendation several interviews to pass the exam but after the 3rd exam is failed, must dismiss. If they have no recommending slip, Review notes their name and tells the person to get one from their senior and come back. Review keeps a close record of all persons calling on it. Review, when a recommendation slip is presented, then may examine the person concerning the org board, etc, as per current "provisional" check sheet. If the TEMPORARY is recommended and passes, Review assigns the person a 249 PROVISIONAL Staff Status and advises Org Board and Personnel Files by sending them chits attesting the fact. The staff member also gets a copy. While TEMPORARY a staff member may be dismissed with or without cause by his immediate superior or by Review or a Secretary or anyone senior to a Secretary. If Review does not pass the Temporary, Review dismisses the person. However, if the person is to be dismissed, Review must inform the person what he must do to make himself more employable, get the person on a pc Course and processed, etc. When Review tells a Temporary he or she did not pass or is dismissed, Review also informs Dept 1, Personnel Officer. Any Temporary, dismissed, may apply again to the Personnel Officer for employment in another section or department of the org. Pay ceases while under dismissal. Therefore when Review dismisses a TEMPORARY, Review I . Tells the person he has not passed and no more chances will be given. 2. Tells the person how to become more employable. 3. Puts the person in the files for possible future employment if the conditions are met (2 above). 4. Informs Dept 1. Dept 1, being advised of a dismissal: (I a) Informs Accounts at once. (2a) Makes a note of it in the person's file noting also Accounts is informed. (3a) Notifies the person's immediate superior whether the superior is otherwise I informed or not. If a Temporary dismissed is upset about it, he or she is sent to the Chaplain. The Chaplain, on any dismissed person coming to him should ascertain if the above lines were followed properly, that no ethics policy or order was violated by superiors or org officers and that the person follows the advice to become more employable if the dismissal is in good order. If the Chaplain finds a gross irregularity in a dismissal he should bring the person to Ethics. TEMPORARY is designated as 0 status on the org board. Every quarter the HCO Exec See of an org must dismiss all persons who have Temporary Status and have not become Provisionals. Such persons are sent to Review for dismissal. PROVISIONAL A staff member given a PROVISIONAL rating may have recourse to Ethics and have an Ethics hearing if dismissed. He may be transferred to other divisions without a hearing if his division is over-manned. · person, after one year, may apply for permanent status. · PROVISIONAL is designated as "I" on the org board after his or her name. To obtain permanent status a PROVISIONAL must obtain his or her Basic Staff Certificate. This has a check sheet for which the HCO EXEC SEC is responsible for compiling. This is covered in earlier Policy Letters. The certificate is examined for by Review and issued by Certs and Awards. The requirements are relatively elementary but are quite firm. 250 Ethics chits issued while the person was employed are taken into consideration. The Secretary of the person's division must recommend permanent status in writing to Review before an exam may be given. PERMANENT A PERMANENT STAFF MEMBER may not be demoted, transferred or dismissed without a full Committee of Evidence being held. The person may himself request a change of status or another post or may resign without a Committee of Evidence being convened. (The Evidence and findings of a Committee of Evidence are taken by a Committee composed of one's coworkers and to be valid and put into effect must be passed by LRH personally.) No person may be paid as permanent or posted until the person's name appears in a SEC ED. LRH Executive Director may not at his own discretion wish to make the permanent award and if not included in a See Ed it is not awarded. PERMANENT status is then designated on the Org Board by the numeral "T' after a person's name. Certs and Awards issues the Permanent Certificate, but only after a SEC ED so declaring has been issued. Review, passing a person for permanent must advise Dept I Personnel, and the AdCouncil to prepare a SEC ED for LRH Exec Dir issue. The SEC ED advises Accounts and Org Board, and no pay may be changed or the permanent status posted until the SEC ED is issued. A person failing to get a permanent status remains provisional. A person with PERMANENT status gets longevity pay according to the number of years employed, at so much for each year. This is backdated to first employment. HIGHER STATUS The higher status numbers are given to staff members as earned by passing check sheets. Gaining a higher status does not mean promotion but eligibility for promotion, said eligibility being in plain view on the org board with higher status number. No one may have a higher status than 2 after his or her name on any org board without meeting all requirements up to the new status sought, and passing the check sheet for each status in sequence. Items already passed are credited on any future check sheet where the items occur on the check sheet and have been passed. The HCO Exec See WW is responsible for all check sheets for staff status and the use and following of this Policy Letter via HCO Exec Sees in orgs. Staff quotas for Divisions and Sections are set by the Advisory Council. No hiring, promotions, assignment of status or appointments are made except as made above. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Modified by HCO P/L 5 January 1969, Staff Status Two, Volume 1 -page 136, Volume 5-page 255, Volume 7page 503.) 251 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1966 Remimeo All Staff Applies to Dir Review Staff Tr Officer POLICY CHECK OUTS AND E-METER When a staff member who is taking a check out from the staff training officer flunks, regardless of his grade of release or state of case, the following is done: REMEDY POL-A I He or she is meter checked out on misunderstood words and these are handled. 2. He or she is checked out for disagreements with policy and these are handled. REMEDY POL-B When a staff member who has been so reviewed still has a high flunk rate, he or she is given full meter handling on the subject of earlier admin systems or earlier policies and these are handled as to (1) misunderstood words and (2) disagreements with the earlier systems or policies. The above actions in a small org are all done by the staff training officer. In a large org the actions of Pol Ltr check out are done by the staff training officer and if a flunk occurs the staff member is sent to a Review auditor at once to get Remedy Pol-A done. If the staff training officer's check out log (which he keeps) shows that Remedy Pol-A is not handling the person then Remedy Pol-B is directed by the staff training officer and done by the Review auditor. The Review auditor is under the orders of the staff training officer in matters concerned in this Pol Ltr. NO other action may be undertaken by the Review auditor other than those directed by the staff training officer. Please note that to do misunderstood words and disagreements before check outs violates the Fast Flow System of Management as one is correcting errors which have not occurred. In the Fast Flow System of Management one corrects only after actual errors have occurred, otherwise the org becomes the typical bureaucracy that is making our era miserable. We are in the business of making things better. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 252 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JULY 1966 AMENDED 19 MARCH 1968 Remimeo STAFF STATUS (Corrects all earlier See Eds and Pol Ltrs) The intentions of the staff status system 'and the conduct of it require a clarification as follows: TEMPORARY I After two weeks' employment, if a newly hired staff member can obtain a written recommendation from his immediate superior, he can report to the Staff Training Officer in the Qualifications Division, give him the recommendation and receive the training materials for provisional. He can then study these and get checked out on them by the Staff Training Officer and if passed, get his Staff Status One, Provisional. STATUS ONE PROVISIONAL 2. When the Provisional Staff Member has his Staff Status One, he can receive the materials for Staff Status Two from the Staff Training Officer and begin to study and pass them by check outs from day to day. When he has passed them all, he is given a written examination and, passing this, he obtains his Staff Status Two. STAFF STATUS TWO 3. When a staff member has his Staff Status Two he can apply for the materials for Staff Status Three, executive rating, and so on up the Staff Status levels. Obtaining an executive Staff Status does not ensure the appointment as an executive but makes one eligible for such appointment. The one year service between One and Two is abolished. Only a Staff Status Two is now eligible for contract. Staff Status Two, if on contract, is entitled to free processing up to Grade V, a 50% discount on training and further processing and uniforms. No lower status has these privileges. This is true for all Orgs, SH, WW and AO. A Temporary Status staff member may be dismissed, transferred or demoted without any Ethics action. Any person still a temporary status after 3 months on staff will be let go. A Staff Status One must have been given an Ethics Hearing and found guilty of a misdemeanor or more in order to be dismissed but may be transferred without a hearing. A Staff Status Two must be given a Committee of Evidence and found guilty beyond reasonable doubt to be dismissed and an Ethics Hearing to be demoted or transferred. A deputy or acting appointment may be demoted without Ethics action, but only to the last permanent grade. Staff Members may request transfer or demotion without Ethics action. PENALTY If a Staff Member breaks his Contract, leaving employ or going to a higher Org 253 with Contract incomplete, he is then liable for FULL PAYMENT of all courses and processing he has received at FULL RATE (not just 50%), and owes for all transport or expenses he may have been paid. SECURITY CHECKS Security Checks should be given any new staff on a meter. When a theft or insecurity has occurred staff should consent to such a check and such a consent is contained in the hiring Contract. CHECK OUTS Any staff member receiving a check out from the Staff Training Officer and flunking is told to go off and study some more. The item being checked out is marked with a date and initial at the point just about where the flunk occurred and if the staff member comes for reexamination within one week, the item being checked out is simply checked from the last mark on. But if more than one week elapses the whole item must be examined again. A staff member is only sent to STAFF REVIEW OFFICER for remedies if his flunks have been continual and he is not making progress at all. A log, loose leaf, containing the names of a staff member per page is kept by the Staff Training Officer. The Staff Training Officer may not hold any additional post than Staff Review Officer and if so check outs must consistently be at one period of the day and review another. If traffic is too heavy not even this additional hat may be worn. If Staff Review Officer is singly held the holder may also audit staff, and do assists. ORG BOARD The Org Board must reflect the status of a staff member. UPPER STATUS GRADES Grades Three and above are given check sheets by the Guardian WW. EVENING STUDY Staff members should study in their own time not on the job. But they may be examined or reviewed while on the job. LRH:jc.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1966, 1968 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED (Note: The 19 March 1968 amendment added the last sentence in paragraph 8, and also the section headed "Penalty"; and under "Security Check" added and such a consent is contained in the hiring Contract and changed No Security Check should be given any new staff on a meter except investigatory personnel to the above. I ADDENDUM per HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 AUGUST 1966 Issue III Only a staff member with Staff Status Two is eligible for contract. Thus, before a Class VI may start his actual Internship period, he must come on staff and while working in the org, study for and attain Staff Status Two, at which time he will be eligible for both Internship (provided of course he meets the other requirements for Internship) and staff discounts. LRH:lb-r.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 254 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JANUARY 1969 Remimeo Guardian Hat RAP STAFF STATUS TWO (Modifies HCO Policy Letter 4 January 1966, "Personnel, Staff Status") Staff Status Two, which precedes staff signing a contract, may be awarded by a duly appointed Asst Guardian and the ED awarding such may be okayed by the LRH Comm provided application for such is accompanied by full CSW which demonstrates conclusively that the applicant is fully qualified as per policy for Staff Status Two. Any violation of this policy which results in an improper award of Staff Status Two being made will be considered as a False Report and will result in the assignment of a Condition of Doubt. Mary Sue Hubbard The Guardian WW for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:ei.cden Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 255 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST 1971 Remimeo Scn Orgs SO Orgs CLOs FLAG STUDY TIME A staff member is entitled to 2 1/2 hours study or auditing time per day. Executives are responsible for so scheduling work that this time becomes available to their staff but it must be additional to eight hours of post work. All activities including Flag CLOs or ships must have a Crew or Staff Course Supervisor who observes "What Is a Course?" P/L including suitable scheduling that does not interfere with work and makes Supervision available to all crew or staff. Roll call, materials, stats, etc must be part of this course. Where a Foundation and Day Org exist together the staff may study in the other org so long as that org does have a Supervisor. The Supervisor must at least have been hatted by the Mini Course Supervisor Hat and must know the Word Clearing Series of HCO Bs. A typical solution would be three to four crew or staff course periods a day, each of 21/2 hours, morning, afternoon and evening with the crew or staff member enrolled and assigned to a specific course period and roll called for that period. A crew or staff member must have gone through lines, be invoiced and enrolled, must have had his student hat put on and must in all respects be a student for that period to which he is assigned. An Exec which restrains such attendance is driving himself into cope by failing to take a routine organize action. QUAL Any crew or staff member must have been programmed ONTO not off of his current post. The question is what is he lacking to qualify for the post he is on? Staff Member Hat? SS I? SS II? AB and Sea Watch Picture Book? Post hat with checksheet and pack? Divisional hat? Officer's Checksheet? Exec Cramming Course? Tech Courses? OEC? What has he missed to fully qualify for the post he is now on? When he's done all this up to the post he is on or the post in case of a recruit he will be on he has arrived at "A" and only now could he think of going to "B" (see Supreme Test of a Thetan HCO B). When this study is done, tech courses can be considered. But Tech courses are in the same classroom under the same Super. Qual does FULL Word Clearing rundowns in the same Department as programming. INCOMPLETES You will find numerous incomplete courses amongst staff and crew. These 256 became incomplete because of a misunderstood word or earlier misunderstood subject. An Exec who is a failed student also has misunderstood words. So failure to sign up or attend are the business of the Course Super or the same Dept in Qual. It comes down to a misunderstood word. STRAIGHT ORG The only way an org will come out straight is by forbidding musical chairs and getting in such a program as this. AUDITOR HATS Auditors have hats as well as Tech. Lack of knowing their staff hats and auditor hats is a reason for losses. Student and staff hat comes before tech. AUDITING TECH When an org expands it must observe its 2 to I Admin Tech ratio. Admin people can qualify as auditors part time. Deserving staff members when properly replaced can go on full time training. Only when a crew or staff member has been a good attending upstat student on part time with good post stats should he go on full time training. OTHER TECH Posts often have other tech such as engines or cars or machine operation. When possible this is studied part time in the usual way. Crew and staff members may also be sent to special outside schools for brief training periods. SUMMARY When Qual does not do such programming, when the org has no on policy part time crew-staff course supervisor then it unstabilizes its people by leaving them untrained and will be upset by any effort to expand. HCO Expeditors just hired will be a hindrance unless they are rapidly put through basic training on part time study, rigidly adhered to and well organized. People already on post in orgs are seldom programmed and trained, at this writing, to the post they are on. Execs often mistakenly do not cooperate in such part time training. Such courses do not consider a non-attendee a blown student but should. By following this P/L expansion can occur and staff members can hold their posts much more easily. This is a very rewarding program. It must be followed. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 257 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1972 Issue 11 Remimeo (Cancels and replaces HCO PL of Personnel 20 Jan 72 of the same title) Programmer Personnel Programming Series I PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING A Programme can be defined as: "A plan of study for an individual student over a given period." "A Plan of procedure; a schedule or system under which action may be taken toward a desired goal. The keynote is a sequence of actions." "To work out a sequence of operations to be performed by a person or computer." The root words associated are Programme (French)-A public notice, and Prographein (Greek) To write before. (Webster's 7th Collegiate Dictionary.) A Personnel Programmer works with individual staff members and draws up workable personnel programmes and sees that they are fully executed. The purpose of a Personnel Programmer is: to help LRH to expertly programme each staff member to a point of real success on his own post, to operate well as a member of the group and attain higher and higher levels of skill, knowledge and ability, through full use of the technology of Scientology and Dianetics. Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 258 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971 Issue I Remimeo Personnel Programmers Personnel Programming Series 2 PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING RULES There are certain rules which apply to Personnel Programming, which if violated, will result in unsuccessful and incomplete personnel programmes, and subsequent low morale and stats. I . "All the rules of auditing apply in personnel programming" - LRH "A Talk on the Basic Qua]" tape 5 Sept 1971. 2. The primary purpose of personnel programming is to get each staff member competently wearing their own post hat, and operating well and smoothly as a member of the group. 3. The Basic Personnel Programme provides: (as per the attached chart) A. One main entrance channel comprising Sea Org and staff basics, culminating in full post hatting. B. The Tech route. C. The Policy route. D. The Seamanship route. (Sea Org Only) 4. The Personnel Programming Repair Programme is that which designates repair training actions on past posts in order to make the current post occupiable, or short repair actions which are interjected into the current Post Advance Programme, to handle a situation on the person's post. 5. The Personnel Programming Advance Programme is that programme which lays out the steps necessary to get the person fully on post. 6. Do not do unnecessary repair actions. 7. Do not interject or allow study actions which violate the programme the person is On. 8. Let staff members have their wins on programme actions and see that each completion is separately declared. 9. Complete major programme cycles and do not switch routes in mid-programme. 10. Work to complete each major programme in turn, resulting in a fully trained and processed staff member and Sea Org Member. 11. Complete earlier cycles begun before starting a new cycle. 12. In the case of older staff members who have many incomplete actions or checksheets in all routes, prescribe the necessary repair completions and get the person into the route which will most benefit him on post. 259 13. Be prepared to redo some programmes if skipped gradients and missing data are discovered. 14. Be prepared to interject a post repair programme into any cycle, as an immediate action required to handle a PT situation. 15. Ensure all programmes incorporate full word clearing of all materials and tapes per FO 2960 Course Requirements (SO only). 16. Use full study tech and every tool we have to get your result: A. Word Clearing B. Demos C. Star-rate checkouts D. Clay demos E. Drills F. Cramming G. The Org Library. 17. Do not issue stereotype programmes. Each must be done individually, as per any preclear programme. 18. Push each person to a win, then another win, and another win, and so on. 19. The workability of a programme is "Is it being done?" If a staff member bogs, the programme must be re-examined for skipped gradients and/or missing data or incorrectly included data. 20. Draw up the length of programmes and the time limit according to the capacity of the staff member. Newer staff or staff needing repairs should be short programmed to a win, then can have slightly larger programmes. 21. Do not get "stuck on a win" with one programme and give that programme to all others. Programmes are individual. 22. See that staff go to the Registrar to sign up for Courses and checksheets after being programmed. 60% of staff can get lost if this is not done. 23. Schedule needed Specialist Sea Training cycles at a "rest point" in a post hatting programme cycle. (SO Only.) 24. A programme rest point is: A completion to F/N VGIs. 25. Push staff cases to get completed to VA and get them onto the Solo Course. This is not a long course and can also be scheduled in at a "rest point", depending on how the person is doing on post. 26. Tell staff members to come and see you when they reach Points 24 and 25 above so that you can adjust their programme accordingly. 27. Get Crew Supervisors to supply weekly lists of any not attending crew study regularly. Call these in and find out why and get them back on course. 28. Programme in Dianetics and Scientology books into programmes liberally. These contain basic operating data vital to all staff. 29. Upsets on past posts still causing PT distress require auditing and the C/S must be advised. 30. Rehabilitation of the person and cleaning up past post misunderstoods on past posts which were failed or lost may play a vital part in getting an unmoving staff member on the road to success again. This, of course, is a Personnel Repair action. 260 31. If the Personnel Programmer is not familiar with a post area and what is required to get the person on post, he must go into the data collection step and could get added data from the person's senior. 32. A Personnel Programmer must know the Org Board or Org Boards in the areas in which he is operating. 33. There are three main areas which lead to unnecessary staff losses in programming: A. Trying to do a programme with missing or wrong data. B. Mis-programming. C. Mis-Course Supervision. 34. All the rules of study apply to Personnel Programming. 35. Do not commence the metered programming action with the TA above 3.50 or below 2.0. End off and advise the C/S to handle. Meantime the person can study their next needed action. The only limitations to personnel programming are the actual courses available in a given org. Sea Org Members have the most benefit in this because all courses are available to them at all times. If an org recruits in excess and programming is done well, getting a person to their nearest AOSH for higher level training and processing will be routine and no problem. STOs must wear their hats as part of the STO network, keeping track of area org staffs doing local training, pushing them through, and seeing that they get back to their orgs fast. Personnel programming plays a very important role in the actual prosperity and viability of an org and its staff. HCO puts an org there, but Dept 13 makes it R RUN - gets it operating. Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 261 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971 Issue 11 Remimeo Personnel Programmers Personnel Programming Series 3 PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING TECHNOLOGY "All the rules of auditing apply in personnel programming" - LRH "A Talk on the Basic Qual" tape 5 Sept 1971. As in all preclear programming (the C/S must have and use data about that preclear), so the Personnel Programmer must have full data on a Staff Member to be able to do intelligent and successful personnel programming. Successful programming = the programmes being done, staff members winning, wearing their hats better and more fully, their stats are up and into a higher range. The org is into a higher operating level. The steps of Personnel Programming are: A. Data collection. Collect all. past and present post and study data. B. Data evaluation. Evaluate the data received. C. Draw up a proposed programme. D. Interview the staff member on the meter, with the proposed programme and all data to hand and check out the programme for validity and making any needed adjustments, to F/N VGIs. Therefore, the operating procedure of Personnel Programming is: I . Get each person to fill out the full Tally sheet. 2. Do the Personnel Programming White Form on each staff member. 3. Study the tally sheet and see what has been completed, what is incomplete, etc. 4. The immediate goal is to get each staff member fully wearing his hat, as a participating staff member and SO member. 5. Make a list of all incomplete Courses or checksheets, listing them in order of completeness to the least completed. This is the programme error summary. 6. Which of these incomplete courses or checksheets affect the staff member's current post? Mark these with a star. 7. Recheck what actual progress the staff member has made on his post hatting cycle. List out any and all missing steps. This is the Post Advance Programme-to bring the person up to where he should be on his post. 8. Check SO Basics and see if the SO member hat is done. 9. Check staff member basics and see if SS I and II are done. 10. NOW, with the purpose in mind to get that staff member on post and operating as a member of the group, draw up a proposed programme for the person. 11. Call in the person, and ON THE METER, go over and present the tentative programme to the person. 262 12. If there are any disagreements, first check for misunderstood words and clean these up Method 2, each to FIN. 13. Now, make any needed adjustments, putting in a time limit (shortening into a series of shorter programmes, or putting in a missed training action) to FIN VGIs. 14. Send the person to the Examiner and then to the Registrar to sign up for the first course or checksheet on the programme, then to Course Super and back to post. 15. Collect exam. If no FIN VGls at Examiner, the staff member's personnel folder and programme will have to be re-evaluated, the worksheets taken during the programme examined and the error found. Then the person is brought back and the programme corrected and to Examiner with FIN VGIs. 16. No staff member who did not FIN VGIs at Examiner may be neglected or left with a wrong programme. This must be handled. 17. Write up five copies of the programme and send to: A. The staff member B. The person's Div head C. F/MAA or MAA D. Pers Enhancement TIM E. Staff Course Supervisor. 18. Put a time limit on each programme. 19. Assign the staff member's Division head responsible for getting it done. 20. Put up a set of Personnel Enhancement TIM baskets for: A. One day (urgent repair or cramming cycle). B. One week. C. One month. D. Three months. 21. Place the TIM copy in the appropriate TIM basket. 22. File all papers and worksheets in the staff member's Personnel File in Dept 13. 23. Copy any needed data off the Personnel Programming White Form and body route the form to Pc Admin for filing in the person's pc folder. 24. Get the person to complete the programme. 25. If the staff member goes well on the first two or three steps and bogs down, call the person in and recheck the programme for a missing gradient, misunderstoods, etc to FIN VGIs. Distribute any amendments to that person's programme as per 18 above. 26. When each programme is complete, recheck the tally sheet, see that it is fully updated, re-examine the Personnel Programming White Form, . 27. Call the staff member in (tell him to bring his stats) and draw up his next programme. If the person isn't fully and totally flying on his post, more actions will be required. If the person is doing very well on his post, then programme him/her into the channel of training which will most benefit him/her on post and in accordance with future plans. To FIN VGIs Judy Ziff Qual Aide for LRH:JZ:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 263 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971 Remimeo Issue III Pers Programmer C/Ses Personnel Programming Series 4 PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING WHITE FORM The following is a White Form for Personnel Programming. It is done on a meter. The answers are written on this form with all E-Meter reactions. This could be a valuable tool in getting needed data for compiling valid and workable personnel programmes and getting any and all past areas of post upsets cleaned up. Copy off important details required for personnel programming and send this Personnel Programming White Form to the HGC for filing in the staff member's pc folder. Tell the Staff Member that "This is a Personnel Programming White Form. This is not auditing." NAME POST- DATE ORG E-Meter Reaction 1. How long have you been in the Sea Org? 2. How long have you been a Scientologist? 3. What was the first book you read? 4. What other Scientology or Dianetics books have you read? 5. What was the first tape you ever heard? 6. What past posts have you held? Post Where When 264 7. What posts did you have wins on? 8. What posts did you have difficulties with? 9. What posts before Scientology did you have wins on? 10. What posts before Scientology did you have difficulties with? 265 11. What are your areas of interest in the Sea Org? 12. What are your areas of interest in Scientology and Dianetics? 13. Is there any specific post (or posts) you had a huge win on? 14. Are you having any particular difficulties with your current post? 15. Is there any specific area of your post requiring more specialized training? What sort of training? 16. Do you know the Org Board for your Division or Org? 266 17. Do you know how to route a communication to anyone in the org or ship? 18. Is there much dev-t in your area? 19. Do you know how to deal with dev-t? 20. Is there anyone who is distracting you from your post? 21. Is there any way you could do your post better? 22. Have you completed your Mini Hat? 23. Do you have any misunderstoods on your Mini Hat? 24. Have you completed your full hat checksheet? 25. Do you have any misunderstoods in your full hat checksheet? 26. What would be of assistance in helping you to wear your hat more fully? 27. Is there anything else you would like to say about your post or hat? Thank you. That's it. Judy Ziff LRH:JZ:nt.rd Qual Aide Copyright (c) 1971 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 267 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971 Issue IV Remimeo Pers Programmer Personnel Programming Series 5 MASTER PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING TALLY SHEET Purpose: To ensure that Personnel Programmers have full data to hand when doing personnel programming. This is the master tally sheet and once filled in by all staff, it is filed carefully in the staff member's personnel file in Dept 13, and thereafter filed as staff complete courses and checksheets The tally sheet is attached. Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 268 ORIGINAL COLOUR FLASH BLACK ON WHITE MASTER PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING TALLY SHEET To: Date: From: Personnel Programmer Dear Staff Member, Please fill in the attached sheet with ticks and dates, as indicated and send back to me soonest. I will be using the data on this master tally sheet along with other data to ensure that your post programming and future programming is properly done. Love, Personnel Programmer COMPLETE WC INCOMPLETE APPROX SEA ORG BASICS Just Middle Near DATE (SO ONLY) Started End STARTED 1. Sea Org SS 2. SO Member Hat 3. AB 4. Mission School 3rd STAFF MEMBER BASICS 1. Staff Status I 2. Staff Status 11 3. OEC Vol 0 POST HA TTING I . Mini Hat 2. Divisional Summary 3. Mini Hats of all Juniors 4. Full post hat checksheet Incl A-1 5. Div Hds-FP Member Hat 6. Div Hds-Ad Council Member Hat 7. Fully checked out & can competently operate all machines in Div or Dept 8. Data Series 9. Org Series 269 COMPLETE WC INCOMPLETE APPROX Just Middle Near DATE Started End STARTED 10. Personnel Series 11. C/S Series (Tech & Qual) 12. Target Series 13. Dev-T Series 14. Stable Terminal Checksheet 15. OEC Vol for Div 16. All FOs on Div POLICY I . OEC Divisional Volume 2. Full OEC 3. Sur OEC 4. FEBC 5. FEBC Internship 6. PRO Course 7. Tours Course 8. Other Specialist Courses TECH I . Wd Clearing Mini Course 2. Checkout Mini Cse 3. Student Hat 4. TRs Course-HAS 5. HQS 6. HSDC 1 7. HDG 8. HC 9. Mini CSC 10. RPCSC 11. Solo Course 12. Academy 0,1,2,3,4 13. Non-Pro Course 14. SHSBC 15. Cl VII 16. Cl VIII 17. HSST 18. Cl IX 19. Cl x 20. Cl XI 21. Cl XII FUTURE PLANS FOR TECH TRAINING: 270 COMPLETE WC INCOMPLETE APPROX Just Middle Near DA TE SEAMANSHIP (SO ONLY) Started End STARTED 1. Sea Watch Picture Book 2. QM of Gangway 3. Anchor Watch 4. Rec/Fath Specialist 5. Helm Specialist 6. Radar Specialist 7. Radio Specialist 8. Signals Specialist 9. Lookout Specialist 10. QM Specialist 11. OOD Specialist 12. Celestial Nav Specialist 13. Con Specialist 14. Petty Off Chsht 15. SO Officer Chsht MISSIONAIRE SPECIALIST (SO ONLY) Mission School 2nd Mission School Ist PROCESSING Method One Highest Grade Attained Future Plans for processing Staff Member Signature Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L, RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.rd 271 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER- 1971 Issue V Remimeo Pers Programmer E0S Personnel Programming Series. 6 PERSONNEL PROGRAMMER ETHICS INTERVENTION RIGHTS Staff members get into Ethics trouble basically through improper or inadequate Dept 13 Personnel Enhancement activities. The staff member is: A. Not programmed. B. Mis-programmed. (The current programme has neglected or mis-placed an urgently needed action.) C. Will not complete training or hatting cycles or programmes. When a staff member gets into Ethics trouble, the Personnel Programmer should check his records and see if the staff member is indeed not programmed or mis-programmed. If this is the case, he must appeal to the Ethics Officer for the action or condition to be suspended pending guaranteed completion of a Cramming and word clearing cycle. This would not be done if a person was named as an Interested Party in a Board of Investigation or a Comm Ev for Crimes or High Crimes. If a staff member won't complete programmes and hatting cycles, the Personnel Programmer should assist the Ethics Officer by relaying all known data in a Knowledge Report. Similarly, the Ethics Officer should relay information on failing staff to the Personnel Programmer for handling and so avert a real collapse of a personnel or Unit or Section or Dept or Division. By doing the above, we will be working towards the rehabilitation of a person and using our technologies for the greatest good of the greatest number of dynamics. Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 272 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 23 OCTOBER 1971 Issue VI Remimeo Personnel Programmer Execs Personnel Programming Series 7 INDIVIDUAL STAFF STUDY ORDERS In order to protect personnel programming lines and ensure that correct personnel programmes are not violated or ignored by others, the following rule is introduced: ALL ORDERS CONCERNING INDIVIDUAL STAFF STUDY, CRAMMING OR TRAINING MUST BE SENT TO THE PERSONNEL PROGRAMMER FOR IMPLEMENTATION. The Personnel Programmer will then inspect the staff member's existing programmes and handle as follows: A. Compare the order against the existing programme. B. Incorporate the order, as an urgent post repair cycle, into the existing programme. C. If the programme is badly violated, send the order back to the originator with a suggested handling. Copies of all Personnel Programmes will, in future, be sent to all Div Heads, so the possibility of programme violation is minimal, but in the interests of stable progress of staff, the above rule is laid down. Any investigatory body must also check with the Personnel Programmer before ordering any training actions. Judy Ziff Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:mes.nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 273 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 13 JANUARY 1972 Remimeo Pers Programmer Personnel Programming Series 8 TIPS ON PERSONNEL PROGRAMMING The following should be of assistance in implementing Personnel Programming. 1. The Personnel Programmer must: A. Be a Class III. B. Be able to do Two Way Comm well. C. Know the Org Board. D. Know the basic activities of posts. E. Good TRs. 2. The basic data on Personnel Programming is contained in the C/S Series and it is proven that the C/S Series must be word cleared and star-rated prior to studying and applying the Personnel Programming Series successfully. 3. In putting in the Personnel Programming technology newly into an org, it is more simply done if an entire Division is tackled at a time, i.e. HCO first. This can be relatively easily done as follows: A. Interview the Division Head, with a list of all staff, their posts and stats to hand. B. Find out what each staff member is doing, how they are doing on post and the senior's estimation of what is required, plus any weak areas noted. C. Compare this data to the data obtained in doing the steps of Personnel Programming, as outlined in No. 2 of this series, and complete the steps as outlined. D. The senior's data should be of assistance, but may not be. E. Go by raw statistics only-never by opinion. 4. Shorter programmes are more acceptable to staff and are more easily done. 5. When first putting in individual Programming of staff, there will be errors and some minor conflicts with other study orders issued, but these can be handled and ironed out fast by calling in the staff member and making any amendments to the programme. 6. Execs are starting to use Admin Cramming more-which is good, but make sure these orders go via Personnel Programmer and are co-ordinated in the programme. Keep order in Personnel Programming. 7. Be prepared to find staff who have never even read one Scientology or Dianetics book. These must be given a short "Make a Scientologist" programme of basic books, plus TRs, as needed. 274 8. The three elements you are dealing with are: A. A Scientologist who knows the data and applies it in his life and livingness. B. A staff member who is part of the team. C. A hatted staff member. The more each of these elements is IN, the more happy and successful the staff member, 9. Staff members who have not had Method I Word Clearing may bog-so make sure this is done prior to standard staff study and Method 2 word clearing actions. 10, See that the Personnel Programming White Form is routed to the staff member's preclear folder immediately on completion. Do not allow this to be filed in Dept 13 files. 11. The White Form may show that the staff member has read a few chapters from several books-this is an immediate signal for word clearing Method 2 on the first book. Failure to handle this will result in a bogged study programme. 12. Do not neglect Execs-they need a programme also. 13. Sometimes it will be found necessary to take a staff member off post for one or two days in order to get the needed word clearing and Cramming done on a staff member who is in difficulty on his post. This would be done in the case of a staff member who was actually enturbulated by his inability to handle post duties and causing dispersal in the area. A short cramming cycle, in this case, will work wonders. This action, of course, is done with the agreement of the person's senior and Div Head. 14. If a Programme gets badly bugged, it is up to the Cramming Officer to find out what is wrong and correct it. Qual Aide for L~ RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright (a) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 275 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 JANUARY 1972 Remimeo Hats Off Pets Prog STO Cramming Off Personnel Programming Series 9 EO Execs INTER-DEPENDENT HATTING AND PROGRAMMING FUNCTIONS The ultimate responsibility for the full hatting of a staff member crosses the org board through: A. The Hatting Officer in HCO B. Personnel Programmer in Qual C. Staff Training Officer in Qual D. Staff Course Supervisor in Tech E. Cramming Officer in Qual F. Word Clearing Auditors in Qual G. Ethics Officer in HCO H. The senior. All the above terminals play their role, as needed, to get the staff member through. The Hatting Officer issues the post hat checksheets and packs, does hat checks and usual post functions. He keeps a very close line in with the Personnel Programmer. The Personnel Programmer draws up the programme and co-ordinates data, events, orders necessary to get the staff members fully on post and operating successfully. His primary skill is in the sequence of actions and the exact gradient of programmes to bring about a specific result. The Staff Training Officer's primary interest in life is getting staff completed on courses, whether tech or admin. He provides liaison between Personnel Programmer, the Course Supervisor, and staff. The Staff Course Supervisor in Tech runs a standard course and sees that staff are not lost and do complete their courses. It is known that staff training in some orgs is still done in Qual under the STO but the ideal would be a proper course with a Supervisor in the Tech Div. The Cramming Officer is called upon when staff need special Cramming or debugging in a specific area. It is expected that all org staff will be put through the Word Clearing Mini Course so that they can all do Method 2 and 3 in the classroom. Additionally, Word Clearers in Qual are used for special or extensive cycles, Method 1, Word Clearing Correction List actions and Post Purpose Clearing. When staff members won't hat or won't do Cramming or checkouts ordered, despite a sincere effort to handle, it is an Ethics matter and the staff member must be sent to the Ethics Officer and then returned to complete the action. The ultimate responsibility for a staff member's hattedness lies with their immediate senior and the Division Head. It is the interest, help and guidance of the senior, added to the efforts of the above terminals, which provides the actual turning point in hatting a staff member. The coordinated actions of hatting by other terminals are only partially successful unless fully backed up and pushed along by the Div Head himself. So the first target of Personnel Programmers must be the Div Head himself. Raise his performance and he will pull his juniors up with him. The tone and production level of a Division is set by the Div Head. 276 There is one other person who is directly connected with success in hatting functions-and that is the Staff C/S. He sees that staff are scheduled for regular IN hour Intensives and that they do progress case-wise up the Grade Chart. Additionally, the C/S can ensure that work upsets and difficulties, whether present or past are cleaned up in Progress Programs, as needed. It will be seen that more than half of the actions necessary to get a staff member functioning successfully on post are in Dept 13 Dept of Personnel Enhancement. Their effectiveness monitors the Departmental,. Divisional and Org Valuable Final Product of EFFECTIVE AND WELL TRAINED STAFF MEMBERS and the statistic of Gross Income divided by Number on Staff, Qual Aide LRH:JZ:mes.rd for Copyright (c) 1972 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JANUARY 1972 Remimeo Issue III Personnel (HCO PL 24 June 70 Programmers same title revised) STO Hats Off Personnel Programming Series 10 MANAGEMENT CYCLE 1. RECRUIT Suitable qualifications. 2. HCO EXPEDITER Works as Expediter. Completes SSI and II. 3. ON POST AS TRAINEE Posted in org. Completes Method I and word clearing 2 and 3 on Mini Hat before going on post. WCs and star-rates the Divisional Summary, plus any Divisional Team Member Mini Checksheet whilst on post. 4. PURPOSES All purposes of post cleared by two way comm. 5. AUDIT General case advance. Programmed for regular Intensives by Staff C/S. 6. FULL POST TRAINING Completes full Post hat and A to I for post, plus any other programmed actions for post. Then star-rates full Divisional pack or book. 7. ON POST Fully grooved in and functioning. LRH:JZ:mes.rd Qual Aide Copyright (c) 1972 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 277 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 JANUARY 1972 Issue IV Remimeo Personnel Programmer Dir Pets Enh Personnel Series 24 Hats Off C&A Execs Personnel Programming Series I I Dir Validity STO THE "OK TO BE A SYSTEM A gradient scale of hatting, programming, checkouts and correction is required to get a staff member fully hatted and functioning competently on post. The "OK to Be a - - " System has been worked out. The system parallels the OK to Audit system for training auditors. 1. Mini Hat completion entitles the staff member to a Temporary OK to be a - Certificate. (All new staff hired or recruited must complete the Mini Hat before going on post.) 2. The staff member is now serving an apprenticeship or Interneship on the post. He must continue with his full post hatting cycle part time during staff study periods. 3. The staff member's senior and Division Head handle the staff member on the One Flub = Checkout system. Any slightest error on post and the staff member is ordered to check out by STO on the Policy violated. Repeated or flagrant flubs signal a Cramming order to be issued. 4. The Temporary OK to do the - - Hat Cert expires if the full hat is not completed in part time staff study within the following time periods: A. Section Head - 2 weeks B. Dept Head - 4 weeks C, Division Head - 6 weeks D. Senior Exec - 8 weeks. 5. STO keeps a board on which all staff are posted, with the above deadline dates posted for each staff member. It is his responsibility to push these through to completion and advise Dir Personnel Enhancement of any slows or noncompliances. Some posts in the org at Section Head level have very large hat$ and should be allowed Director time limit for full hatting, i.e. Ethics Officer, Body Registrar, PPO, PCO, etc. 6. If the staff member's Temporary OK to Do a post expires, STO must advise Dir Personnel Enhancement, who must see that the staff member redoes his Mini Hat before proceeding with his full post hat checkouts. 7. When the full post hat checksheet is completed, the staff member is awarded a Provisional Okay to Do the - - Hat Cert. 8. Daily correction actions and checkouts as needed continue to be ordered by the senior and Div Head. 278 9. The staff member continues his apprenticeship on post for a further eight weeks after the Provisional Cert is issued. At the end of this period, he writes up a full CSW and submits to C & A via his senior, Div Head and Dir Validity. 10. The senior attests that a full and proper apprenticeship has been served, that full correction actions have been taken and that the staff member is now competent on post. 11. Dir Validity inspects the CSW, the stats, the staff member's area and products before okaying the staff member for full post Cert. 12. If Dir Validity flunks the staff member, he must write all the reasons, listing policies violated or not applied and send to the staff member, with a copy for Dir Personnel Enhancement. Dir Personnel Enhancement must see that a new programme is drawn up to cover these points, plus any other weak area disclosed. 13. The staff member is awarded a full Permanent Post Certificate on completion of full hatting, apprenticeship and proven post competence, demonstrated by high statistics. It takes daily actions and care and interest by a Div Head and senior, plus good programming, checkouts, word clearing, cramming and training to really put a staff member on post. This action has to continue and continue until the person is fully competent on post and does not require any executive intervention. Obviously at this point, the, person is fully hatted on post, must have up stats and is eligible for his full post hat certificate. The staff member can then have an In Training posted under him and be programmed for his promotion. The A to B in Personnel Programming and training actions is from unhatted to fully hatted and on post functioning competently. It is the responsibility of Dir Personnel Enhancement to see that Div Heads and seniors commence implementation of the "One Flub" correction system. He must call in Div Heads for checkouts on relevant materials if they are failing to train or correct their staff. Failure to handle seniors at this point will threaten the whole of the hatting and personnel programming activities of an org and unnecessarily depress the stats. The OK to Be a - - system lays out a more efficient system of getting staff fully hatted. Nearly every post in Qual has a role to play in ensuring that it is put in and maintained. HCO PL 28 Dec 67 "Qual Senior Datum" points out Qual's relationship to students and pcs "Qua] is the students' and pcs' friend. A last refuge when other doors close." This definition is now extended to include staff; "Qual is the staff's best friend. The first refuge when a door closes." Qua] Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 279 The Church of Scientology CREED We of the Church believe: That all men of whatever race, color or creed were created with equal rights. That all men have inalienable rights to their own religious practices and their performance. That all men have inalienable rights to their own lives. That all men have inalienable rights to their sanity. That all men have inalienable rights to their own defence. That all men have inalienable rights to conceive, choose, assist and support their own organizations, churches and governments. That all men have inalienable rights to think freely, to talk freely, to write freely their own opinions and to counter or utter or write upon the opinions of others. That all men have inalienable rights to the creation of their own kind. That the souls of men have the rights of men. That the study of the mind and the healing of mentally caused ills should not be alienated from religion or condoned in non-religious fields. And that no agency less than God has the power to suspend or set aside these rights, overtly or covertly. And we of the Church believe: That man is basically good. That he is seeking to survive. That his survival depends upon himself and upon his fellows, and his attainment of brotherhood with the Universe. And we of the Church believe that the laws of God forbid Man: To destroy his own kind To destroy the sanity of another To destroy or enslave another's soul To destroy or reduce the survival of one's companions or one's group. And we of the Church believe: That the spirit can be saved and That the spirit alone may save or heal the body. 280 THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY 1812 19th Street N.W., Washington 9, D.C. FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 20 MARCH 1957 MINISTERIAL ORDINATION All Ministerial Ordinations of the Church must be in full force for the current year before Income Tax provisions can be claimed, Ordination requires an HCA or HPA Certificate, or higher, a Ministerial certificate from the Founding Church, or Church of American Science, and membership in the Hubbard Association of Scientologists, International. HASI dues are S 15.00 per year to all members, staff, officers, or otherwise. Ministerial Dues are 915.00, either in the Founding Church, or the Church of American Science. No certificate may be issued unless Accounting gives a clearance. A D.D. ordination may amply serve for ordination but must be renewed, just as a Ministerial certificate may be renewed and at the same cost. Transfers to and renewals in the Founding Church refunds half the cost to staff. L, RON HUBBARD THE FOUNDING CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY 1812 19th Street N.W., Washington, D.C. FOUNDING CHURCH POLICY LETTER OF 15 AUGUST 1957 (Second revision 12 June 1958) MINISTERIAL QUALIFICATIONS A minister of the Founding Church must meet the following requirements: I . Must have a Validated certificate in Scientology. 2. Must know the Church Creed verbatim. 3. Must be capable of giving the various ceremonies. 4. Must be able to pass an examination on the great religions. 5, Must have a knowledge of St John. 6. Must be of good moral character. 7. Must be able to conduct a Sunday service for the church. 8. Must have a moral and ethical code by which he can live and abide. LRH:bt.rd L. RON HUBBARD [The 12 June '58 revision deleted the requirement that "All Ministerial Certificates must be Validated by January 1, 1958 to continue in force"; deleted under 4 "(Sample Text: The Religions by Which Men Live-published by Fawcett Publications, Fawcett Building, Fawcett Place, Greenwich, Conn.)"; and added 7 & 8. The IS August 1957 issue was itself a revision of FC PL of 3 May 1957, adding 2 above, and changing St Luke to St John. The FC PL as published above was reissued on 22 September 1967 from Saint Hill as an HCO Policy Letter with identical text, adding routing as follows: Remimeo, All Staff, (c) of T Hat, Dir of Exams Hat, Dir of Certs and Awards Hat, Sec to Executive Director Hat.] 281 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 OCTOBER 1962 Urgent to D.C., N.Y., & L.A. Information CenOCon RELIGION (Furnish a copy of this to all attorneys dealing with our interests for us.) It is of interest to all organizations that all Scientology incorporations are religious in nature. Not only the Founding Church of Scientology or the Churches of Scientology in the United States, but also all HASI Inc. offices (which includes all British and Commonwealth offices as HASI Ltd. is not fully in force anywhere except New Zealand) are religious corporations. In the HASI Inc. incorporation papers the corporation is clearly designated as a "religious fellowship". The use of the E-Meter in Scientology, but not Dianetics, is describable as follows: "All religions seek truth. "Freedom of the spirit is only to be found on the road to Truth. "Sin is composed, according to Scientology, of Lies and hidden actions and is therefore Untruth. "The Electrometer is used to disclose truth to the individual who is being processed and thus free him spiritually. "Only in this way can Man's spiritual self be regained. "A religious confessional fails only when not guided by a modern instrument such as the Electrometer. "Religions in the 1960's use modern aids. The Electrometer is a valid religious instrument, used in Confessionals, and is in no way diagnostic and does not treat. "Regardless of any earlier uses of psychogalvanometers in Dianetics or psychology or in early Scientology publications when research was in progress, the Electrometer in Scientology today has no other use than as directed above." In view of the "interest" the Food and Drug Administration has in the E-Meter, the above data is vital and must be impressed upon investigating agents as it is only the truth of the matter. They thought that outside the U.S. Scientology was not religious, which is false. The impression must be strongly corrected in the FDA at once. Dianetics used an older instrument to detect engrams. The book Electropsychometric Auditing is entirely a Dianetic manual. For information of the London and Commonwealth offices, they will soon be transferred to Church status when the Founding Church of Washington DC is given full tax exemption, and HASI Ltd.- and HCO Ltd. shares will be converted to equally valuable Church certificates. Scientology 1970 is being planned on a religious organization basis throughout the world. This will not upset in any way the usual activities of any organization. It is entirely a matter for accountants and solicitors. I have evidently failed in designating HASI Ltd. as a non-profit organization and cannot transfer HASI Inc. assets to any but a non-profit corporation. Therefore other arrangements must be made, but these in no way shatter any organization or change its personnel or actions in the slightest. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard 282 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 AUGUST AD 15 Issue 11 Gen Non-Remimeo Tech Division CHAPLAIN Every org has a Chaplain. The Chaplain's Office is located in the Technical Division, Division 4, and in the Department of Technical Services. The purpose of the Chaplain is "To help Ron minister to others, to succor those who have been wronged and to comfort those whose burdens have been too great." It should be made well known to pcs and students that when they cannot elsewhere be heard, they always have recourse to the Chaplain. The Chaplain, while without actual authority to order remedies, may call cases of obvious mishandling to the attention of the appropriate department or section. His is also the complaints department. The Chaplain holds services where required, regularly on Sunday, or marriages, christenings or funerals. The Chaplain takes over Ron's hat in all these things. As all orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes for this activity are designed to further its basic purpose, no order, rule, regulation, policy or route may be made or used to interfere with the purposes of this office. The Chaplain is an Officer and heads a Section called The Chaplain Section. LRH:ml.rg.rd Copyright (a) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 19 JANUARY 1966 Issue IV Remimeo CHAPLAIN, TRANSFER OF The Office of the e Chaplain being basically a Review function, rightly belongs, and so will move to, the Review Department of the Qualifications Division. The Chaplain has the rank of Officer. A Chaplain's Section is formed in the Department of Review. LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1966 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 283 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint, Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 AUGUST 1966 Issue 11 Remimeo Division 6 Division I CHAPLAIN'S COURT CIVIL HEARINGS As many matters come before Ethics which are not properly Ethics but civil matters (i.e., between other persons), a Chaplain's Court Unit is formed in Division 6, Dept 18, as part of Section 5, The Chaplain's Section, which is formed herewith in Div 6 and abolished in Div 5. The Chaplain is transferred to this Section and is its Section Officer. A permanent presiding justiciary who must be a minister may be appointed called an Arbiter where activities warrant. The Chaplain (or the permanent or part time assisting Arbiter) presides over all Court Hearings and renders judgment. The organization of this activity is similar to any civil proceedings and may, when conditions warrant, have clerks and other personnel. The court may charge reasonable fees and has these as its statistic. Only Civil Matters may be heard or judged. All Ethics matters must be referred to Ethics. JUSTICE Reasonably priced and easily obtained justice are requisites to any civilization. The purpose of the Chaplain's Court Unit is to resolve matters of dispute between individuals. Staff personnel, pcs, students and Scientologists may utilize this Court Unit to resolve their own disputes or legal affairs. Staff members may not be sued by reason of performance of their org duties, as this belongs to Ethics where such complaint may be made. Any suit filed must be against the person who actually personally knew and damaged the individual suing by an action directed personally against the plaintiff, except for suits to remove Ethics orders. The org, a division, department or section may only be sued to obtain restoration of status, to revoke or alter Ethics orders or obtain service which was denied such as auditing time to right an omission. The org or any part of it may not be sued for financial damages or refund. Preliminary hearings only can be given in divorce matters at this time as these must also have state action before any such findings can be considered legal in the eyes of the state. However, separation may be found, both parties consenting. Collection of debt and remedy in defaulting on obligation may be sought from the court. REBUTTAL DAMAGES If a person who is sued has reason, he can, as defendant, require damages in his rebuttal and should the suit be fallacious and found against the plaintiff such may be awarded. 284 COSTS Costs may be recovered as part of damages, meaning costs of court action. EXTENT OF DAMAGES Any damages assigned by the Court must be reasonable and in keeping with reality. ETHICS RELATIONS Ethics may route civil matters to the Chaplain's Court Unit. In return in matters of perjury or the collection of damages awarded by the Court, the Court Unit may refer the matter to Ethics. REFUND SUITS Suits for refund fees may not be filed as this is an Ethics matter. LRH SU ITS Suits against LRH or the Guardian, board members, executive secretaries or secretaries are not accepted by the Court. WRONGFUL ETHICS ACTIONS HCO may be, sued in the Court for erroneous issue of an Ethics Order and for no other action. Damages requested may not exceed $5 or an order apologizing or restoration of status. I . BONUS ACTIONS All bonus matters or disputes between or amongst Tech, Qual and Treasury or their personnel may be heard by the Court Unit. STAFF MEMBER DISPUTES Personal disputes between staff members even when org business is concerned may be heard by the Chaplain's Court. FAILURE TO ABIDE Failure to abide by a Court Finding may become an Ethics matter. JURY When requested and allowed by the Chaplain, a jury of three persons may be chosen and used. The persons chosen must be agreed upon by both litigants. ATTORNEYS Anyone may act as an attorney in the Court Unit. Professional attorneys may appear before it. No attorney is required. PROCEDURES All procedures for the Chaplain's Court Unit are developed by and all magisterial appointments are made by the Chaplain in the form of Distribution Division See Eds. All fees are set in this manner. The Chaplain and the Court and such See Eds may be over-ruled only by. the Guardian or an Assistant Guardian or, when ordered, standardized amongst orgs by the Org Exec See WW. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.cden Copyright (c) 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 285 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 NOVEMBER 1966 Gen Non Remimeo ROUTING OF CHAPLAIN'S COURT ORDERS The findings and orders of the Chaplain's Court are issued in the form of Distribution Division Executive Directives, and require before issue, the signature of the Chaplain or Arbiter who presided over the Court Hearing, who signs and attests that the finding or order is "OK and not against policy". The original and all copies are then forwarded to the LRH Communicator who approves and seals them on the OK of the Chaplain or Arbiter who signed. The LRH Communicator may not alter or over-rule the Chaplain, Court, or any such Executive Directives, but may refuse to issue the Executive Directive where it is contrary to policy or technology. In case of such veto the date, name, , e, and paragraph number of the HCO B, Policy Letter, or prior Sec ED or ED must be stated in the veto, and the proposed ED and veto and any other relevant information packaged together and sent to the Assistant Guardian (if one has been appointed) and thence to the Guardian WW. The Assistant Guardian or Guardian may over-rule the Chaplain, Court, or such EDs, or may return the proposed ED to the LRH Communicator with instructions to issue. Chaplain's Court orders or findings, when approved and sealed by the LRH Communicator, are returned to the Court for the court to distribute. In addition to any distribution that the Court may find necessary the following is done. Two copies to the Founder. Two copies to the Guardian WW. One copy to the Assistant Guardian (if one has been appointed). One copy to the LRH Communicator Area. One copy to HCO Area Sec. Distribution Division EDs establishing and developing procedures and making magisterial appointments are made by the Chaplain and are issued on the normal organizational ED issue lines. Ken Delderfield, LRH Comm SH J.J. Delance, Qual See SH Gareth McCoy, Area Sec SH Ad Council SH Joan McNocher, HCO Exec See SH Otto Roos, Org Exec Sec SH Ad Council WW Leon Steinberg, HCO Exec Sec WW Pam Pearcy, Org Exec Sec WW Philip Quirino, LRH Comm WW Mary Sue Hubbard, The Guardian WW LRH:jp.rd for Copyright 1966 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 286 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 NOVEMBER 1967 [Excerpt] CHAPLAIN'S SECTION Chaplain Chaplain's Court Arbiter Chaplain's Court Clerk Chaplain's Court Files Clerk Sunday Services Promotion Clerk Chaplain's Sunday Services Assistant Mary Sue Hubbard LRH:jp.rd The Guardian WW Copyright (c) 1967 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder (Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 2 November 1967, Distribution Division, Departments Of Public Information, Clearing and Success. A complete copy can be found in Volume 6, page 9.1 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE I Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 SEPTEMBER 1968 (Appeared I st as SO Flag Order 1094 of 26 July 1968) Remimeo CHAPLAIN The Chaplain's primary duties are keeping people on the Org Board and the public in Scientology. The Chaplain's main area of operation in preventing people from falling off the Org Board, is Auditors. He/she is concerned with the auditors' morale, and endeavors to see that their troubles and problems get seen to. The Chaplain also knows who is their next of kin and family. The reason for this area being chosen as Chaplain's priority is that Auditors make others better, the able more able in using Scientology Tech and must not, above all be hindered by low morale, problems and troubles. An auditor's high morale equals a better delivery of standard Tech to his Pcs. The Chaplain does not and must not advise auditors on Tech. His role is to hearten and defend them and get people to let them audit and be audited and make their own grades. That attended to he has his other hat and service duties. LRH:ei.rd Copyright (c) 1968 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard Founder ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 287 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 FEBRUARY 1969 CenOCon Public Exec Sees ECs LRH Comms RELIGION Visual evidences that Scientology is a religion are mandatory on the pcs, Any staff who are trained at any level as auditors (but not in AOs) are to be clothed in the traditioned ministerial black suit, black vest white collar silver cross for ordinary org wear. Creed of the Church is to be done big and plainly posted in public areas. Stationery is to reflect the fact that orgs are churches. All public literature must state that Scn is religious philosophy. Since its first incorporation as HASI Arizona all orgs have been Religious fellowships by corporation statements. All orgs are now Churches by their C of S of California affiliation. The minister's course is a requisite for permanent certification. The legal decisions handed down on Scn by US high courts uphold it as a religion. It has never been anything else. It seeks SPIRITUAL FREEDOM. This may or may not be publicly acceptable. This is NOT the point. It is a requisite defense and it is true. Those are the points. Reinforce this in all possible ways. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sdp.ei.eden Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [See also HCO P/Ls 9 May 1971 Issue 11, Scientology Org Staff Uniforms, and 2 September 1971 Issue II, Religion-Scientology Org Staff Apparel, in the 1971 Year Book.] 288 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 MARCH 1969 Remimeo BPI SCIENTOLOGY IS A RELIGION "Scientology is a religion in the oldest sense of the word, a study of wisdom. Scientology is a study of man as a spirit, in his relationship to life and the physical universe. It is non-denominational. By that is meant that Scientology is open to people of all religions and beliefs and in no way tries to persuade a person from his religion, but assists him to better understand that he is a spiritual being .... 11 Mary Sue Hubbard >From Supplement to "Communication" September 1964 The following definitions are from Webster's New Twentieth Century Dictionary (2nd EditionThe World Publishing Company, Cleveland and New York-1959). A. RELIGION (noun) Derivation: from Latin religio (-onis) (religion), (piety), (conscientiousness), (scrupulousness), from religare (to bind back), re-, and ligare, (to bind), (to bind together). (a) Any specific system of belief, worship, conduct, etc., often involving a code of ethics and a philosophy; as the Christian (religionj, the Buddhist (religion), etc. (b) loosely, any system of beliefs, practices, ethical values, etc. resembling, suggestive of, or likened to such a system, as, humanism is his (religion). B. RELIGIOUS (adjective) Derivation: from Latin religiosus (religious). Of, concerned with, appropriate to, teaching, or relating to religion; as, a (religious) place; (religious) subjects. Also Careful; scrupulous; conscientiously exact; such as religion requires; as, a (religious) observance of vows or promises. C. PHILOSOPHY (noun) Derivation: from Latin philosophia; Greek philosophia, from Greek philosophos, from philos (loving), and Sophos (wise). Originally, love of wisdom and knowledge. A study of the process governing thought and conduct; theory or investigation of the principles or laws that regulate the physical universe and underlie all knowledge and reality; included in the study are aesthetics, ethics, logic, metaphysics, etc. The general principles or laws of a field of knowledge, activity, etc; as the (philosophy) of economics. (a) A particular system of principles for the conduct of life; (b) A treatise covering such a system. A study of human morals, character and behaviour. The mental balance believed to result from this; calmness; composure. 289 Scientology is a religion by the very nature of its philosophy and system of Ethics, Technology, and Administration, all of which is designed and set up for life to free itself from entrapment, and restore total freedom to the spirit. "But one of the oldest things that was ever given into the training of wise men that I know of was simply this-the basic faith in which the individual has been trained and the basic political allegiance of the individual must not be tampered with by the Order training him. And it was the Order itself which laid that down. That's an old, old one. They were training very wise men and that was the first thing that they made sure not to do. They did not tamper with these things. If the individual cared to alter these things himself nobody was even vaguely persuading him. It might be in the course of his study that he found certain things that men did laughable, or confusing, or he found certain things that men did remediable-but nobody was standing there trying to lead him into a higher religious or political conviction. And that is the case with Scientology." Extract from Phoenix Lectures. by L. Ron Hubbard (The celebrated lecture series given by L. Ron Hubbard to the Professional Course, Phoenix, Arizona, in July 1954.) L. Ron Hubbard's treatise on Scientology as a religious philosophy and a religious practice is given in Hubbard Communications Bulletin (H.C.O.B) of 21 June, 1960 "Religious Philosophy and Religious Practice" (as revised 18 April, 1967). It is highly important that all promotional literature and Church literature reflect the fact that Scientology is a religion. For instance one promotional piece of recent time stated "Scientology is a philosophy and a science." There was no mention that Scientology was a religion. If any statements are made in any literature which reflect that Scientology is other than a religious philosophy, an appropriate condition must be assigned to the party so making same. Kevin Kember Policy Safeguard Chief WW Jane Kember The Guardian WW Mary Sue Hubbard The Controller WW LRH:ei.rd Copyright (c) 1969 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 290 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 APRIL 1969 Remimeo SCIENTOLOGY MARRIAGE CEREMONIES Marriage ceremonies may be performed in any Scientology chapel or organisation, or by any minister of the Church of Scientology or affiliated churches only when all legal requirements of the state in which the marriage takes place are complied with. In most areas the Certificate of Marriage issued by the Church is fully legal, but in areas where a Civil Certificate of Marriage is also required, it is the responsibility of the Chaplain to ascertain the legal requirements of the area, this must be obtained BEFORE the Scientology ceremony is performed. Tony Dunleavy LRH:TD.jk.ei.rd CS-6 Public Aide Copyright (c) 1969 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 APRIL 1969 Remimeo pcs, Chaplain's Bar A SCIENTOLOGY CHURCH REGISTER A Register for Marriage, Recognition and Naming, and Funeral services is to be kept in every Church of Scientology. This Register should be in accordance with any local regulations regarding such. Having a Church Register is in keeping with our status and responsibility as a Church. Peter Moule T/Chaplain WW Tom Armistead Pub Act Sec WW Jim Keely Qual Sec WW Bruce Glushakow HCO Area Sec WW Ad Council WW Rodger Wright LRH Comm WW Approved by Jane Kember The Guardian WW for L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ei.cden Founder Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 291 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 JANUARY 1970 Remimeo Public Divisions Dir Success SCIENTOLOGY PRAYER Below is a prayer for Total Freedom to be delivered at the end of the ceremony of each Sunday Service. It was written by Peter Ginever in November, 1969. A PRAYER FOR 'TOTAL FREEDOM' May the author of the Universe enable all men to reach an understanding of their spiritual nature. May awareness and understanding of life expand, so that all may come to know the author of the Universe. And may others also reach this understanding which brings Total Freedom. At this time, we think of those whose liberty is threatened; of those who have suffered imprisonment for their beliefs; of those who are enslaved or martyred, and for all those who are brutalized, trapped or attacked. We pray that human rights will be preserved so that all people may believe and worship freely, so that freedom will once again be seen in our land. Freedom from war, and poverty, and want; freedom to be; freedom to do and freedom to have. Freedom to use and understand Man's potential-a potential that is God given and God-like. And freedom to achieve that understanding and awareness that is Total Freedom. May God let it be so. Lt. Cmdr. Diana Hubbard CS-6 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:DH.jz.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 292 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 APRIL 1970 Remimeo Chaplain's Hat PEO Hat pcs, Hat MORALE Morale is defined as "a sense of common purpose or a degree of dedication to a common task regarded as characteristic of or dominant in a particular group or organization". Also defined as "A confident, resolute, willing, often self-sacrificing and courageous attitude of an individual to the function or tasks demanded or expected of him by a group of which he is a part that is based upon such factors as pride in achievement and aims of the group, faith in its leadership and ultimate success, a sense of fruitful personal participation in its work and a devotion and loyalty to other members of the group". Also "a state of well-being and buoyancy based upon such factors as physical or mental well-being, a sense of purpose and usefulness and confidence in the future." Morale in a military sense applies to the whole group as in "Esprit de Corps" (spirit of the group). However, a group's morale is after all the additive result of the morale of each individual member. When one speaks of "bad morale" one can mean an individual's bad morale or that of a whole group. By caring for the morale of each individual one can raise the morale of the whole group. By working on group morale one can also change the morale of the individuals in the group. Successes tend to increase morale. Failures tend to decrease morale. Morale is subject to propaganda attacks entering false data into a group. Sound morale is best built by Reality. The restricting of unsavory news can injure morale by throwing out the R factor. Similarly false validation can injure group morale as the R factor is corrupted. The "expertise" of military groups in "handling morale" is to a marked degree worthless wherever it violates R factors. A severe or savage experience does not necessarily destroy group morale. I have observed that there was no group at all much less morale in combat units before they had a harsh experience in common. The highest morale groups in the world have been those whose common lot was harsh mutual experience. (US Marines, the Foreign Legion, etc.) Morale is not a sweetness and light proposition. Hand holding and sympathy can destroy morale if it also lessens group solidarity or injures the belief in the group's leadership. R is the vital factor in all morale problems. Six months or even a year before an operational or functional catastrophe one could have detected out-morale in certain areas. Such out-morale areas, continuing, have preceded a general upset or severe loss for the whole group. If small zones of out-morale are noticed and repaired when they occur, the group can be saved future upsets of magnitude. 293 The repair of individual morale is accomplishable, in the field of Scientology tech and Ethics. The handling of group morale is done in the area of accomplishing objectives along the agreed upon group purpose line and in the sphere of group social relations. If any organization has a chaplain with a full grasp of the subject of morale, its definitions and technology and if he works factually and successfully, group catastrophes would be averted. Lack of this function can be very destructive to a group. Successful accomplishment of it can be the source of group success. Skill in Scientology Tech, group organizational functions and Public Relations are the requisites of a good chaplain. LRH:dz.ei.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1970 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 OCTOBER 1970 A/G Hat Issue V pcs, Hat see of Public Services Hat Dir of Public A BOOK: "THE BACKGROUND TO THE Events Hat RELIGION OF SCIENTOLOGY AND CEREMONIES Dir of Training OF THE CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY Hat Chaplain Hat OF CALIFORNIA WORLD WIDE" There has been a gradual standardization of Sunday Church services and other ceremonies over the last few years. There is an increasing interest in the religious philosophy of Scientology amongst Scientologists and indeed non-Scientologists. Currently there is an increasing number of individuals entering missions, franchises, Churches and organizations, who before Scientology had no religious practice or persuasion. It is therefore an entirely predictable evolutionary step to produce a standard ministerial and lay reference book for study and corporate prayer. From January Ist 1971 it is to be added to the Minister's Course Checksheet. It is to be used in all Sunday services in all Churches of Scientology. The A/G, the pcs, and Chaplain in every org are to have a copy as part of the post materials. David Gaiman for Jane Kember The Guardian AV for Mary Sue Hubbard LRH:MSH:JK:DG:sb.ka.rd Controller Copyright (c) 1970 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 294 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 APRIL 1971 Remimeo Issue I Qual Sec Hat Dept 15 Hat Dir Success Hat HOD Area Sec Hat Minister's Checksheet Ethics Officer Hat ORDINATION CEREMONY (Reference HCO PL 12 June 1958) A Church Member seeking Ordination as a Minister of the Church of Scientology is firstly duly examined as to Ethics, secondly as to the Codes and Creed, and thirdly as to the ability to counsel and deliver the religious services of the Church in the normal course of his or her theological studies in an Academy of Scientology, These examinations having been completed and necessary certification by the Department of Examinations, Certificates and Awards having been issued as covered by requirements per Ministerial Examination Checksheets, the final investiture proceeds as follows: I . PRESENTATION: The candidates for ordination are called in the presence of the congregation and before duly ordained Ministers of the Church, to read and attest to the Auditor's Code and Code of a Scientologist. The candidates then deliver a short sermon on the subject of Scientology. After this, the officiating Minister reads: "In the name of the Church Council, and before these witnesses, this member (these members), name(s), having been examined most thoroughly as to fitness, aptitude and vocation to serve the Ministry of the Church of Scientology are here declared accepted." 2. INVOCATION: "By this invocation of the symbol of our Church, we recognize and acknowledge that he (she) (they) is/are ordained and henceforth be, Ministers of the Church with all rights, sacerdotal privileges, and responsibilities due to and from a Minister." (The Minister is here presented with a Church of Scientology cross.) "Before these witnesses, you are now charged with the responsibility of furthering the spiritual work of the Church in all its aspects, to hear confessions, to preach, and otherwise minister to the spiritual travail of your fellow man and to hold inviolate the confidence that your fellow beings impart." 3. ACCEPTANCE: "By the acceptance of these credentials, you are further charged at all times to uphold the religious and ethical tenets, precepts, and principles which form the cornerstones of our Faith." "I ask the congregation now to acknowledge and recognize the Minister(s) here presented and ordained." (Dismiss.) This policy in no way changes requirements for qualifications as a Minister. Robert H. Thomas Deputy Guardian US for Jane Kember The Guardian World Wide for Mary Sue Hubbard LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:nt.rd The Controller Copyright (c) 1971 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 295 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 JUNE 1971 Issue II Remimeo PRAYER DAY ORDINATION CEREMONY (Reference HCO PL 12 April 197 1, Issue I) The following Ordination Ceremony, as successfully used in Prayer Day in Los Angeles, may be utilized in such similar cases when Ordination is integrated into a larger service. The requirements referred to are outlined in HCO PL 12 April 1971 "Ordination Ceremony". ORDINATION This ceremony is conducted by a Scientology Minister in complete ministerial dress. ,, Will the candidates for Ordination please come forward?" (They come forward and stand facing the minister. They wear clerical dress without the Scientology cross.) "(The full name of each candidate is inserted here)... you come before us at your own behest, in order to make known to these assembled witnesses your desire to serve the Ministry of the Church of Scientology." "Do each of you affirm that you have fulfilled all requirements set forth by the Church for Ordination, and do you further affirm that you have been duly examined and certified as having completed such requirements?" (They answer each in sequence, "I do.") "Do you also attest that you will abide by the Auditor's Code and the Code of a Scientologist?" (They answer together "I do. "Please turn and face the congregation." (They do so.) "(The name of each inserted here). . ., having been examined most thoroughly as to fitness, aptitude and conviction to serve the Ministry of the Church of Scientology, and having thus manifested their vocation, are, in the name of the Church Council and before these witnesses, accepted." (They turn and face the minister.) "By the invocation of the symbol of our Church, we here acknowledge that Reverend (names inserted here, each with Reverend in front of it)... are ordained and henceforth be, Ministers of the Church of Scientology, with all rights, sacerdotal privileges, and responsibilities of the Ministry." (The ordaining minister places a cross around each ordainee's neck, and presents him with his cert if desired.) (After the crosses are received the ordainees turn and face the congregation.) "Before these witnesses, you are now charged with the responsibility of furthering the spiritual work of the Church in all its aspects: to hear confessions, to preach, and otherwise minister to the spiritual travail of your fellow man, and to hold inviolate the confidence that your fellow beings impart." "By the acceptance of these credentials you are further charged at all times to uphold the religious and ethical tenets, precepts and principles of our faith." "Do you, the congregation, recognize, agree and acknowledge these Ministers are Ordained? If so say 'we do'." (Congregation: "We do.") "Thank you. Having been agreed, it is so." (The ordainees stand briefly and then singly return to their seats.) Note that this Ordination Ceremony is especially useful in Ordaining several ministers in the same ceremony. Craig Beeney DG Tech US for Robert H. Thomas DG US for Jane Kember The Guardian WW for Mary Sue Hubbard Controller for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:MSH:JK:RHT:CB:ne.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 297 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER 1970 Issue 11 Remimeo C/S Hats Qual Sec Hats Medical Spec Chksht HDC Chksht Health Series No. I C/S Chksht MO Hats MEDICINE AND DIANETICS Medicine ideally applied using the technology contained in such Series as Programming and The Data Series does work and does cure many. There are a few things which occur however to give a doctor a loss in his own technology and a disbelief in a specific technique or treatment he knows by all scientific basis and early tests should have worked. Most of these are covered in the Dianetics Course and it is assumed the student of this course is familiar with the technology of medicine and has graduated from Dianetics prior to reading this. The main basis of loss of confidence in a medical technique falls into two categories: A. The patient was in fact already physically cured of the diagnosed disease but still has the symptoms. B. The person never did have the disease by test but has the physical symptoms, sometimes classical, of the disease. An example of A. in looking through actual case files shows a patient who at one time had type HI hepatitis. This was in 1960. It was tested then and all tests positive. Treatment was given and all tests negative and by actual physical body tests was cured. In 1970 the patient suddenly develops all of the symptoms of the disease, including the pain and somatics. All outward physical signs are evident in a preliminary exam. However, Clinical tests done in a hospital under controlled conditions were negative. A physician working without lab facilities using only office equipment he can afford would be quite justified in trying to treat this patient medically as the patient was in pain and suffering just as severely with the same superficial symptoms as in 1960. However, tests showed in 1970 medicine had cured her earlier. The person had not been processed Dianetically in 1960. The physical body then was still subject to re-experiencing the somatics and pain and attempting to fight a disease it no longer had. Various cases showed acute rises in temperature; in the case of a TB patient cured in 1955, fluid collected in his lungs; skin coloration, pulse, respiration, blood pressure and even blood in the urine have occurred in tested cases where an early disease no longer, in fact, exists. The body due to a key-in simply believes it's there. Reactions to some vaccines and inoculations demonstrate the physical aspect of this-the bank aspect is another story. 298 In example B. the same follows. Case history shows the disease itself was not a physical fact this lifetime but body reactions quite physical with all signs of the. illness except the actual micro-biotic in the body occurs. So where after tests it is shown that in actual fact the disease exists, it should be treated medically. Then once a physical cure occurs and along with the medical treatment it must be treated Dianetically for the patient to remain physically well. This course shows how medicine and Dianetics; and Scientology are correlated to produce a permanent non-reoccurring cure, it shows when to use medicine and when to process and how they work together. Mary C. Robinson, Medical Specialist Flag Medical Officer for W/O Susan Pomeroy D/4th Mate for Ens. Robin Lindsell Flag 4th Mate for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:RL:SP:MCR:rr.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 299 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 3 OCTOBER 1970 Med Spec Chksht Issue III MO Hat C/S Hat Health Series No. 2 Qual Sec Hat HDC Chksht C/S Chksht THE ROLE OF THE MEDICAL OFFICER Scientology Organizations now have a post in their Qualifications Divisions which has as its main purpose: INCREASING THE NUMBER OF STAFF DECLARED IN GOOD HEALTH. KEEPING THE ENVIRONMENT, HEALTH AND HYGIENE STANDARDS HIGH. It is sometimes necessary to programme individuals for medical test series and examinations by medical specialist in order to determine beyond doubt which category an unwell person comes under: I . Has a known physical illness in present time which is medically curable. 2. Has a known physical illness for which there is currently no medical cure. 3. Has symptoms of physical illness but test results show no current disease, malfunctions or deficiency, of a physical nature. Yet the person is not well. Whenever it is found that medical treatment will result in a physical cure, or relief of a symptom or symptoms the individuals are then programmed and directed through a medical series to a result. As per Dianetic and Scientology technology such persons are given assists and auditing as directed by the Case Supervisor. Reports on the medical progress of programmed individuals are sent regularly to the C/S by the Medical Officer who is in turn in liaison with the Medical Specialist giving the treatment. Where medical treatment is found to not be producing results without processing, it will be found to work with it. So charts for the person have the processing times entered on them as well. Where there is no known medical cure as in No. 2, or no known medical illness as in No. 3, it is entirely up to processing to produce a cure-a Well and Happy Human Being even though some medical relief for the symptoms may be used. DRUGS - PAIN KILLERS AND ANAESTHESIAS There are some cases when drugs must be used in the very early stages of treatment to enable healing. For the most part these are drugs to control spasms such as in an ovary infection given along with the curative medication until such time as the response to healing occurs and the spasms cease. It has been found where a good touch assist is given such drugs are discontinued and only the curative medication continued. In any event they are never given any longer than absolutely necessary, as each dose extends the time before auditing can begin. Anaesthesias for tooth extractions, if local, wear off in twenty-four hours while a general anaesthesia prevents auditing for seven days so is discouraged. Surgical general anaesthesia. for minor surgery is discouraged in the cases of injury if a local anaesthetic will do. In all events any time a general anaesthetic is used it must be run out in processing as soon as possible so the Medical Officer keeps the C/S advised of the exact time and date drugs have been administered. The Medical Officer in the Sea Org may discontinue a drug at any point regardless of medical prescriptions as he is in a position to observe assist and processing results the medical doctor may not be aware are occurring. No drug is ever given in the Sea Org without the C/S permission and this applies to Scientology staff as well. Those undergoing intensive processing also are subject to this policy. So the Medical Officer acts as the "middleman" so to speak between the C/S and 300 medical specialist and is the one responsible for the medical progress of those on his lines. In clinics and hospitals where the practice of Scientology and Dianetics is correlated with the practice of medicine the liaison is the Qual Medical Officer. Those programmed for medical tests and treatments are started on one because: 1. The C/S has ordered it based on no or slow processing gains or as a general precautionary measure. 2. The Medical Officer orders it based on a continued observation of ill health in a staff member. A Dianetically trained medical doctor may also refer a patient to an organization's Medical Officer so that liaison records are maintained and the C/S and medical doctor know what is occurring with the preclear. It has been the experience of the Medical Officer on Flag who was conducting programmes from port to port that in some countries a GP who gives only a superficial exam such as the company yearly check-up or insurance check-up does not have a good record of locating what is wrong with the person. In some countries a person must be in an acute stage before he can be admitted to a hospital and be properly programmed and tested to find out what is wrong with him. Yet the hospital is the only place where adequate equipment and testing facilities exist to really properly diagnose a chronic illness. In such cases it pays to programme a testing series (such as blood, urine, X-Rays, EKG, basic metabolism tests, barium X-Ray as applies) first, and then send the patient, tests in hand to the doctor for blood pressure and general check-up and consultation, rather than waste a trip to a GP to find out a person whom you know is ill has nothing Wrong with him. Where tests involve admittance and observation, small hospitals or clinics may be found who will do it, where government ran hospitals are restricted to the acutely ill. Having to 8C in order to get a result should not be necessary in the medically advanced countries where proper tests are part of the routine. In using the technology of Dianetics and Scientology it sometimes occurs that the existence of a physically based illness shows up in processing. It is known that it is physical and that it must be diagnosed and cured or treatment is indicated. Such a person may have not been aware of it earlier due to the fact it was suppressed mentally or the person had to be raised up to pain on the tone scale and to an awareness of his physical body. In such cases earlier medical exams never revealed it. Some such cases are remarkable: Due to running an early life incident a time a piece of lead was stabbed into the forehead of a preclear was run, it had been there for twenty years. It was then removed as a source of chronic headaches. A preclear spots a slipped disc in session, a disease or an organ malfunctioning, etc. When taken for treatment tests or X-Rays reveal their presence. In such cases what is wrong is known so then one must guide the doctor to finding it. In cases where the doctor is not familiar with the technology of Dianetics this must be done with a great deal of tact. The reverse in relations between the technologies also occurs, and it's up to the Medical Officer to act when necessary in this instance. A person of higher case level sometimes will not respond to the normal amount of anaesthetics or pn killers and some kinds just do not work anymore. As getting a leg set without a pn killer is not advised, be sure the anaesthetic used has taken effect and is effective first. Usually with general anaesthetics; it takes more to produce a result, so local is advised. Response to treatment has been so speeded up, treatment no longer necessary can be continued past that point. E.g.-Treated fractures heal faster, infections respond faster, and internal disease, clears up much earlier in those cases being processed along with treatment. It is important the Medical Officer observes progress and handles this as the doctor may not be familiar at all with Dianetics. A fifteen day treatment usually produces a result on the 7th or 8th for example. 301 A course of medicine that is a curative treatment always works when processing is used. There are no exceptions in the Flag programmed cases. If it is a medically curable illness and the person was not cured the diagnosis was not correct. Retesting and examinations were done, the proper treatment given and then a cure resulted. Such cases are Permanently Cured and later on providing processing also occurred there will be no re-occurrence of the symptoms, The research cases on Flag where conditions both medical and processing were controlled (even to the extent of never giving the patient his medicine bottle but doling out his pills and seeing he takes them as called for), became well. There are thousands of cases which have become well when no medical cure has been possible, but this is already known and established Dianetic data. What is new here is that medicine itself is made to work as per its own technology with 100% results case after case. If patient "A" has disease "B" then treatment "C" for that disease, which should work, will work and it will work each time without exception. So much of a doctor's experience with failures, when he has known his tech was in and yet the patient did not respond is a thing of the past. The C/S who knows his tech and who has good data coming to him from the Medical Officer liaison can then know when to order a certain action done. As medical treatment and processing both affect the rate of response to the other, someone must be there in the middle observing by exact records and charts and tests the effects of both and that is the Medical Officer's job. And in case after case you will discover that the correct diagnosis and correct treatment backed with processing will just simply "blow away" the illness as the preclear having been properly indicated and looking at the right thing in session suddenly gets well. Sometimes just the correct diagnosis does it when the person is of a higher level of processingi.e. "So that's what it is!" and that's all brother-it's gone! On the other hand if the person has something wrong with his body and he knows it and it is mis-indicated (i.e. misdiagnosed or improperly treated or he is told nothing is wrong when there is), he can be held up in processing gains as there is a PTP, ARC Break and a misunderstood sitting there every session. How does one know the indication is correct? GIs or even VGIs will occur on the proper indication no matter what it is or how serious, and remain in under proper treatment and auditing-i.e. GIs and VGIs after each session. It is known-It is being handled - It is getting better-It is cured, brings and keeps in GIs. I The only other hang-up observed by a Medical Officer is considerations about not contributing while recovering, and not looking forward to recovery due to a return to something not wanted when recovered. These the Medical Officer must handle, if possible, as both slow recovery rates. I've not yet seen anyone not get well when both medical tech and Dianetic tech are in, in any case handled. CPO Mary Robinson Medical Specialist Flag Medical Officer for W/O Susan Pomeroy Flag D/4th Mate for Eris. Robin Lindsell Flag 4th Mate for LRH:RL:SP:MCR:rr.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1970 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 302 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I OCTOBER 1970 Remimeo C/S Hats Qual S * Sec Hats Medical Spec Chksht HDC Chksht C/S Chksht, Health Series No. 3 MO Hats MEDICAL OFFICER'S CODE The following Code is practised on the ships of the Sea Organization where prescribed medical treatment must be continued at sea. On the Flag Ship there is a fully operational clinic and a Medical Officer. It is presented here to provide a basis of operation for the Qualifications Medical Liaison Officer and may be of interest to the Dianetically trained Doctor. I . I promise not to evaluate the physical symptoms of those on medical lines but instead to listen and then provide whatever information or direction is needed to result in a physical improvement. 2. 1 promise not to invalidate the reality of those on medical lines as to the state of their physical bodies but to keep them producing and contributing to whatever extent they are realistically able. 3. 1 promise to administer only standard or proven medical treatment where indicated and not to deviate or experiment with unproven treatments or medications nor will I allow anyone else to do so. 4. 1 promise to keep all dental and medical appointments once made and to see that those who need to see a specialist or dentist see one. 5. 1 promise to see that those who are not getting proper food or rest do so, so that they become eligible for auditing. 6. 1 promise to see that the data needed to give proper care to those on medical lines is passed on or conveyed to whomever is giving it in my absence. 7. 1 promise never to sympathize with those on medical lines but to be effective. 8. 1 promise to complete all medical treatments started which are producing improvement in physical conditions and not to change the medication or treatment that is producing results for another. 9. 1 promise to refer anyone who by their actions are attempting to prevent a cure or recovery to the MAA and to advise the Case Supervisor. 10. 1 promise never to abandon or neglect those under my care. 11. 1 reserve the right to refuse care to anyone who does not follow the directions given them to make them well or who repeatedly fails to keep appointments involving a medical series which must be given as scheduled to be effective. 12. 1 promise never to criticize or become angry with those on medical lines. 13. 1 promise never to provide a pain killer to anyone I feel would respond to an assist given by myself or another promptly. 14. 1 promise not to continue a treatment past the point it is no longer needed or no longer effective. 15. 1 promise to grant beingness to those on medical lines. 16, 1 promise to provide a safe, clean and comfortable environment for the unwell. 303 17. 1 promise to indicate to those on my lines which medications and treatments are curative ones and which are only intended to alleviate symptoms until they are Dianetically cured. 18. 1 promise not to enter comments, expressions or enturbulence into the environment of those on medical lines that would cause mystery, misunderstoods or fear of worsening. 19. 1 promise to encourage those on my lines who are responding well to be as causative and knowledgeable about their physical condition as is possible and never to present medicine as anything more than a technology that can be studied and learned by anyone of interest and ability. 20. 1 promise not to explain, justify or make excuses for any clinical mistake whether real or imagined but to correct it immediately. 21. 1 promise to estimate the current state of those on medical lines with reality and not to diverge due to other determined influence or false or alarming reports. 22. 1 promise to follow all standard CIS instructions exactly and to obtain CIS permission before permitting the administration of any narcotic or drug rendering a pc ineligible for auditing. 23. 1 promise to see that all dentists and medical specialists used to treat a preclear are competent in their skill and to base my decision on results only. 24. 1 promise to maintain high health standards in the environment and to see those I am responsible for are protected from the influence of poor health or safety standards. 25. 1 promise to use my knowledge of Dianctics and Scientology in all that I do. 26.. 1 promise to keep excellent records and data on those on my lines and to keep the CIS advised. 27. 1 promise to prevent extreme health conditions from occurring by seeing that preventative or early care is given on time. 28. 1 promise to ensure anyone medically cured or under treatment receives processing as this alone ensures the cure remains a permanent one and shortens the time required for treatment. CPO Mary Robinson Medical Specialist Flag Medical Officer for W/O Susan Pomeroy Flag D/4th Mate for Ens. Robin Lindsell Flag 4th Mate for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:RL:SP:MR:sb.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 304 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 10 NOVEMBER 1965 Remimeo Students Qual Div THE CRAMMING SECTION The Cramming Section is a section of the Department of Review (Div 5-Dept 14). PURPOSE: HCO Pol Ltr 31 July 1965 "Purposes of the Qualifications Division" states: "The prime purpose of the Department of Review and all its sections and units is: "TO HELP RON CORRECT ANY NON-OPTIMUM RESULT OF THE ORGANIZATION AND ALSO TO ADVISE WAYS AND MEANS BASED ON ACTUAL EXPERIENCE IN THE DEPARTMENT TO SAFEGUARD AGAINST ANY CONTINUED POOR RESULT FROM ANY TECHNICAL PERSONNEL OR THE FUNCTION OF THE ORGANIZATION." More specifically, "The Cramming Section teaches students what they have missed" (HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965 Review). WHO IS SENT TO CRAMMING? HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965 "Review" states: "Any student failing to get 5 or more passes (usual expected number is 10 passes per week on the Saint Hill Course) in two weeks, theory and practical check sheets inclusive, must be ordered by the (c) of T to the Review Cramming Section." HCO Pol Ltr 14 Sept 65 "Classification Required before Moving to Next Level" states: "If a student flunks his classification written exam or the examination of his auditing via his auditing reports, the student is to review his theory, then his practical, as well as submit further auditing evidence (auditor's reports) before re-examination... "The student is expected to complete the theory checksheet for each level in two weeks. He is expected to complete the Practical checksheet for each level in two weeks. Any student failing to do this has a down statistic and is to be sent to Cramming. Any student who flunks an examination is sent to Cramming. Any student who fails to have the auditing requirement done by the time his practical checksheet is done (and thus must review the entire level) is sent to Cramming." HCO Pol Ltr 14 October 1965 "Course Pattern" states: "If the examination is not passed, the student remains in the Qualifications Division in the Cramming Section at a charge of L2 per day until he is able to pass an Exam on the Level." REVIEW AND ETHICS: HCO Pol Ltr 29 April 1965 Issue II states: "A student who is disruptive of discipline and acts contrary to the Ethics Codes may not be ordered to Review by the (c) of P, (c) of T or Ethics personnel or other persons in an org. "Tech and Qualifications personnel, particularly the Tech See and Qual Sec and (c) of Tech Services, the (c) of P and (c) of T, (c) of Exams and (c) of Review and (c) of Certs may order students or pcs, to Review or to course or to HGC or anywhere in and around these two Divisions without any Ethics action being implied. It is just normal, done to get students and pcs on the road to higher levels." HCO Pol Ltr 28 April 1965 Issue III states: "No (c) of P or Course Supervisor or Academy Instructor may threaten a student who is disruptive of course discipline with Review auditing or training. Such students may only be ordered to Ethics." 305 TWIN CHECKING: When a student is sent to Cramming, his twin is temporarily borrowed from course to see that the student goes through his requirements in so far as theory and practical review are concerned. The twin is then sent back to course to complete his level as he did not come to cramming for flunked examination or down statistics. If it appears, however, that the twin is directly responsible for the student having flunked and needs some review of his coaching ability and/or theory and practical, the twin may be kept in cramming for the completion of the level. Whenever a student is sent to cramming directly from course (i.e. for down statistics, failure to produce auditing requirements by the time his practical is complete or specific point to be handled, he should be routed (via Qual Interview and Invoice) with a slip clearly specifying the reason for his being sent to Review. SUMMARY: The Cramming Section teaches the students what they have missed. It trains them only to a specific result. The orders, rules, regulations, policies and routes relating to this department (Review) (and therefore the Cramming Section) were intended to assist and expedite the carrying out of its purpose. Therefore no order, rule, regulation, policy or route may be used to swerve it from its prime purpose of ensuring that the results of Scientology are excellent and consistent. LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 OCTOBER 1966 Remimeo Qual Hats Training Hats Students CRAMMING STUDENTS WHO FLUNK CLASSIFICATION FOR A LEVEL After reviewing the theory and practical of a level, a student who flunked his Classification for a level may request permission to do the Dissemination Drill, if he or she has not acquired a preclear. When the student has done well on the Dissemination Drill, he or she may request permission to go and use the Dissemination Drill in the area with the purpose of obtaining a preclear to audit in order to classify at the flunked level. The Cramming Officer will expect the student to report at 9.30 the next morning with a written report on where the dissemination took place and the results of the dissemination. The purpose of Cramming is to get the students flowing through the Course fast, so the emphasis here is simply to get a preclear fast and classify fast, bearing in mind "The rapidity of particle flow alone determines power." L. RON HUBBARD LRH:lb-r.cden.rd Founder Copyright g 1966 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 306 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 MAY 1969 Remimeo Franchise CRAMMING SECTION - SERVICE TO TRAINED AUDITORS The Cramming Section 'teaches students what they have missed'. This includes Trained Auditors who wish to be brought up to date on current technical developments. A Field or Franchise Auditor wishing to up-date his technical data may do so in the Cramming Section of any Org qualified to teach his level of Training. The Director of Exams may determine that the Auditor is missing too much data, such as a whole course, to handle in Cramming and route the Auditor to the Tech Division for retraining. Cramming does not teach full Dianetic, Academy or SHSBC courses. The line of keeping Tech in the area up -to date and standard is indeed a Qual hat. It is also a source of steady Qual income. "New" courses are of course taught in Tech. Rodger Wright - Chairman Ad Council WW Jim Keely - Qual See WW Bruce Glushakow - HCO Area See WW AD COUNCIL WW Edie Hoyseth - HCO Exec See WW Allan Ferguson - Org Exec See WW Tom Morgan - Public Exec See WW Rodger Wright - LRH Comm WW Leif Windle - Policy Review Section WW LRH:RW.ei.rd Jane Kember - The Guardian WW Copyright G 1969 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 307 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 AUGUST 1959 CenO B.SCN INTERNESHIPS Jack Parkhouse in a despatch to L. Ron Hubbard suggests that the B.Sen Interneship be restarted. Here is what Jack says: "We would very much like to re-start B.Scn Interneships again-this system, apart from turning out better auditors helps a great deal in declaring larger units. "We're aware of the shortcomings of the old method and would like to propose this one: I . Only good HPA students be accepted for an Interneship. 2. An Interne is not paid and makes no payment. 3. Whether he is a part-time or full time Interne he shall audit not less than 500 hours for the HGC plus attending all conferences and training periods. 4. If the Interne flubs cases we dispense with him no further liability to ourselves and no future benefits to the Interne. 5. At the completion of a satisfactory Interneship the student is ready and should be put on a regular B.Sen Course at a purely nominal charge-say 10 gns. "It costs us little to have a couple of extra students on a course already set up-but those students will be able to use a B.Scn and we will have had a great deal of really economical labour from them." Peter Hemery HCO Communicator WW PH:brb.rd Copyright (c) 1959 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 308 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 MAY 1962 CenOCon INTERNE HAT WHAT IS EXPECTED OF INTERNES I . That they make such changes in themselves as may be necessary to deserve respect as Professional Scientologists. 2. That they become familiar with the administration of the Organization according to Ron's policies. 3. That they learn, by experience, how the various Departments function with particular reference to the inter-relationship of functions. 4. That they satisfy the following Posts that they have indeed made such progress: the 6 Department Heads, the Organization Secretary (or Assoc Sec), the HCO, the Interne Administrator, and finally, the HCO Board of Review. 5. That they thoroughly understand the Org Board and the OIC Board, and their place in the running of a Central Organization. 1~ 6. That they become acquainted with Department Heads and what their various responsibilities are. 7. That they conduct themselves in a quiet, courteous manner when being observed and listened-to in Reception by the Public and Preclears. 8. That while on Post they are to be dressed neatly and cleanly to meet Public acceptance level. 9. That under no circumstances are they to try to wear the Registrar's Hat, or any other hat than their own, or to interrupt conversations Registrar is having with a Prospect. 10. That the cleanliness of the various buildings is also their responsibility. 11. That learning the functions of Letter Registrar and Central Files is an integral part of their training as Professional Scientologists. 12. That they become familiar with HCO Policy Letter of Nov 15, 1960 "Modern Procurement Letters". 13. That to the best of their ability they live up to the Code of a Scientologist, and, when auditing, the Auditor's Code. 14. That they understand "Dev-T" and its consequences, and be familiar with the Bulletins concerning it, and apply them. 15. That they handle all problems with Scientology. 16. That they keep their withholds cleaned up. 17. That they keep their Technical ability up. 18. That IF IT ISN'T IN WRITING IT ISN'T SO. 309 19. That they learn the three basket system, the Comm Center system, and the proper routing of dispatches. 20. That they learn proper phone procedure. 21. That they learn by observing and doing to communicate to the general public, the Postman, tradesmen, and salesmen as well as Students and Preclears, both in person and on the phone. 22. That they learn by asking questions, writing dispatches, and getting them answered that there are no "secrets" in the Central Org, with the exception of Preclear test and Prepcheck files. 23. THAT THEY DECIDE TO BE PROFESSIONAL SCIENTOLOGISTS. INTERNE CHECK OUT LIST I . Pattern of a Central Org, HCO Policy Letter of February 14, 1961. 2. How to Handle Work, HCO Bulletin of August 19, 1959. 3. How to do a Staff Job, HCO Policy Letter of April 11, 196 1. 4. Scientology Org Comm System, HCO Admin Letter of October 17, 1961. Learn in essence. 5. Org Rudiments, HCO Policy Letter of December 11, 1961. Learn first sentence verbatim, Rudiments I through VII in essence, 6. Types of Letters Established, HCO Policy Letter of February 4, 1961. Learn the rules governing mimeoing, including the color scheme. 7. Help Me Put In The New Lines, HCO Policy Letter of January 10, 196 1. 8. Org Sec Hat, See ED No. 324 of LA, February 19, 1960. 9. Outflow, See ED No. 276 of LA, July 7, 1959. 10. Quality and Admin in Central Orgs, HCO Policy Letter of May 29, 196 1. 11. Classes of Auditors, HCO Policy Letter of November 29, 196 1. 12. City Offices, HCO Policy Letter of May 11, 196 1. Issued by: Ken Salmen HCO Area See LA for L. RON HUBBARD Executive Director LRH.jw.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 310 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JUNE 1962 CenOCon STAFF AND INTERNE AUDITORS Interneship has been offered to graduating HPA and HCA students for a 3 months period of work in the Central Organization. This has been a requirement for certification. In actual practice, some orgs because of low units and other reasons do not hang on to professional staff Auditors but replace them with Internes. It has always expressly been forbidden to use non certified staff auditors on HGC pcs. Unless an Auditor has his certificate in his possession he or she cannot be used to Audit HGC pcs. We are now operating with the fact of clearing all cases if the Auditor is well trained. We are now moving toward clearing as an ordinary result of being audited in an HGC. This fact can never take place if staff Auditor procurement looks only toward the Academy and Internes. Such a programme is technical suicide. Further HGC results have been falling off to the degree that routine procedures are not expressly followed and uncertified Auditors have been used in HGC. There is something wrong with an org that cannot keep its staff auditors. Their own reality on results must be poor, their working conditions bad and their future uncertain if staff Auditors are continually lost by an organization. An organization must follow this programme on staff Auditors: I . See that they get adequate auditing toward clear along with other staff auditing; 2. Use only certified Auditors on HGC and staff pcs; 3. Work toward a staff Auditor having his own personal office with desk and proper furnishings; 4. Keep excess admin personnel to a minimum to keep units up; 5. Pay no interne fee or units and use no internes in the HGC; 6. Give staff Auditors good current training; 7. Prepare Auditors for posts on staff by using them only as supernumerary personnel in Admin or the Academy to help instructor's Admin or coaching individual students; 8. Take on an interne only if the person is willing to become a staff Auditor and then fit that person to be one before auditing is done by that person in the HGC; 9. Take Interneship only as free advanced training conditional to taking a position on staff, not as a quick method of getting staff auditors; 10. Get over the games condition with field Auditors and get them back on staff; 11. Settle the org down as to personnel turnover; 12. Get income up by getting technical up. Do not have even one poorly trained student or non-gain HGC pc walk out of the org. The Interne programme except as above, is hereby cancelled in its other aspects. No Interne may be paid units for being an Interne. No staff auditor may be employed unless actually certified. A ninety day period of grace from the date of this policy letter is allowed to get the whole of this into effect and not go back on interneship arrangements made before this date. Act now to have this programme in before ninety days. LRH:dr.cden L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 311 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF I I SEPTEMBER 1967 General Non-Remimeo SHSBC Students Internes Class VII SH Tech & Qual Personnel RAP, Registration & Hats Personnel INTERNE TRAINING PROGRAMME This Policy clarifies the lines of the Interne Training Programme. The necessity for this Policy grew out of a recent Comm Ev on Internes and a Board of Investigation on the Interne Programme. NOMINATION OF INTERNES We need a large supply of Qualified Class VII Auditors throughout the world. To help build the number of Class VII Internes the following procedure is to be followed. When a student arrives at Saint Hill to do the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course, he/she will be informed on Registering that on the basis of course statistics and leadership potential he/she may be nominated for the Class VII Interne Course. This is a privilege and the nomination is not binding either way, but depends on the person making excellent progress as a student. After enough time has gone by to see how the student's progress has been, he or she may be nominated by the (c) of T and the (c) of P who form a nominating committee and the appropriate terminals are notified (i.e. student's local org, Ad Council WW, Treasury Div SH, Personnel Procurement Officer SH) so that steps can be taken early to complete arrangements for the student to interne immediately upon completion of the SHSBC, if the student continues to maintain an excellent record. INTERNE TRAINING REQUIREMENTS The following are the requirements for starting the Class VII Interne Course. 1. Complete Staff Status II checksheet and pass Staff Status 11 exam. If not completed before coming to Saint Hill, this can be done after nomination with the Staff Training Officer SH. 2. Class VI (provisional) with an excellent record on the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course, completing the course in less than 32 weeks of training time. 3. Signed a contract with an official Scientology Org for a minimum of 2 1/2 years of service to that org to begin on completion of the Interne Course. 4. Proper financial arrangements completed for payment of Course fees. Following are the only requirements to complete the course: I . Star-Rate checkouts on Level VII Confidential materials and theory checksheet as approved by Org Exec Sec WW, and Star-Rate checkouts on lower level processes and their immediate technology as required by HCO Policy Letter of March 8, 1966, "Urgent-High Crime". 2. Audit the Power Processes in the Saint Hill HGC until such time as the student has completed successfully three Power Process preclears to Grade VA, consecutively and without flaw, having audited each pc from the beginning of the Power Intensive directly through V and VA without a goof or REVIEW ACTION. 312 If Ethics action is needed in order to handle some outness with the pc this will not count against the student Interne's auditing requirement provided the Interne is the one recommending the Ethics action. Completing a case that someone else started is credited to training and experience and does not count for these Auditing requirements in the Saint Hill HGC. When the student has completed the three consecutive cases in the HGC, he will be routed to the Examiner in Qual who will give him/her a written Examination consisting of questions directly relating to the auditing of the Power Processes. The passing of this exam is 85% as per Policy and graduates the Interne from this Section of Training. There is NO other requirement for this section. The Exams must have the approval of the D.O. Qual WW. 3. The Interne is then required to audit in the Dept of Review. It will be required to complete in Review 80 Review cases, of which 6, at least, must be Power Process cases and each of the 80 cases must be flawlessly handled. Flawless means the pc has paid cash in full for the auditing. When this is done the Interne will be routed to the Qual Examiner to take a written Exam. The passing of this exam graduates the Interne from this Section of Training. There is no other requirement here. The exam must be approved by the D.O. Qual WW. This exam will be based on the fact that an Interne on reaching this stage is flawless on all lower grade auditing including Rehabilitation Technology, Assessing, S and (c) Technology and See Checking as a security action. For each Interne the Qual See is to observe in the flawless handling of the 80 cases the Ratio of Cash/Debit for Review Auditing. 4. During the period served in the HGC and/or Department of Review, the student must have completed a minimum of 20 Security Checks for HCO, done without error. 5. The next step is a period with the Case Supervisor learning that post. When the Interne has supervised 6 Power Process cases flawlessly, the Interne is routed to Qual Examiner, to take an exam on Case Supervision as approved by D.O. Qual WW. On passing this exam the Interne completes this section, there is NO other requirement. The passing of the Exam graduates the Interne from this Section of Training. 6. At this stage the Interne graduates from Part I of the Course, and then goes full time on the completion of the Org Exec Course, which has a separate checksheet. The Internship is divided into two parts 1. Technology. Theory, Practical and Auditing which when completed graduates the Interne with Prov Class VII. 2. Administration. The Org Exec Training Course to be done after Part I. An Interne is permitted while fulfilling the Technology parts of the checksheet to do whatever he/she can do on the Org Exec Course Checksheet but may not go full time on this part of the checksheet until completing the Technology part. Upon completing both parts, the Interne receives a Class VII Certificate (provisional if not Clear). INTERNE CONTRACT REGULATIONS An Interne's contract with his org is a binding agreement between the two parties. The org provides advanced training to the Interne in return for the SERVICE of the Interne AFTER he or she is trained. A trained staff member is much more valuable than an untrained one and the org spends a huge amount of money to see that an Interne is trained properly. 313 The only way an org can justify spending this money is that after the Interne is trained and returns, the org will benefit because of the bettered service that can be provided with a new, highly trained staff member on post serving over a period of years. In order to "buy out" his or her contract with the org, it would cost the Interne many, many thousands of dollars or pounds, in fact as much money and goodwill as the org would expect to receive because of the Class VII's service over a period of 2 1/2 years minimum. After signing a contract with an org, if the Interne wants to change plans, he or she must first get a full release from the contracted org. It is fully the responsibility of the individual Interne to make arrangements that are wholly satisfactory with the contracted org. The contracted org has full power in law and, more important, in Scientology Ethics to hold an Interne or any contracted staff member to fulfill his or her contract. The org may get any requirements it likes for release of contracts. It is primarily for the benefit of the org and not for the benefit of the individual that the Interne is being trained. After all, without the org, the individual would never receive the training in the first place. No org may even consider a contracted staff member of another org for employment unless he or she has been fully released by the contracted org FIRST. Nor may any other org or org staff member enter into negotiations between a staff member and his or her contracted org. The only exception is the promotion of a contracted staff member to a Continental or WW Executive Division post, but in this case the contracted org receives the benefit of this staff member's service from higher up and the contracted org may receive some compensation for the loss of the staff member from its direct staff. ORG CLAUSE-If another official Org than Saint Hill contracts with a Class VII ex-Interne Saint Hill Staff Member the org may reimburse Saint Hill its course fee and have the student at the end of one year of service as a full staff member at Saint Hill, the staff member consenting. Note that one year must be served at Saint Hill and two and a half years with the Org. Orgs may of course make their own arrangements with their own staffs for Class VII training at the Org's expense. This may also be done at the staff member's own expense if contracted to an Org for 21/2 years after Class VII and Internship Graduation, NOT OPEN TO PUBLIC-The Class VII Course, unlike the Class VI Course, is not open to enrollment to non-org personnel. FURTHER REGULATIONS OF INTERNE TRAINING It is not permitted to interfere with the training of any student while on the Internship. This means that an Interne, whether from Saint Hill or any other Org, may not be transferred to any other post in SH or any other Organization without the holding of a Special Board of Investigation to be applied for by the HCO Area See of Saint Hill, convened by the HCO Exec See SH and to consist of 3 members chosen from the staff of World Wide Div 7. The findings of this B of I will make recommendations to the HOD Exec See SH who will be responsible to and only to his/her normal Organizational Seniors for her decisions in the matter. The Internship is set up to train students to audit the Power Processes and not to establish an HGC for Saint Hill. The HGC is entirely separate from the Internship but has the use of the Internes for specific periods of the day to run Power Processes and where necessary audit prior to Power Process auditing, as part of the Interne Training programme. The Class VII Interne Course is the highest level of Scientology training available 314 at this time. A Hubbard Graduate Auditor is able to audit any and all processes and procedures used today and to crack any and all cases without fail. An Interne is a student and not a staff member until he or she has successfully completed the course. Then he or she is a most valuable staff member and therefore one of the most valuable beings in the Universe. The Class VII Interne Course must concentrate on Training the Interne to this high level quickly and effectively. It is only after the Interne graduates from both parts of the course that he/she becomes fully useful to the org. Because we must train a Class VII to audit Grade V, this is the only place where a real bottleneck could develop in the Route to Total Freedom. Therefore HCO must be extra alert to remedy any hold-ups and protect this course from undermining by SPs. Now, a Class VII will also be trained as an outstanding Scientology Executive. With a full knowledge and ability in Admin as well as Tech, this is the being we are now producing to lead our orgs to clear the planet. This one job done effectively may be the difference between success and failure in our goal, so let's do it well and do it quickly. Org Exec See WW - Fred Hare Exec Council WW - Fred Hare Joan McNocher Mary Sue Hubbard LRH:jp.rd The Guardian WW Copyright (c) 1967 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 AUGUST 1968 (Issued from Flag Order 1265) Remimeo SEA ORGANIZATION SEA ORG INTERNES Any Class VI who wishes to do so may interne for the Sea Org. The requirements are the same as for any other Sea Org applicant. A Sea Org Interne undergoes a brief period of deck and Seamanship training prior to beginning Class VII. From Class VII he may go on to Class VIII in the Sea Org and eventually become a Tech Missionaire. The contract is for One Billion Years. Technically trained Sea Org personnel are vitally needed and are granted special insignia, etc., once their Basic Seamanship is complete. LRH:NJ:tvd.js.rd W/O Nate Jessup Copyright (c) 1968 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 315 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 NOVEMBER 1969 BPI Auditors INTERNESHIPS AND CASE SUPERVISORS Due to the necessity for skilled case supervision in all orgs, franchises and groups, the following Interneships are established in Central Orgs, Saint Hill Orgs and Advanced Orgs. CLASS VIII C/S INTERNESHIP Requires an interneship in an Advanced Org after completion of the Class VIII Course for a period of at least another six weeks. During this time they do a daily training period, learn and do high level auditing, study Case Supervision under an expert Class VIII Case Supervisor, do actual Case Supervision and on successful completion are granted their full Class VIII. No contract required. S500 to individuals, S250 to contracted staff members of other orgs. (Prerequisite: HDG and Provisional Class VIII.) CLASS VII C/S INTERNESHIP Requires an Interneship in a Saint Hill org for a period of at least six weeks. Studies and does Power processing, studies and does Review Auditing, does the Org Exec Course. Studies and does the C/Sing of Power and Review Auditing. A Class VII who then studies Class VIII Interneships (or does a Class VII Interneship after a Class VIII Interneship) becomes a POWER CLASS VIII. No contract required. S500 to individuals, S250 for Class VI auditors contracted to orgs. (Prerequisite: HDG and Provisional Class VI.) CLASS V INTERNESHIP Requires an Interneship at a Central Organization under a Class VIII auditor for a period of at least six weeks. Learns to audit Triple Scientology grades, to do lower level Review Auditing, Class 0, 1, 11, 111 and IV Case Supervision and the setting up of a case for triples with expert rudiment and Green Form handling. If also a Dianetic Case Supervisor he obtains his full Class V on completion. Learns Tech and Qual Tech Services and Admin. No contract required. S250 for individuals, $125 for org contracted staff members. (Prerequisite: HDG and Class IV Auditor and Grade IV Release.) DIANETIC INTERNESHIP Requires an Interneship at any official Scientology org which teaches HDG. Interning for a period of at least 4 weeks. Studies and practices triple flow Dianetic Auditing. Studies and learns to Case Supervise Dianetic sessions. Learns the handling and direction of other auditors. Studies Staff Status 11 to become familiar with general Administration. $125 for individuals. S75 for staff contracted to an official Scientology org. (Prerequisite: HDG.) HDG Requires taking the Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Course. Qualifies a person to teach the Hubbard Dianetic Counselor Course in orgs, Franchises or groups and obtain certificates for his students from an official org. Cost: According to existing prices. (Prerequisite: HDC with an excellent record of auditing.) NOTE: All these Interneships are taught in the Qualifications Division of the org except HDG. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ei.rd Founder Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard (Note: Per HCO PL 18 April 1970, Issue II, in the prerequisite ALL RIGHTS RESERVED for Class VII Interneship "HDC" had been corrected to "HDG".) 316 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JULY 1970 Remimeo (Amends HCO P/L 13 Nov 1969 by adding Class 0, 1, BPI Auditors 11, 111, IV and VI CS Internships and HCO P/L 18 Apr 1970 Iss 11 which corrects HCO P/L 13 Nov 1969) INTERNSHIPS AND CASE SUPERVISORS Due to the necessity for skilled Case Supervision in all orgs, franchises and groups, the following Internships are established in Advanced Orgs, Saint Hills and Class IV Orgs respectively. CLASS VIII CS INTERNSHIP Class VIII CS-Requires an Internship in an Advanced Org after completion of the Class VIII Course for a period of at least another six weeks. During this time the Interns do the Class VIII CS Internship Checksheet. On completion of the checksheet the Interns do a daily training period, learn and do high level auditing, study Case Supervision under an expert Class VIII. Case Supervisors do actual Case Supervision and on successful completion are granted a Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech Certificate. No Contract required. (Prerequisite: HDG and Class VIII.) CLASS VII CS INTERNSHIP Requires an Internship in a Saint Hill Org for a period of at least six weeks. Studies and does Power Processing and audits Dianetics, Progress and Advance Programs and Expanded Lower Grades. Completes or does the Org Exec Course. Studies and does the CSing of Power, Dianetics, Progress and Advance Programs and Expanded Lower Grades. No contract required. (Prerequisite: HDG and Provisional Class VI.) CLASS VI CS INTERNSHIP Requires an Internship in a Saint Hill Org for a period of at least four weeks. Studies Progress and Advance Programs. Audits all Class VI actions including Expanded Lower Grades in the HGC and as a Review Auditor. Studies and does the CSing of Progress and Advance Programs and Expanded Lower Grades. This Internship consolidates SHSBC training through practical application under a Class VIII. No contract required. (Prerequisite: Provisional Class VI.) CLASS V CS INTERNSHIP Requires an Internship in a Saint Hill Org for a period of at least two weeks. Studies and does CSing of Progress and Advance Programs and Class V actions under Class VIII supervision. This Internship may be awarded if the Class V CS Checksheet is done well. No contract required. (Prerequisite: Class V Expanded Release.) CLASS 0, 1, 11, 111 or IV CS INTERNSHIPS Requires an Internship at a Central Organization for a period of at least two 317 weeks for each level. Studies and does CSing of actions applicable to the Classification attained. Learns Tech and Qual Services and Admin. These internships may be awarded if the applicable Class 0, 1, 11, 111 or IV Checksheets are done well. No contract required. (Prerequisites: Class 0 Grade 0 for Class 0 CS Internship Class I Grade I for Class I CS Internship Class 11 Grade 11 for Class 11 CS Internship Class III Grade III for Class III CS Internship Class IV Grade IV for Class IV CS Internship) HDC CS INTERNSHIP Requires an Internship at any official Scientology Org which teaches HDG; Interning for a period of at least four weeks. Studies and practises Dianetic Auditing. Studies and learns to Case Supervise Dianetic sessions. Learns the handling and direction of other auditors. Studies Staff Status 11 to become familiar with general Administration. (Prerequisite: HDC with an excellent record of auditing.) HDG Requires taking the Hubbard Dianetic Graduate Course. Qualifies a person to teach the Hubbard Dianetic Counselor Course in orgs, franchises or groups and obtain certificates for his students from an official org. According to existing prices. (Prerequisite: HDC with an excellent record of auditing.) NOTE: All these Internships are taught in the Correction Division of the org, except HDG. INTERNSHIP PRICES US, EUROPE, DK, AFRICA UK, ANZO CLASS VIII C/S INTERNSHIP $500 L200 CLASS VII C/S INTERNSHIP $500 f 200 CLASS VI C/S INTERNSHIP $250 f 100 CLASS V C/S INTERNSHIP S125 f50 CLASS 0 - IV INTERNSHIPS (per level) S50 L20 CLASS 0 - IV C/S INTERNSHIPS (package rate for all 5 level Internships) S200 f80 HDC C/S INTERNSHIP $125 E50 DISCOUNTS All Internships offer 50% discount to contracted staff of official Scientology orgs. D/CS-5 for LRH:JF:rr.aap L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1970 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Amended by HCO P/L 6 November 1971 Issue II, Selling Internships, page 325.1 318 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JULY 1970 Issue 11 Remimeo HUBBARD SCIENTIST OF STANDARD TECH Cancellation of conflicting HCO Policy Letters A HUBBARD SCIENTIST OF STANDARD TECH is a graduate of the Class VIII Case Supervisor Internship. The HSST checksheet is issued as a Confidential HCO Policy Letter which contains all the requirements for the Class VIII CS Internship. The following conflicting HCO Policy Letters are cancelled: HCO Policy Letter of 6 December, 1969 Issue III "The Case Supervisor Checksheet" which gave training requirements which are now revised as in HCO Policy Letter 22 July, 1.970 "Confidential Class VIII Case Supervision Internship Checksheet (Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech)". HCO Policy Letter of 6 December, 1969 Issue IV "Confidential -The Science of Case Supervision Standard Tech" which has been revised and issued as HCO Policy Letter 22 July, 1970 "Confidential Class VIII Case Supervision Internship Checksheet (Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech)". HCO Policy Letter of 9 December, 1969 Issue III "Class VIII Retread" which gave training requirements, now improved by HCO Policy Letter 22 July, 1970 "Confidential Class VIII Case Supervision Internship Checkshect (Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech)" which replaces it. Policy on Retreads is contained in HCO Policy Letter 22 July, 1970 Issue III "Tech Retreads and Retraining". D/CS-5 for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JF:rr.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 319 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 FEBRUARY 1971 Issue 11 BPI Remimeo Qual Hats Tech Hats Registrar Hats Treasury Hats CLASS VII Following the development of Class IX and Class X technology aboard Flag, the sequence of techniques for the upper levels of training has been established. As each class, from ARC Straightwire, through Dianetics, Class 0 and up through Class VII to Class X addresses a specific area of the Human Mind and of man's awareness, each Class must remain distinct and separate in the training and application of its techniques. For this reason, the Class VII Internship, level of the precision Power Processes, may not be by-passed as a level of training. Additionally, the Power Processes, now more dynamic by expansion, may not be taught as part of the Class VIII Course. Each of these levels has its own distinct techniques and so must be separately trained. Following are the prerequisites for Class VII and above: 1. Class VII Internship: Taught at Saint Hills only in Division V, Dept 13. Prerequisites: Class VI, HDG. a. The Power Processes of Class VII may be sold and run on Public Preclears at Saint Hills only and by Class VII Interns or Class VII graduates (who may also have a higher classification). b. The Power Processes of Class VII may be run on qualified contracted Org staff by contracted staff members who are full Class VII's only and not by Class VIII's who have not done the Class VII Internship at a Saint Hill. C. The Class VII Internship may be taken by contracted org and Sea Org staff members. (c) The Class VII Internship may be taken by non contracted to staff Scientologists but only as follows: L As a prerequisite to the Class VIII Course. 2. As a prerequisite to the Class IX Course by those Class VIII's already graduated or those enrolled on the Class VIII Course prior to the date of this policy letter. e. The Power Processes may not be run by any person regardless of Classification who is not a contracted org staff or Sea Org staff member except while doing the Class VII Internship or additional graduate auditing for Class VII Honors at a Saint Hill. f. The Power Processes may not be run by any contracted org or Sea Org staff member regardless of classification who is not enrolled on or graduated from the Class VII Internship. 320 Il. Class VIII Course: Taught at Advanced Organizations only in Division IV. Prerequisites: Class VI, Class VII, HDG. 111. Class IX Course: Taught at Advanced Organizations only in Division IV. Prerequisites: Class VII, Class VIII, HDG. IV. Class X Course: Will be taught at Advanced Organizations only in Division IV. Prerequisites: Class VII, Class VIII, Class IX, HDG. Note: All above courses are taught at Flag to contracted Sea Org members who qualify. The prerequisites as above apply. COURSE PRICES Class VII Internship f 320 8 775 Class VIII L 625 $1,500 Class IX L 625 $1,500 Class X f, 625 $1,500 Class VIII, IX, X package f 1660 $3,825 (A saving of f 275 or $675.) Class VII Internship special price for Class VIII's already graduated from or enrolled on the Class VIII Course prior to this date: ~C 165 S 385 (A saving of f 155 or $390.00.) DISCOUNTS The usual 5% discount for Advanced payments applies. A 50% discount applies for contracted staff of Scientology Organizations. Lt. Cmdr. Joan Robertson Training and Services Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JR:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 321 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH RED ON WHITE HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO BULLETIN OF 19 JULY 1971 Remimeo CIS Series 52 INTERNES The word INTERN or INTERNE means "An advanced graduate or a recent graduate in a professional field who is getting practical experience under the Supervision of an experienced worker". An Interneship then is serving a period as an Interne, or an activity offered by an org by which EXPERIENCE can be gained. Interneships have been arranged this long while for every auditing class. The apprenticeship of an auditor is done as an org Interne. C/Ses very often have Internes on their lines and sometimes have trouble with getting them to audit. The WHY of this is that the Interne seldom knows the definition of the word "Interne" (which is as above). They sometimes think they are still students. They do not know this fact: A COURSE GRADUATE BECOMES AN AUDITOR BY AUDITING. That means LOTS of auditing. The failure of "auditors" is that they go from one level to the next HDC to IV to VIII without ever becoming an auditor for that Class. Thus you can get a silly situation where a Class IX can't audit or C/S well. Thus you get tech going out. An HDC graduate who doesn't then audit under an experienced Case Supervisor who knows and demands the standard actions rarely gets to be an HDC AUDITOR. It takes tons of hours to make a real Dianetic auditor who can toss off standard sessions and get his routine miracles. So if an HDC doesn't INTERNE, but simply goes on to the Academy Courses or SHSBC he has skipped his apprenticeship as a Dianetic Auditor. If he gets his Class VI and never Internes but goes on to VIII - well, we now have somebody who has long since lost touch with the reality of why he is studying. Therefore you CAN'T take a Class VI graduate who was never a Dianetic Auditor and Interne him as a VI. He'll goof-goof-goof. So you have to Interne him as an HDC. WHEN he can turn out flawless Dianetic sessions on all kinds of pcs, you can Interne him as a IV etc. In other words you have to catch up all neglected Apprenticeships. I don't care if the guy is an VIII, if he wasn't ever a Dianetic Auditor and a Class VI Auditor and isn't Interning as an VIII then he is only a provisional. Flubby auditors are the biggest time wasters a C/S has. If auditors on his lines aren't good, he'll take forever to get his C/S work done. And he won't get results. The answer is, regardless of Class as a course graduate, a C/S MUST INTERNE HIS AUDITORS FOR EACH INTERNESHIP MISSED ON THE WAY UP. The "ok to audit" system is used. One takes any graduate and Internes him on the lowest Interneship he has missed. He reviews his material, gets his drills checked, gets his misunderstood words cleared 322 and gets an "ok to audit" for that level. If he goofs he is crammed. And sometimes wholly retreaded. The "ok to audit Dianetics" would be his first okay. This suspends if he has to retread. When he then has turned out pcs, pcs, pcs, pcs, 5, 6, 8, 10 hours a day for weeks and weeks and is a total success as a Dianetic Auditor, he can go on up. At first as a Dianetic Interne he is part time studying Dianetics. Then as he gets flawless and while he is getting experience and practice on Dianetics, he can gradually phase over into restudying his next Interneship, usually IV or VI. Then one day he is word cleared, checked out on his drills, and he qualifies for "ok to audit" for IV or VI. Now it begins all over again. Flubs-Cramming, midnight oil, audit audit cramming audit audit new word clear new drill work audit audit audit audit 5, 6, 8, 10 hours a day. . Now he is a IV or VI auditor. His next real step is a VI or VII Interne, at an SH. If he has been a good IV Interne Auditor his VI Interneship after his SHSBC will be a VII Interneship. VII is an Interne activity. When he's an Auditor that can do VI and Power, he is ready for VIII and IX. If he is going to be a good VIII-IX auditor he will Interne in an AO or SH under an experienced C/S. Now when he goes to his own org, you have a real honest to goodness C/S. And as a C/S he must know how you use Interneships to make auditors. Wherever this function is neglected, you don't get auditors. You get doubtful students and outtech. On Flag C/Ses have to catch up every missed Interneship to make a high volume high quality auditor. The world renowned Superiority of Flag Auditors is built just like I am telling you here. There is no reason just that same quality can't be built in any org. One does it by the Interne method. By using this method you get IN tech and high volume. Any auditor in any org that is limping and fumbling simply has never been properly Interned. The way to remedy it is to set up a good Cramming that uses only HCO Bs and has them available (and no verbal tradition), a Good Word Clearer and a Qual "okay to audit" Interne system. The Internes are a Section in Qual. They have a Course Supervisor. They study and audit cram audit cram study audit, audit audit audit. And one day you have IN tech and high volume high Class auditing all over the place. Otherwise you just have a bunch of students, in doubt, chewing on their misunderstood words and failed tech. There IS a right way to go about it. It is by Interneship. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:nt.rd Founder Copyright a 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 323 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 AUGUST 1971 Remimeo Tech Div Qual Sec INTERNE CHECKSHEETS OKAYS TO AUDIT (Refers to HCO P/L 6 August 1971 All Issues All Interne Checksheets) An OKAY TO AUDIT means two things. There are 2 "okays to audit". One is OKAY TO AUDIT AS AN INTERNE. This means one has done the checksheet to the satisfaction of the Interne Supervisor. One can now audit for Interne qualification. The other is OKAY TO AUDIT AS AN HGC AUDITOR. This means one has done the Interne checksheet, has audited flublessly to many program completions and is passed by the HGC CIS. Any certificate requires that the Interne meet both these requirements. These TWO okays to audit are required for any graduate certificate. There is a LOT of auditing between these two "okays to audit". Whether so expressed on the Checksheet or not the Case Supervisor for whom the auditor did his Interne Auditing MUST SIGN on the Supervisor Line above Examiner at the end of the checksheet, attesting that this Interne has achieved and maintained flubless auditing and has a permanent okay to audit in an HGC for that Class for which the Checksheet is done. "Supervisor" on that line must read "Case Supervisor". So there is an Interne Supervisor okay to audit for that class given on the checksheet. That says that he may audit now as an Interne. And then there is the Case Supervisor okay to audit for that class of the checksheet for the HGC as an HGC auditor. There are a lot of hours, and there can be a lot of Cramming, a lot of re-study between the first and second okays to audit. The checksheet is not complete until the Case Supervisor can attest that this is a Flubless Auditor, truly skilled and able on whom the Case Supervisor is glad to depend. Rome wasn't built in a day, no auditor ever became a flubless auditor in 3 sessions. The requirements of the Case Supervisor in making the auditor make auditing work may not be set aside or cancelled by any other person. The Case Supervisor has the final word on whether a certificate is issued, after how long and when. LRH:sb.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright ( (c) 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 324 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971 Remimeo Issue II Registrars Dir Income (Amends HCO PL 20 July 1970, Interne Supers "Internships and Case Supervisors") SELLING INTERNSHIPS 1. AUDITING INTERNSHIPS Internships are sold to graduates of Technical courses who want to get awarded Full Classification for their level of training. Internships are paid courses. The Interne does not get paid by the org where he is interning. There are no professional discounts on Internships. Contracted staff members of orgs who are interning at an AO or Saint Hill get the usual 50% discount. They are not however paid any wages or bonuses by the AO or Saint Hill. Living and travel expenses of the student are paid by the org to which he is contracted. Auditor Internship prices are: US - EU/AF UK/ANZO In area orgs Dianetics Internship $125. f 40. Class IV Internship $250. L100. At Saint Hills SHSBC Internship $375. L150. (Includes all oks to audit from Dianetics up to and including Class VI) Class VII Internship 9775. f 320. In Advanced Orgs Class VIII Internship $375. L150. Class IX Internship $375. f 150. Note that these prices are separate from and in addition to the Course price, with the exception of the Class VII where the Internship is the course. 2. CASE SUPER VISORIS INTERNSHIP The purpose of the C/S Internship is to train a student to become a specialist C/S. The C/S Internships are also paid courses and follow the same discount pattern arrangements as the Auditor Internships. Prices are: Dianetics C/S Internship $125. f 50, Class IV C/S Internship $250. L100. Class VI C/S Internship $375. f 150, Class VII C/S Internship 8375. f 150, Class VIII and IX C/S Internship (HSST) $500. L200. Registrars should be well aware of the benefits of these internships so that they can be sold in volume and with reality. They are a most rewarding activity both for the org and the Interne. Treasury Aide LRH:LQ:mes.rd for Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder 325 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971 Issue III Remimeo Qual Sees Interne Supers Registrars C&A INTERNESHIPS LINE-UP AUDITOR INTERNESHIPS All students graduating all technical courses are granted a Provisional Classification Certificate. Full Permanent Classification is awarded when the Graduate has completed a paid Interneship in an Org for that level. Internes train under the Interne Supervisor in Qual and do their daily auditing Intensives in the HGC. The (c) of P is their administrative senior while they are auditing in the HGC. After a period of volume auditing and needed correction, resulting in consistent well done auditing hours in the HGC, the Case Supervisor writes to the Interne Super advising that the Interne is now fully proficient in that level and is eligible for full Classification. The Auditor Interneships line-up is: HSDC Interneship Class 0 to IV Interneship Class VI Interneship (includes Interneships for Dianetics and O-IV) Class VII Interneship Class VIII Interneship Class IX Interneship Class X, XI and XII (when available). An Auditor Interneship is run like this: A. Prerequisite: Classification Cert for the Course. B. Do OK to Audit Checksheet and get OK to Audit. C~ Audit daily Intensives in the HGC, doing daily Cramming for any and all nonstandard actions, as directed by the C/S and the Cramming Officer. D. Do daily TRs, training drills and study under the Interne Super. E. Listen to Class XII tape recorded sessions of the same level then record own sessions and compare to the XII sessions. F. Continue auditing in the HGC, improving auditing standard, increasing number of hours on that level, until Case Supervisor issues a C/S HGC OK to Audit and sends to Interne Super. G. Interne Super puts student on Routing Form to route out of the Interneship for permanent Classification. H. Student is checked by PC Examiner for FN VGIs. (If no FN VGIs, student is returned to the Interneship and Cramming is used to find out what was missed, then back to Interneship to properly complete.) 326 1. Student Examiner gives a five question Dangerous Auditor type exam covering essential basics for the Classification and examines three folders audited by the Interne in the HGC for flubless auditing application at that level. J. Certs and Awards issues full Classification Certificate for that level. Do not confuse the standard public paid Interneship training line-up with the staff HGC Auditor OK to Audit system. This will result in no paid Interneships and consequent loss of legitimate income. Any Interne who is found to be a Dangerous Auditor, totally incompetent or who puts false reports about sessions into a pc folder, should be ordered to retrain the Course and routed off the Interneship and sent to the Registrar to sign up. They may return to complete the Interneship when the retrain has been completed at no extra charge if done within six months. Any Auditor sent to an AO or SH for an auditing Interneship is paid his wages by his org and the org pays for the Interneship at 50% discount, so long as the Interne has signed or renewed a 21/2 year contract from the date of completion of the course. HASes must insist that this is done before sending an Auditor for an Interneship. As stated in HCO Bulletin 28 April 71 "Okays to Audit in HGCs" it is a commendable for Franchises and Field Auditors to get Okays to Audit in their nearest org, and the above programme must be extended and offered to all Franchise and Field Auditors. Old HPA/HCAs should be encouraged to do Academy 0 to IV Retread at half price, then Interne full price to full Classification. The benefits of Interneship training: I . Auditor has all. auditing and C/Sing misapplications and misunderstoods cleaned up on that level, under daily supervision. (Internes C/S their own folders and then send to Org C/S who OK's or not.) 2. Auditor gets loads of auditing experience through the volume auditing produced on the Interneship. 3. Full org Cramming service. 4. Access to the Org Library. 5. Word Clearing facilities and utilization to the full. 6. Daily case supervision and training directions in auditing and case supervising by the Org Case Supervisor. 7. Personal attention by Interne Supervisor plus daily training and drilling, in addition to any Cramming actions done, to improve auditing techniques and Auditor presence. 8. Electronic aids-can listen to flubless Cl XII tapes for the level, record their own sessions and compare to the XII sessions. 9. The attainment of competent ability to audit at the level trained and full Classification for that level. LRH:JZ:nt.rd Qual Aide Copyright (c) 1971 for by L. Ron Hubbard L. RON HUBBARD ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Founder {Amended by HCO P/L 1 August 1972R (revised 25 August 1972), Qual Handling of Students and Internes on the Fast Flow System, in the 1972 Year Book.) 327 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971 Remimeo Issue IV Interne Super C/Ses Registrars CASE SUPERVISOR INTERNESHIPS Case Supervisor Interneships are sold to those persons or orgs wanting specialist trained Case Supervisors. The Case Supervisor Interneships line-up is: Dianetics Case Supervisor Interneship Class 0 to IV Case Supervisor Interneship, Class VI Case Supervisor Interneship Class VII Case Supervisor Interneship Class VIII and IX Case Supervisor Interneship. Do not under-rate the value of CIS specialist training in Dianetics and 0 to IV. Benefits of Case Supervisor Interneships: A. Learns the basic laws of the physical universe. B. The full attainments of Dianetics and Scientology, objective and subjective. C. How a C/S operates. D. CIS admin actions and procedures. E. Re-studies certain basic books in more detail for Knowledge to apply in C/Sing. F. The CIS Series. G. How to Programme Cases for the level. H. How to do expert folder error summaries. 1. How to repair a case for the level. J. How to "trouble shoot" a case and find out what really needs to be done for the level. K. How to train up good auditors. L. The attainment of competent ability to CIS for the level. CIS Interneships checksheets may vary but all will cover the above as applicable to the level. It is realized that there may be some missing checksheets for Interneships; but the criteria in sales must be "Can the org deliver this service?" so the Registrar and sales people must find out which checksheets, packs and Interneships are available. As new checksheets arrive, the Interne Super must advise Dissem Sec of this new service. Qual Aide for LRH:JZ:nt.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1971 Founder by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 328 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 NOVEMBER 1971 Issue V Remimeo (c) of Ps Interne Supers Cramming Offs PCOS Registrars C&A HGC AUDITORS AND HGC AUDITORS IN TRAINING Auditors on staff go through the OK to Audit system, using Interneship facilities, as needed, up to their highest level of training. They may be trained on new Rundowns and procedures in Cramming of the Interneship and get an OK to Audit. (Includes word clearing, star-rate, clay demos of key principles and auditing actions drilled on a doll before OK to Audit.) They also work for and get the second OK to Audit, as issued by the Div IV C/S, which gives full HGC Auditor status for that level or procedure. HGC Auditors usually work and produce many more hours per level than other Auditors, and therefore, when awarded full HGC Auditor status are nominated the senior Auditors for that Class on the continent. They may have "HGC Status" written on their Certificate just underneath the Classification on their Certificate. An HGC Auditor is designated In Training until he or she has gained the full HGC OK to Audit from the Div IV C/S. At that time, he or she becomes a full HGC Auditor. HGC Auditors in full time study for their next level of training in the org or getting an OK to Audit are on half pay. When they get their first OK to Audit and return to the HGC, they return to full pay and receive a nominal bonus for 25 hours of auditing in the chair. When the HGC Auditor gets his full HGC OK to Audit, he goes onto the FULL bonus system and gets bonuses, as issued, for Well Done Auditing Hours plus Completions. Thus the most experienced senior Auditors are the highest paid Auditors in the org. Any HGC Auditor with no OKays to Audit gets no bonus until attained. Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JZ:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 329 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 NOVEMBER 1971 Remimeo Revised 18 February 1972 (Changes in this type style) INTERNESHIPS ELECTRONIC ATTESTATION FORM In the interests of making flubless auditors, this attestation form must be filled out and must accompany ANY FINAL OK TO AUDIT FOR A CLASS. Auditor's name Date Interneship Class Org Name I hereby attest that I have: I . I attest I am fully familiar with and totally relaxed about metering including False TA and including knowing it is charged and handling it as per the False TA HCOBs or CIS Series 53, without introducing arbitraries or flubs of any kind. 2. Made magnetic recording tapes of my own auditing of pcs at this level. 3. That I have listened to and fully noted the rhythm, quality and presence of LRH tapes for my Interne Class. 4. That I have compared how I sound auditing my present level and how LRH tapes sound auditing this level, by listening to my session tapes and his, playing one after the other. 5. That I have done TRs long and hard to get my auditing to sound like LRH auditing for my class. 6. That I have made a new tape of my sessions after 5 above and newly compared it to LRH tapes and that I am satisfied that my own auditing sounds like LRH auditing. (If not, repeat 5 and 6 until attestation can be made.) 7. 1 attest I am so familiar and relaxed about my auditing presence that I can audit without strain or nerves. Add for SHs and AOs: S. I attest I have witnessed closed circuit TV and have observed sessions accurately. 9. 1 attest I have appeared on closed circuit TV and have been passed on by the auditors assembled as to TRs and presence and metering. 330 Add for Flag in addition to I to 9 above: 10. 1 attest that my metering is flawless and that I know everything there is to know about meter handling and care and every meter manifestation there is. 11. 1 attest that no one could tell the difference between my auditing presence and TRs and that of LRH for my Class. All orgs: 12. 1 attest that my pcs, are delighted with my auditing and their gains. I attest to the above in the full understanding that should I ever be faulted in auditing presence, TRs or metering by a qualified Inspector after signing this checksheet, I will retrain fully from the beginning. Interne Interne Supervisor Case Supervisor L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:nt.mes.rd Copyright (c) 1971, 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 331 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 FEBRUARY 1972 Remimeo Tech & Qual Qual Internes interne Supers C/Ses INTERNESHIP ERRORS FOUND The following points when found to be out on an Interneship have resulted in auditors not being made and progressing on up to the next class. When these points are in, then you make auditors, fact not theory, as it actually happened this way. Before these points went in, the C/S issued stacks of Cramming Orders; now it's 3 in a week. (1) The Tech query line must be made known to exist and Internes are allowed to use it. The line is from the Interne Supervisor, Qual Sec, Continental Qual Aide to Flag, Qual Aide. Interne confusions can be spotted by these terminals and often can refer to the precise HCOB that handles the query. However, the query line does exist and can be used. (2) Checksheets must have recent issues added to the Master checksheet. Missing data on a checksheet is not Keeping Scientology Working. (3) Use only LRH tapes to refer Internes to on TRs. LRH TR tapes are actual auditing sessions recorded live on tape. (4) When an Interneship has over 15 Internes on it, it's time to have a 2nd Super-visor, so as to be able to supervise all practical and keep track of each Interne at all times. An Interneship Course Administrator should also be posted to keep admin straight and tech packs made up, etc, just like a Course Administrator in an Academy. (5) Internes must understand exactly what a program is to be trained on programming. Only in this way will Interne Auditors NOT accept pcs, without a glance at the program or folder summary and just grind away hopefully. Auditors also need to know "Know Before You Go" (C/S Series 62), and "Auditors Rights" (C/S Series 1) which have the basic data, besides Programming C/S Series HCOBs. Interne Supervisors must ensure an Interne Auditor studies his pc's folder before auditing, paying attention particularly to Auditors Rights and Know Before You Go. It's only a five minute to an hour job, not a day long job to do this as the points on the two above HCOBs are being checked against the current C/S, folder summary, program, etc. Quote from LRH "It is the completed program that is the case change result not the session." (6) As it says in the C/S Series No. 21, the C/S is responsible for the training of his auditors under him. Because the C/S has internes on his lines and because any group of auditors can be bettered, the training officer part of the C/S Hat is one which is always worn. So as a C/S works with an auditor he trains him. One goof in a session is met with an order to Cramming on the materials flubbed. 332 After several cramming orders on the same action have been issued on an auditor, it becomes a retread at that level. The auditor has shown signs of not having a good grasp of what is being crammed over and over, hence it's time to retread. RETREAD means picking up the materials that the auditor is weak on. It's a review course. But it does mean going through the pack and the materials of the particular level being retreaded. It's mostly a check of misunderstood words, Method 4 style Word Clearing, on the different sections of the materials of the course, emphasis being placed on what the auditor is weak on. It can be bolstered to Method 4 on every HCOB as they go through the materials. Now if after a retread the auditor still is sent to Cramming on what he just retreaded, he obviously is still weak on it, it becomes retrain on that level. RETRAIN is where the whole course and whole checksheet are done, all the HCOBs, demos, drills, etc exactly as stated on the checksheet. A key cramming question is "What situation did you run into that you had to invent something to do something about it?" This immediately will establish the missingness of the auditor's data so it can be handled when found this way on a Cramming Order, retread or retrain cycle. (7) When it gets to a retrain you know the auditor was untrained in the first place, as he never got a grasp of the materials. He read the material but can't apply it. This brings about the retrain as the original course taken by the auditor did not get him taught, as there is no association between the materials, auditor and pc with that auditor. The action of a session is "over here" away from the materials so he can't get near to it to apply the materials. ALL FAILED INTERNES WERE TRACED TO NOT BEING TRAINED IN THE FIRST PLACE AS THE REAL WHY. The first thing really, that a student has to find out about a subject is that he doesn't know it. This may take a 10th of a second followed by greedy study. And this may never occur until it reaches the point of retrain-then it dawns he doesn't know when faced with the Cramming Orders, the retread, more cramming, and now a retrain. All the above points were and are actual factual points relating to the success of an Interneship. For any Interneship to be a success these points need to be checked often to ensure they are IN by C/Ses and Interne Supervisors, Interne Supervisors, C/Ses and Internes are expected to get the job done; each one has his part to do on these points. Everyone expects it of you. You can do this sort of thing and clear the planet. T/Qual Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:JW:mes.rd Copyright (c) 1972 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 333 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 2 APRIL 1961 CenOCon STAFF AUDITOR TRAINING SEQUENCE OF STUDY For an auditor wishing to obtain maximum results in using SOP Goals for Clearing, and particularly for a staff auditor, the following check-out should be used by HGC training officers, should be an advanced course training stress list and should be used by HCO for checking HGCs: Name ........................... Organization Area .................. I . TRs 0 to 5. 0- 1- 2- 3- 4- 5 2. The Auditor's Code 3. The Code of a Scientologist 4. E-Meter Theory 5. E-Meter Practice 6. Rudiments 7. Definition of In Session 8. Examining Rudiments with an E-Meter 9. Model Session memorized for use 10. Rudiments Processes 11. Case Assessment Forms 12. Auditor's Report Forms 13. The Pre-Hav Scale 14. SOP Goals 15. Doing a Goals Assessment 16. Finding terminals for running the goal 17. Finding Terminal Level on Pre-Hav Scale 18. Developing Commands 19. Filling out (c) of P Check Types 1- 2- 3- 4 5 - 6 - 7 - 8 20. Meter action in running a terminal in SOP Goals and how long to run 21. Reassessing for a new level for the same terminal- how long to run what is done then 334 22. Determining Complete flatness for a terminal on the Pre-Hav Scale 23. Determining Complete flatness for a goal 24. Reassessing Goals 25. Use of Change Process 26. Use of Attention Process 27. Use of CCHs (when rather than how) 28. Use of Johannesburg Security Check 29. The reasons cases bog 30. Use of Formula IS Use of Formula 16 31. Staff Auditor's Hat 32, (c) of P Checking Hat 33. Finding the Havingness Process 34. Balancing Havingness and Confront Processes 35. Finding the Confront Process 36. Using the Havingness and Confront Process while running Pre-Hav Terminals 37. Developing Pre-Hav Commands 38. The CCHs 1- 2- 3- 4 39. The use of the CCHQ 40. The parts of the Human Mind 41. The State of Release 42. The State of Clear 43. The State of Theta Clear 44. Regulations governing Staff Auditors 45. Routing of Reports 46. Function of HGC Admin 47. Functions of the HGC 48. Functions of HCO 49. The Pattern of a Central Org LRH:jl.rd Copyright (c) 1961 L. RON HUB13ARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 335 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 5 JANUARY 1962 HCO Secs Org Secs Ds of P Tech Depts EXAMINATION FOR HGC AUDITORS ALL HGC Auditors are to be examined on the HCO Bulletin of December 21, 196 1 -'Model Session Script Revised'. This examination, which is to consist of a 100% check-out on the actual Bulletin AND a practical test which must demonstrate that the Auditor can really use the new Model Session, is to be passed by ALL HGC Auditors within one week of the receipt of this Policy Letter. This Policy is laid down with the object of improving HGC Auditors' ability to keep Rudiments IN. Directors of Processing are required to report to HCO Technical Secretary WW that this Policy has been complied with. Issued by: HCO Technical Secretary WW on instructions from Mary Sue Hubbard for L. RON HUBBARD LRH:esc.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 336 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 SEPTEMBER 1965 Qual Sec Issue II Tech Sec Examiners AUDITOR ESTIMATION TEST (c) of P References: DofT HCO B 13 Sept 65: Out Tech HGC Training Officers Dir Review HCO B 21 Sept 65: Out Tech Tape Lecture SH 10 July 63 Not Confidential "Auditing Skills for R 3R" or Restricted Tape Lecture SH 21 Sept 65 "Out tech" The following general test questions are used directly or to make up tests for HGC auditor proficiency or for students or internes seeking to qualify as HGC Auditors. It may be required of any HGC en masse at any time to rate the Tech proficiency of that Department. The test is verbal and accompanied by the auditor having to demonstrate with the examiner marking this form or one made from it. Auditor's Name Date of Test Location of Org Grade E-Meter Review - (a) Ability to see needle motion and read at meter distance (b) Handling Tone Arm Overcompensation Undercompensation (c) Instant Read (c) Cleaning Cleans (e) Assessment (f) Possibility of Missing Items on a List (g) Rock Slam (h) Floating Needle (i) Auditor Action on seeing a floating needle 0) Dirty needle (k) Cause of a Dirty Needle (1) Setting up a Meter 2. Data Duplication Review (a) Test on any recent HCO B (b) Synthetic data duplication test Repeating a sentence Doing an action (c) Demonstration of a fundamental auditing action 337 3. Pc In Session Review (a) Bad Indicators (b) Good Indicators (c) Quality of needle of a recent pc (c) Auditor's Code 4. Auditing Cycle Review (a) TR 0 (b) TR I (c) TR 2A. Premature Acknowledgement B. Delayed Acknowledgment (c) TR 3 (e) TR 4 (f) Drawing the Comm Cycle (g) Examples of a Comm Cycle 5. Repetitive Command Review (a) Test of duplication (b) When is a Process flat? (c) Examples of flat processes OBNOSIS 6. Knowledge of Suppressive Person Review (a) Definition of SP (b) Examples of SP (c) Action for an SP (c) Consequences of an SP's acts 7. Knowledge of Potential Trouble Sources (a) Definition of PTS (b) Behavior of a PTS (c) Example of PTS (c) Consequences of PTS (e) Proper Auditor action on PTS (f) Error that can be made in handling PTS 8. ARC Break Review (a) Definition of an ARC Break (b) Consequences of an ARC Break (c) Meter Symptoms of approaching ARC Break (c) Manifestations of an ARC Break (e) Handling an ARC Break (f) Demonstration of handling an ARC Break 338 9. Problem Review (a) Definition of a PTP (b) Example of a PTP (c) Definition of a hidden standard (c) Definition of an overrun (e) Demonstration of an overrun (f) Consequences of a PTP (g) Assessment of PTPs (h) Handling a PTP A. Method B. Method (i) Symptoms of overhandling a PTP How is a Release State Rehabilitated? 10. O/W Review (a) Definition of an overt (b) Definition of a withhold (c) Symptoms of an overt - (c) Reaction of a pc with a withhold (e) Cycle of a misunderstood word (f) Handling withholds (g) Example of a motivator (h) Justifications (i) Assessment of withholds 0) Inadvertent withholds (k) Withhold of nothing (1) Consequences of missing withholds (m) Withholdy pcs who ARC Break easily (n) Action on pcs who don't give up w/hs 11. Continuous Overt Review (a) What is "Case Gain" (b) Who doesn't get case gain? (c) Overruns and TA (c) Detection of continuous overts (e) Auditor Action when condition not relieved (f) What process handles (Mark each question 1.25 pts) LRH:mI.rd Examiner Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD 339 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 JANUARY 1969 SEA ORG Remimeo Tech Hats AUDITORS AND TRAINING No matter the level of training an auditor has obtained, whether it be Class VIII or 0, it may slip unless it gets maintained. The slips are always GROSS, and the GROSS SUDDEN outness is often hidden behind a series of smaller seeming ones spread over a number of pcs, An auditor was found to have slipped on the Auditor's Code by auditing a hungry pc, and careful examination of several other folders audited by this auditor in the same period showed similar other outnesses of a same GROSS nature. Obviously adherence to the Auditor's Code suddenly slipped, and with it went this auditor's TR's. ONLY CONSTANT REFERENCE TO SOURCE WILL MAINTAIN 100% RESULTS! Bit piece training is not sufficient. It is useless to correct the auditor on his ADMIN when it is found that he forgets to write "Ext" alongside the list when extending it. We find that the next list is also goofed, and the auditor should have been retrained on TR's 0 to 4. For a small technical outness to occur, a BIG one has already preceded it. And basically there are NO small outnesses technically. They are always BIG. The policy is hereby established and is to be strictly adhered to, that ALL auditors, Qual and HGC alike, whether Class 0 or Class VIII must train for a minimum of one hour daily. EVERY WORKING DAY. They shall do drills and HCOB study. This is a CORRECTIVE ACTION, and as such comes under the Qual See. The training programme embraces auditors, D/P, C/S, Tech See and Qual Sec. A wise Org Exec Sec if technically trained should not lag behind in this programme. Lt. 0. J. Roos Flag C/S for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:OJR:sdp.ei.rd Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 340 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 24 APRIL 1965 Gen Non Remimeo Sthil Students Sthil Scn Staff TECHNICAL DIVISION 6 QUALIFICATIONS DIVISION DEPT 20-DIV 7 REVIEW The Department of Review is in the Qualifications Division. It is Division 7, Department 20. It has a Cramming Section which teaches students what they have missed. It has a Case Cracking Section which audits cases (students or HGC pcs or other pcs in difficulty such as field auditor rejects) to a result. Review also has a Staff Training Section. It also has a Staff Co-auditing Section. Any student failing his classification examinations must be ordered to the Review Cramming Section. Any student failing to get 5 or more passes (usual expected number is 10 passes per week on the Saint Hill Course) in two weeks, theory and practical check sheets inclusive, must. be ordered by the (c) of T to the Review Cramming Section. Any student who becomes ARC Broken or whose case does not progress must be ordered to the Case Cracking Section by the (c) of T. Any HGC pc who does not qualify for a grade certificate requested is ordered to the Case Cracking Section. All student blows are ordered to the Case Cracking Section. All pc blows are ordered to the Case Cracking Section. Students coming under Ethics may be ordered to Case Cracking Section by a Court of Ethics but not by a (c) of T. This is done either for one crime or five misdemeanors reported. The student may have recourse. In all other ordering of students or pcs, to Review than Ethics matters, it is considered a normal training or auditing action since the org is there to train or process only average or better students or pcs and does not undertake to invest time, money and staff on unusual cases and the ordering of the student is by the (c) of T, the pc by the (c) of P or students or pcs by the Director of Examinations, or in Ethics matters only by a Court of Ethics but then to auditing only. The entire purpose of the Department of Review is repair and correction of auditing and training difficulties. It is quite fatal to feed students or pcs, rejected by an Examiner of the Department of Examinations, Qualifications Division, back into the Technical Division until the matter is remedied by Review. Academies and HGCs are assembly line actions and the introduction of the failed result back into it until the failure is remedied in Review produces chaos. All Review Services are charged for. There is an invoice unit between Examinations and Review. 341 An amount of money is deposited or an open invoice is signed by the student or pc (unspecified amount). No Review action or service may be given free of charge or less than the fixed rates for the area. But cases can be handled on credit. All cases are handled. None is rejected except Potential Trouble Sources or a person it is unlawful to audit or train. If a person sent to Review will not pay at all, resists even credit, he or she is shifted at once to the next department (Department of Certificates and Awards, Div 7 Dept 2 1 ) to their Hardship Section where some charity arrangement may be made for low level assists by volunteer students or freshly trained internes wanting someone to practise on, not a Review action. The Saint Hill Department of Review Professional Rates are: Auditing per hour f 3.12.0 Training per day f 2 / day. Public rates would be twice that as the Pro. Rate is half the public rate. If the Review fee is not paid by course end the grade or level certificate or classification is not delivered to the student. However if the student has proven credit a note may be signed or the amount billed according to prevailing policy which may be set from time to time. Power processes are only run in the Review Case Cracking Section and may not be taught in the Academy or employed in the HGC since they apply only to the unusual case and while they also work on average cases, the average case runs quite well if not better on routine processes. The Power Processes require specially coached and trained auditors. Review is an extension of my own Case Cracker Hat and my own fast instruction Hat. Auditors meant for Review should be sent to Saint Hill as Internes in the Review Department as it is quite unlike Academies and HGCs. Its personnel is expected to audit or instruct, security check or perform many non-standard actions and may have to do some of each in any working day. Review audits and trains only to a specific result. The training or auditing ends the moment the required Result is achieved and stabilized. Therefore no-one is ever signed up for X hours or Y days. One is signed up only on an open signed invoice which is followed later by a Review Time Sheet and second invoice giving the exact amount owed calculated after the result. Review auditing and training are not commonly available to the public except via the Academy and HGC. But outside persons who have to be examined for one or another reason may be shifted to Review if they fail. Review is the most versatile department in the organization with the single exception of the Office of LRH. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Corrected by HCO P/L 29 April 1965 Issue III, Ethics-Review, page 345.1 342 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 APRIL 1965 Gen Non-Remimeo Issue III All Orgs Sthil Staff Sthil Students POWER PROCESSES Only the HGC at Saint Hill and the Case Cracking Section of the Department of Review may use the 3 new Power Levels I recently developed until they have on staff Review Cl VI Personnel who have interned at Saint Hill in the Saint Hill Dept of Review. The processes require the most skilled and exact application and have exact phenomena to be observed which becomes impossible to supervise outside the above departments. Only Class VI auditors may audit these processes first only at Saint Hill and only under the supervision of Mary Sue Hubbard until they have learned them perfectly. Training on such processes can be undertaken only by Provisional Class VI auditors after leaving the course, and only enrolled on staff as Internes in the Department of Review or the HGC. Orgs not having personnel so trained by Interneship may not use these processes in their Review Departments. The fact of having a Review personnel trained in Review at Saint Hill does not permit an org to train new Review personnel in the org. Anybody in an org's Review who will be using or supervising the use of Power Processes must have been interned at Saint Hill. Such training, however, gives no right to. train others. Holding this policy firmly guarantees the full success technically in all cases in any org in the world. Avoiding it in any way jeopardizes that success. These power processes are simple. But so is T.N.T. The reason for this is that there is no adequate repair for errors made in running these processes if their existing remedies are also goofed. The strongest, swiftest Ethics action must follow any slightest violation of the above for these processes alone guarantee sweeping success for Scientology on the roughest cases everywhere. Any auditor who discovers that the pc he is auditing has been illegally audited previously on a power process or any higher level process for which the pc is not graded must report the matter at once to the nearest HCO Ethics Section by collect wire or 'phone call. R6 NEW STUDENTS Before enrolment in the R6 unit of the SHSBC all students who have not been run on the Power Processes and who have any slightest difficulty with R6 EW must be ordered at once to the Review Case Cracking Section for Power Processes. Any student not showing adequate case gain on the course must be ordered to the Review Case Cracking Section. The Power Processes must not appear on any check sheet. TRUSTED AUDITORS I reserve my right to give a process to a trusted Class VI auditor to run on one pc for testing. REVIEW, ORDERS TO No (c) of T or Course Supervisor or Academy Instructor may threaten a student who is disruptive of course discipline with Review auditing or training. Such students may only be ordered to Ethics. Auditing may no longer be used as discipline by any Comm Ev or Scientology Executive. 343 Students who obtain too few passes may be ordered to Review. Students who are ARC Broken may be ordered to Review. REVIEW EXPENSES Any student ordered to the Review Cramming Section or Case Cracking Section is ordered at his or her own expense at prevailing Review rates. Students who cannot pay and whose credit is compromised may be ordered by Review to the Hardship Section where student auditors who have failed in classification may be needful of pcs to catch up on check sheets or get experience with processes. If no such students are available the hardship case or backward student must simply wait for one to show up if one does. PACE OF ORG The organization is geared to the average case and study rate and there is no reason why it should have to pay above its narrow costing allowance for the student who is too bad off or the preclear who cannot gain normally. PRECLEARS When any HGC preclear does not buy enough auditing to attain a case change, and if no result has been obtained, he or she may not be dismissed from the org but must be passed to Review at the preclear's own expense. It is vital that an HGC pc buy enough auditing to obtain a proper result for his case if it is worse than average. Otherwise the matter passes from the preclear's hands and is taken over by Review. No "failed cases" may be dismissed from the org. ALL TO QUALIFICATIONS No student or pc may leave an org by any other exit than through the Department of Examinations. If students or pcs fail for any reason to be up to required standards they are shunted by Examinations to Review. . If the student or pc passes the Department of Examinations' appraisal, he or she is sent to the Department of Certifications for attestation of attainment and for logging out of the org. Until so logged the student or pc has not technically left the org. Departure without logging is "Departure unauthorized" and is treated as a "blow" and passes into the hands of Ethics at once. ETHICS AND STUDENTS AND PCs Students and pcs, shunted about from the Academy or HGC to Examinations, Review and Certification or back again are not considered transferred or subjected to discipline in the Ethics meaning of these words and have therefore no recourse. The entire object of an org is to produce a satisfactory auditor or higher state of case in the pc and anything that impedes this would be an arbitrary and unreasonable restraint upon an org and its Technical and Qualification Divisions and their personnel. A student or pc should signify an understanding of this on enrolling in an org for training or scheduling processing. They are buying progress in life and may not act to prevent its occurrence. If they enter an org they are understood to consider improvement desirable and therefore tacitly agree to be improved by the technology furnished. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 344 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 APRIL 1965 Issue III [Excerpt] Remimeo ETHICS REVIEW (Correction to HCO Pol Ltr 24 April 1965 and additional Ethics data) As per HCO Pol Ltr of 28 April 1965, and others of later date, orders to auditing or training may not be made as a sentence or used in an Ethics Court or by a Comm Ev or any other reason. Auditing and training are awards. A student who is disruptive of discipline and acts contrary to the Ethics Codes may not be ordered to Review by the (c) of P, (c) of T or Ethics personnel or other persons in an org. ORDERING STUDENTS & PCs Tech and Qualifications personnel, particularly the Tech See and Qual See and (c) of Estimations, the (c) of P and (c) of T, (c) of Exams and (c) of Review and (c) of Certs may order students or pcs, to Review or to course or to HGC or anywhere in and around these two Divisions without any Ethics action being implied. It is just normal, done to get students and pcs on the road to higher levels. Ethics actions may only suspend training or deny auditing. Therefore, a student ordered to Ethics for discipline who does not then give adequate promise and example of good behaviour and compliance must be thoroughly investigated even to his or her own area and in the meanwhile may not be trained or processed. The student, however, may not be dismissed or expelled unless full Ethics actions and procedures have been undertaken. All sentences carrying a denial of training or processing must carry a means of the right to be trained or processed being restored in a specified time or under specified conditions. STUDENTS AND PCs & ETHICS The routine action of Ethics is to request a reappraisal of behaviour and a signed promise of good behaviour for a specified time. If the student or pc refuses to so promise, then the next action of Ethics is an investigation of the student's course or pcs, processing behaviour. When then confronted with the data, if the student still refuses to promise, Ethics undertakes a full investigation in the student's or pc's own area. If the student or pc still refuses to co-operate, the student goes before a Court of Ethics which may pass sentence. RECOURSE Only after sentence has been passed by a legal body such as a Court of Ethics or Committee of Evidence or after an illegal disciplinary action may a student or pc ask for a recourse. Normally before asking for recourse a student or pc petitions the Office of L. Ron Hubbard if unwilling to accept the discipline but this must be done at once. If the petition is unfavourably acted upon, the student or pc may ask for recourse. Recourse must be requested of the Convening Authority that had local jurisdiction over the student or pc and may not be requested of higher authority. A request to higher authority than the Ethics activity that passed sentence is a petition, not recourse. LRH:jw.ccfen.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard [Note: A complete copy of this Policy Letter can be found in ALL RIGHTS RESERVED Volume 1, pages 395-398.] 345 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 4 JULY 1965 Remimeo All Tech Hats Tech Div All Qual Hats Qual Div Class VII Students PC ROUTING REVIEW CODE The Code has four symbols REV! REV FL? DECLARE? ETH? When the Case Supervisor sends (by marking the summary report in the folder) a pc from the Tech Div to the Qual Div, the following code is used. REV! Means "This pc is in trouble! Please do a Review hard." Review does HCO Pol Ltr 26 June 1965 Form with extreme care and handles thoroughly all points uncovered. PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR. REV FL? Means "Could you please find out if this process is flat for me? And anything else you care to do, of course." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR. DECLARE? Means "Pc has reached a grade or Release. Please look at pc and if okay, pass on to Certs and Awards." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO EXAMINER. IF PC LOOKS ALL RIGHT TO EXAMINER AND FOLDER IS OKAY EXAMINER SENDS PC TO CERTS AND AWARDS WITH A CHIT. Review auditor does not get on line at all. However if a casual glance tells the Examiner this pc is not all right or if folder shows a mess, the Examiner routes by a chit to invoice and Review. The pc, however, is not returned to the HGC, but can, of course, in the case of a grade, sign up for more. ETH? Means "This pc may be an Ethics case, roller coasters or no case gain." PC GOES STRAIGHT TO INVOICE AND REVIEW AUDITOR who does HCO Pol Ltr 26 June 65 and returns pc to Examiner who may-or may not-direct pc to Ethics depending on results of the Review. AUDITOR'S PC Note that an auditor may take his pc to Qual if the session won't start or run. The route is not auditor to (c) of P to Review, but the Auditor with the pc to Invoice to Review auditor. The pc's auditor leaves the pc at invoice in Qual and reports then at once to the (c) of P who must assign some work or send the auditor to Dept of Schedules to pick up a low priority pc or even, on peak loads, to the Director of Review to help out. The auditor must not remain unassigned, even if he is put to Files. DEPT OF SCHEDS HGC Admin (The Dept of Schedules, Tech Div) receives folders at the end of the session or the day's auditing and gets them to the Case Supervisor. When the Case Supervisor sends them back (before the next session), HGC Admin then sees what should happen in the folders and routes the pc promptly and as promptly handles any auditor re-assignment. Pcs who are going to come back are promptly reviewed and sent back and the auditor is not changed on them and the auditor is temporarily assigned by HGC Admin to bridge the gap. Pcs who are not going to come back are struck off the assignment board and the auditor is instantly reassigned. If the next pc on the list cannot instantly be found by HGC Admin then the next pc on the list is grabbed. The auditor, then, does not go to Qual with the pc. It is not the auditor who 346 discovers the pc is destined, for Review. This is discovered by HGC Admin before sessions normally begin for the day. The whole interest here is economy of auditing time. Save all of it you can in any way you can. THE ASSIGNMENT BOARD A large cellulose or soft board at least 3 ft by 5 high exists in HGC Admin. Each Auditor's name is printed on a card and each pc's name is put on a card. There is a column for each session period if there are more than one in the day. And one column for pcs who have been sent to Review. The auditors' names are in the column on the left on green cards and the pcs' are in the other columns on white cards. HGC Admin assigns and routes by moving cards on the Assignment Board. There are three possible sessions, morning, afternoon and evening. There is also the Review column, Thus one has 5 vertical columns on the Assignment Board. WAITING LIST BOARD Any pc waiting list is posted, with the pc's name on a white card, on another board in HGC Admin. It reads from left to right in horizontal lines and the white card is removed to the Assignment Board. Students who are waiting for auditing are also put on the waiting list board but their names are on a different (paler) shade of green from that of auditors. These quite commonly are scheduled half days so that one auditor is auditing two of them a day. The student studies the other half of the day. This can also be done (half day scheduling) with town pcs. Out of town pcs are always full day scheduled. LRH:ml.rd Copyright (c) 1965 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 JULY 1965 Gen Non Remimeo [Excerpt] Tech Div Qual Div REVIEW HOLDS Review must NOT hold onto pcs. There is no 2nd HGC in Review. Review does the required actions and sends pc back to HGC Admin. There's no reason to start running intensives in Review. That's for the HGC. Check them, find what's wrong, send them back to HGC. The Case Supervisor of course receives the folder from HGC Admin before the next session. But Review does not ask the Case Supervisor for further directions. Review asks the Dir Review and the Dir Review asks the Qual Sec if needed. But there should be no question on a case. Review actions are very pattern. They do a form. They put it in the folder and send the folder and pc back to HGC Admin. HGC Admin then sends the folder to the Case Supervisor who writes the Case Supervisor's instructions in the folder for the HGC Auditor, who then goes on with the intensive. If the intensive is considered over, by reason of Release or Ethics action, HGC Admin tells the pc and does the remaining necessary actions. LRH:ml.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard [Excerpted from HCO Policy Letter of 9 July 1965, Qual Goofs, ALL RIGHTS RESERVED A complete copy appears on page 142.1 347 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1965 Remimeo Ali Staff IMPORTANT Ethics Hat Tech Hats Qual Hats Income Hats POTENTIAL TROUBLE SOURCE ROUTING The Ethics Officer, when receiving a person Who has 'roller coastered (case improved then dropped), must route that person to Review. Review only must locate the correct Suppressive Person, repeat the correct SP, the right SP. Review then states: I . Who the SP is (or who they are if more than one); 2. That good indicators came in and stayed in visibly when the SP (or SPs) was found. Review then sends the person to Ethics. Ethics must require the person as per policy to handle or disconnect. If the person will not handle or disconnect, the person is sent again to Review as the right SP has NOT been found. Further UNTIL THE PERSON HAS PAID IN CASH FOR THE REVIEW SEARCH AND DISCOVERY Ethics may not declare the person no longer PTS. (The reason for this is that the person will not pay if the wrong suppressive is found.) HGC Auditors, similarly must send a PTS to Review not Ethics. Supervisors must send any 'student PTS only to Review. Review always sends to Ethics but ONLY when the right SP has been found and indicated. REVIEW AUDITOR The Review Auditor uses "Search and Discovery" as will be covered in an HCO B. If this is not to hand, simply find the right SP, indicate it to, the person and watch the good indicators come in. PTSs may not be handled in ANY other way. The routing is not from Ethics to the Chaplain. Ethics does not route to the Chaplain. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:ml.cden Copyright (c) 1965 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 348 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 JUNE 1962 CenOCon ARC BREAK CLEAN-UP PROGRAMME The following programme for cleaning up ARC breaks, initiated by Fred Fairchild, Tech Director in Washington D.C., should be used also in other Orgs. ARC Break Clean-Up Programme PURPOSE: To get the ARC breaks cleaned up with past students and preclears; to invite further activity in Scientology on their part; to get them paying on over-due bills. ACTION. Body Registrar contacts people who are not paying their bills and are out of communication with the Org, and arranges for these people to come in and get an ARC break check which would amount to a missed withhold check. The person would be asked by the auditor some such question as "Do you have an ARC break with Scientology-the org, etc." or "Do you have any disagreement with Scientology-the org, etc." This would get a motivator, but it would put them in a hot area of "overts". The auditor once he has located the area of ARC break, then pulls the "overts", and who has missed them. (Failed to find out about them.) An auditor could be used for this if he doesn't have a pc, or in case of a weekend, the auditor on a "free" week, can have a day of that week off to make up for auditing on the weekend. This is an experiment in which we hope to get ARC broken people active in Scientology and paying on their bills. We hope this to be successful enough to make it a whole programme for the USA with all orgs, and field auditors. At first we will only use it on the local people here, and if successful, will expand from there. It is planned that the ARC breaks can be cleaned up in from 2 to 5 hours. L. RON HUBBARD by Fred Fairchild Tech Director Washington D.C. LRH:dr.cden Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 349 NOT HCO POLICY LETTER CORRECT COLOUR FLASH BLUE ON WHITE ARC BREAK CLEANUP PROGRAMME [Excerpt from EXECUTIVE DIRECTIVE of 1 September 196 7 ED 4 73 WW 842 SH "WW Emergency Condition "I A general condition of EMERGENCY BY TREND is assigned WW on a basis of leveling or dropping composite outer org graphs. 11. It also means local tech is out in outer orgs and the areas are full of ARC Breaks not caught. In such a case I always order orgs to pick up and smooth out AT ANY ORG EXPENSE every ARC broken pc they can find in their files or areas as A SPECIAL PROGRAMME. They put in an ARC Break Registrar who liaisons with accounts and with Review and with CF searching for ARC Broken pcs, and students. A special genned in full time auditor is put in Review and AT NO CHARGE to pcs is kept busy on ARC Breaks only WITH IT BEING AN ETHICS OFFENSE TO USE HIM OR THE ARC BREAK REGISTRAR FOR ANY OTHER STUDENT PC OR DUTY. And you clean up the whole field from years and years back. This ARC Break auditor cures the ARC Breaks with Level III tech and sends the person to the usual registrar when done. THIS is his stable datum: IF YOUR PC IS NOT SMILING AND HAPPY AT THE END OF SESSION YOU ARE NOT AUDITING. 12. The ARC Break Registrar has a special dual stat-how many ARC Broken pcs, have been found, in files, etc, how many contacted. The ARC Br Auditor has a special dual stat-how many ARC Breaks (not pcs, found, how many handled. L. RON HUBBARD Founder [Note: Full text of ED 473 WW 842 SH is in Volume: 7, page 60.] HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1968 Issue 11 (Corrects HCO PL 2 November 1967 Dissem. Division and HCO PL 2 November 1967 Qualifications Division) Remimeo ARC BREAK REGISTRARS AND AUDITORS ARC BREAK REGISTRARS AND AUDITORS ARE RELOCATED IN QUAL TO WORK AS A TEAM. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH.js.rd Copyright (c) 1968 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 350 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 JANUARY 1969 Issue 11 Remimeo Org Exec Sec Hat HCO Exec Sec Hat HCO Area Sec Hat Qual See Hat Dir Review Hat ARC Break Reg Hat ARC Break Auditor Hat ARC BREAK PROGRAM An ARC broken field equals blocks to the expansion of Scientology and decreased income for Orgs. Therefore a Special Program for finding, contacting, handling and getting ARC broken Scientologists back on the lines is vital. The Program that handles this is the ARC Break Program, which picks up and handles AT ANY ORG EXPENSE every ARC broken Scientologist that can be found in the field AT NO CHARGE. Under this Program a full time ARC Break Registrar and Auditor are assigned to the Department of Review in the Qualifications Division WITH IT BEING AN ETHICS OFFENSE TO USE THEM FOR ANY OTHER STUDENT OR PC DUTY. The ARC Break Registrar must employ every possible source of information and spare no effort or expense to get ARC broken Scientologists located, contacted and into session. The ARC Break Auditor then, using Standard Tech, handles whatever upset the person has, which is preventing him from continuing processing or training to the point where he signs up for his next service. This Program is quite simple,. but extremely vital to the expansion of Scientology and increased income. So let's get all those who have reached but withdrawn because of some upset with us rapidly back on The Road to Total Freedom. Qual See WW - Jim Keely HCO Area See WW - Bruce Glushakow Ad Council WW - Rodger Wright (Chairman) LRH Comm WW - Rodger Wright The Guardian WW - Jane Kember for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:jsk.el.rd Copyright (c) 1969 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED [Cancelled by HCO P/L 9 August 1971, ARC Break Program, page 352.1 351 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 9 AUGUST 1971 Remimeo Exec Hats Dissem Hats Qual Hats ARC Break Reg Hat. ARC Break Auditor Hat ARC BREAK PROGRAM (Cancels HCO PL 20 Jan 69 which had the ARC Break Registrar incorrectly posted under the Qual Div, & omitted blown students.) An ARC Broken field equals blocks to the expansion of Scientology and decreased income for orgs. Therefore a special Program for finding, contacting, handling and getting ARC Broken Scientologists and blown students back on lines is vital. The Program that handles this is the ARC Break Program, which picks up and handles at ORG EXPENSE every ARC Broken Scientologist and blown student that can be found in the field. A Free Revitalization Session is given each person at NO CHARGE. Under this Program a full time ARC Break Registrar for Div 2, Dept 6, and a full time ARC Break Auditor for the Qual Div are assigned. During the Program it is an Ethics Offense to use them for any other student or pc duty. The ARC Break Reg must employ every possible source of information and spare no effort or expense to get ARC Broken Scientologists. and blown students located, contacted and turned over to Qual for a session. If a person does not or will not come to the org, the ARC Break Auditor then goes to the person's home and politely 8C's the person into receiving his Free Revitalization Session. The ARC Break Auditor then, using Standard Tech, handles whatever upset the person has which is preventing him from continuing processing or training to the point where he signs up for his next service or returns to completing the course he was on. To really complete cleaning up blown students, they would need full Word Clearing in Qual at own expense before being routed back on Course. This Program is simple, but extremely vital to the expansion of Scientology and increased income. So let's get all those who have reached but withdrawn because of some upset with us rapidly back on the Routing and Gradation Chart and the Road to Total Freedom. Dissem Aide for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:RR:nt.rd Copyright (c) 1971 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 352 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE 3 7 Fitzroy Street, London W. I HCO POLICY, LETTER OF 3 AUGUST 1960 (Re-issued from Sthil) CenOCon SECURITY OF PERSONS LEAVING STAFFS Before a person may leave staff and receive a final pay cheque, a security check must be made and any overts and "withholds on the organization or personnel discovered must be audited at organization expense. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:js.gh.cden Copyright (c) 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 13 DECEMBER 1960 CenOCon SECURITY CHECKS A security check may be made on Any Academy student, Central Org staff member or any Hubbard Guidance Center preclear where there is a possibility of a threat to survival of a Scientology, Organization.,,, A security check -is not a punishment; it is actually "help" to the person being checked. A security check may be requested by the Assoc See, Org See, HCO Exec See, HCO Area See, HCO Board of Review, HCO WW and Exec Dir. Issued by: Peter Hemery HCO Secretary WW for MARY SUE HUBBARD Deputy Executive Director MSH-.js.rd Copyright 1960 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 353 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JANUARY 1961 CenOCon NEW SECURITY RULES All Security Checks, to be valid, must be done on an HCO WW form As all permanent staff members must pass a security check to become so, the following constitutes a pass: No Lie Reactions 1. Lie Reaction must be unmistakable on E-Meter during first ten test questions. If not present when subject responds "No" to all ten statements (half of them untrue) and yet there is no registry of the untruth on the meter to such things as "Are you sitting in a chair?" then the lack of lie reaction flunks the subject so far as a security check is concerned. Needle Fails To Clear 2. If falls, rock slams or theta bops do not clear out when the question is carefully repeated and all efforts by the examiner fail to clear them out, the subject is to be considered a security risk and the test is flunked. Perversion 3. When the subject demonstrates current peculiar interests which could be made the subject of blackmail by people antagonistic to Scientology, the person is a security risk and the test is flunked. Felonies 4. If the subject is shown to have committed crimes (felonies) for which he could be arrested in present time the subject should be flunked. Unreadable Needle 5. If the E-Meter needle is too sticky or too wild to be. read throughout the interview, the subject should be flunked. It should be noted that all but 3 (Perversions) and 4 (Felonies) above can be cleaned up by processing. 3 (Perversions) could also be cleaned up by processing and a change of activities. 4 (Felonies) could be cleaned up by processing and some social adjustment with the persons offended against or the law. L. RON HUBBARD LRH.js.cden Copyright 0 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 354 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 MARCH 1961 CenOCon SECURITY RULES (Cancels HCO Policy Letter of January 28 1961 "New Security Rules") Since a Security Check failure can compromise or injure a person's position or economics, and because we are not moralists, it is better to be more positive on the subject of a Security Check failure, leaving no part of it up to judgement. The question of what constitutes a Security Check failure has now troubled enough people to make it necessary to lay down the following policies. A Security Check to be used for any organizational reason must be made on an HCO WW form. There are only three ways a Security Checker may flunk any person. I . The Security Check may be considered flunked if there is no needle response of any kind to any question with meter sensitivity even at extreme high. 2. The Security Check may be considered flunked if any compromising or important question still persists in getting a consistent drop even after the Security Checker has done his best to get the person being checked to clear it by answering truthfully. 3. Refusal to be checked. Lie reaction failure may no longer be considered a flunk. Important questions always have enough charge on them to cause a fall even on bad criminals and the fall will continue consistently or sporadically if the person is still withholding information. The question of something falling because of past life crimes is ruled out if, when a question fails to clear, the Security Checker adds "In this lifetime?" to or in the question and works on that question continuing to use that added phrase. Falls by reason of past lives tend to drop out and clear if this is done. The task of the Security Checker is to carefully question and clear if possible changes of meter needle behaviour caused by the question. The Lie Reaction questions were originally used in Scientology only to study the needle pattern of the person being checked so that changes in it could then be judged in their true light. Some pcs, for instance, get a slight fall every time any question is asked. Some get a fall only when there is heavy charge. Both can be Security Checked by studying the common pattern of the needle demonstrated in asking the Lie Reaction questions. The purpose of the Lie Reaction questions is returned to the original intention. A totally stuck needle can be freed by processing, or by getting off withholds. If a person is flunked by reason of 1. above, they require auditing before another check is taken, the auditing to be taken at the responsibility of the person being checked. CHECK SHEETS All Security Check Sheets of persons Security Checked should be forwarded to Saint Hill, complete with all markings and the reason why the question would not at first clear, if important, or the drop marked which would not clear and whether or not the person was passed or failed. (c) of T FLUNKS Nothing in this Policy Letter changes the responsibility of the Director of Training in preventing Scientology from being taught to persons who would use it in violation of the Code of a Scientologist. LRH:iet.aap L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 355 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 DECEMBER 1961 CenOCon SEC CHECKS ON STAFF Once a staff member has passed a Form 7A or 7B, no further use of this form should be made on that staff member. It is the responsibility of the (c) of P thereafter that staff members continue to remain in good condition by reason of routine staff clearing processing. If any staff member fails thereafter in security, the (c) of P should be placed on evening auditing on the Joburg, Form 6 and other policy checks to get all the (c) of P's withholds off so the (c) of P will not be diffident in keeping staff clearing going well and getting off withholds on staff members. LRH:ph.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1961 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 DECEMBER 1961 HCO Area Sees Org Sees Ds of P PROCESSING (c) OF P Effective immediately, please arrange for your Director of Processing, and anyone subsequently appointed to this post, to be processed on the last two pages of the 'Joburg' (Form 3) Processing Check-starting with the question:- "Have you ever injured Dianetics or Scientology?", also the whole of the Form 6 Processing Check, AND the Executives' Security Check (HCO Information Letter of November 22, 1961). It is imperative that these Checks be completed on your Director of Processing very soon, so please insist on the (c) of P taking sufficient auditing time to thoroughly flatten them-starting NOW. LRH:ew.cden Issued by Copyright (c) 1961 HCO Technical Secretary WW by L. Ron Hubbard for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD 356 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Gen Non Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex Remimeo HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JANUARY 1962 Qual Hats Reissued on 7 June 1967 Tech Hats Level VI Students & Above RESPONSIBILITY AGAIN The common denominator of the Goals Problem Mass is "No Responsibility". This is the end product that continues any circuit or valence. This is a deterioration of Pan Determinism over a game into "No responsibility" as follows: No Previous or Current Contact - No responsibility or liability. Pan Determinism - Full responsibility for both sides of game. Other Determinism - No responsibility for other side of game. Self Determinism - Full responsibility for self, no responsibility for other side of game. Valence (Circuit) - No responsibility for the game, for either side of the game or for a former self. The Goals Problem Mass is made up of past selves or "valences", each one grouped and more or less in a group. Therefore, the characteristic of the part (the valence) is the characteristic of the whole, the collection of valences known as the Goals Problem Mass. The way a being is hung with persistent masses is the mechanism of getting him to believe certain things are undesirable. These, he cannot then have. He can only combat or ignore them. Either way, they are riot as-ised. Thus they persist. Only undesirable characteristics tend to persist. Therefore the least desirable valences or traits of valences persist. The way not to have is to ignore or combat or withdraw from. These three, ignoring or combatting or withdrawing sum up to no having. They also sum up to no responsibility for such things. Thus we can define responsibility as the concept of being able to care for, to reach or to be. To be responsible for something one does not actually have to care for it, or reach it or be it. One only needs to believe or know that he has the ability to care for it, reach it or be it. "Care for it" is a broader concept than but similar to start, change or stop it. It includes guard it, help it, like it, be interested in it, etc. When one has done these things, and then had failures through overts and withholds, one cycles down through compulsive and obsessive care, reach and be and inverts to withdraw from, combat or ignore. Along with ignore goes forgetting or occlusion. Thus a person has occlusion on past valences and past lives go out of sight. These return to memory only when one has regained the concept that they can be reached, or that one dares be them again or that one can care for them. Herein is the cause and remedy of whole track occlusion. There are many uses of these principles. Sec Checking gets off the overts and withholds and opens the gates. All chronic somatics and behavior patterns are contained in valences and are not traceable to the current life time since one can reach present life, is caring for present life and is being present life, so present life is an area of responsibility. All real difficulty stems from no responsibility. However, one can use these principles even on present life with considerable gain. L. RON HUBBARD LRH:sf.jp.oden Founder Copyright (-) 1967 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 357 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 22 JANUARY 1962 HCO Sees Assoc Sees Tech Depts URGENT SECURITY CHECKS Effective immediately, all Security Security Checks, i.e. HCO WW Forms 5A, 7A and 7B etc, when being used specifically as Security Checks, must be done in Model Session form. This is because it has been found that bad security risks have been passed on these forms due to wildly out rudiments nulling the needle. Conversely, good staff members have been flunked because questions read on ARC Breaks etc, rather than on the question being asked. Issued by: Mike Rigby Senior Instructor LRH:jw.pp.kd Saint Hill Special Copyright (c) 1962 Briefing Course by L. Ron Hubbard for ALL RIGHTS RESERVED L. RON HUBBARD HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 FEBRUARY 1962 CenOCon CLEAN HANDS CLEARANCE CHECK In order for an auditor who is regarded as a security risk to be considered to have Clean Hands, it is necessary for him to receive a Clean Hands Clearance Check from HCO. The Clean Hands Clearance Check consists of that auditor having the following rudiments put in very thoroughly by an HGC Class Il Staff Auditor using prep-clearing techniques. I . Auditor. Are you willing to talk tome about your difficulties? 2. Withholds - Last two pages of Joburg Form 3 or all of Form 3A (to be released soon); and all of an HCO WW Sec Form 6A. Plus asking "Has a withhold been missed on you?" frequently as all such persons specialise in getting them missed. This will be checked out on completion by the HCO Area Secretary for any questions on Form 3 or 3A and Form 6A which may be still alive and for any missed or partial withholds. If there are questions which are alive or if there are any missed or partial withholds the person must go back to the HGC to have them cleaned up before he is considered to have Clean Hands. If no questions are alive and there are no missed or partial withholds, then the person will be awarded a Clean Hands Seal on his certificate and will be considered to be in good standing with HCO. LRH:jw.rd L. RON HUBBARD Copyright (c) 1962 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 358 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 OCTOBER 1962 CenOCon SECURITY RISKS INFILTRATION As the Organization rapidly expands so will it be a growing temptation for anti-survival elements to gain entry and infiltrate, and attempts to plant will be made. To foil these, all staff members must be alert to attempts of this nature and it is their duty to inform ' the Technical Director, or above, of any doubts they may have and to see that the necessary action is taken. The Technical Director, working in liaison with HCO, now becomes in charge of Security in an Organization and the results of which are to be notified to the Assoc/Org Secretary and HCO and, after confirmation, thence to me. Forms 7A and 7B for Staff, and Form SA for HPA/HCA Students, are herewith supplemented by the Rock Slam Security Check and this is to be carried out exactly in accordance with HCO Bulletin of September 12, AD 1 2'~ To increase reality in some cases, it may be necessary to substitute "Consider committing bad things to. . ." rather than "Consider committing overts against. . " In very rare cases it may be necessary to increase the number of buttons but this is to be the exception rather than the rule. In the vast majority of cases, just use the four questions only, as per this bulletin. This Security Check must be done with full auditor presence, be done in Model Session and the beginning rudiments especially must be properly in. Those partaking in Staff Clearing Programmes can be given this Check during one of their sessions by their usual auditor. In the event of any doubt, the Technical Director may also make arrangements for a further check to be done. Those not partaking in any Staff Clearing Programme must be checked by a skilled and reliable auditor under the direct supervision of the Technical Director. This Programme will simultaneously also handle picking up Missed Withholds of old-time Scientologists returning to the Orgs of whom we can expect a great number, the Security Check being given in proper Model Session and the Missed Withholds being pulled in the beginning rudiments. When a Rock Slam is reported as a result of this Security Check, a further check should be done to the satisfaction of HCO to confirm the fact. Action to be taken to handle a Rock Slammer: 1. If a Staff Member, suspend from any executive post and any post which involves important action on the communication lines of Scientology. Such a person may however still be used, at the discretion of Assoc/Org Sec and HCO, in a subordinate position under reliable supervision. He is to remain in this position until his goal has been found, when the situation will again be reviewed. 2. A student on the HPA/HCA Course, (or any other Professional Course) who is found to be a Rock Slammer should be suspended from the Course and ordered to the HGC for Auditing. 3. HGC Preclears should be checked early on in their Intensives to ascertain whether this condition exists. 4. In a Clearing Co-Audit, Rock Slammers should be segregated so that they are auditing each other, as far as possible, so that they do not hold back other members of the Co-Audit who are not Rock Slammers. Remember, that this Programme should not be regarded as just a passing phase. It is to be instituted immediately and kept in force in all Orgs throughout the world for our secure and speedy expansion. Insidious methods are used to infiltrate, and especially at times when expansion is fast and it is thought that our security arrangements are lax or apparently being relaxed owing to pressure of work. So, BE ALERT TO THIS AND DON'T MISS ANYONE OUT "BY MISTAKE". LRH:dr.rd Copyright (c) 1962 L. RON HUBBARD by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 359 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 26 AUGUST 1968 BPI Auditor SECURITY CHECKS ABOLISHED The practice of security checking from security check lists like the "Joburg" has been abolished. There are several reasons for this: 1. We have no interest in the secrets and crimes of people and no use for them. 2. Security checking is often done without regard to the point where the person feels better and so became overrun. 3. Security checking is often done in disregard of the state of a person's case. 4. Low level cases do not react on actual crimes and so the "security" furnished is often a false security. 5. There is public criticism of security checking as a practice. 6. The existence of lists of crimes in folders often makes it necessary to destroy the folders which may contain other technical data which is constructive and valuable. 7. If a person is a criminal or has overt acts which affect his case, and speaks of them to an auditor of his own volition, the auditor is bound by the Auditor's Code not to publish, use or reveal them. Nothing in this policy letter alters standard grade processing or rudiments. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH.js.cden Copyright (c) 1968 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 360 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 30 JULY 1970 Remimeo HCO Secs I & R Hat Ethics Hat Tech C/S Qual Personnel THE TECH AND ETHICS OF CONFESSIONALS (Compiled from a briefing to 3rd Mate and 4th Mate Flag given by L. RON HUBBARD) HCO is primarily interested in JUSTICE. The method of Justice practised in the 17th and 18th Centuries was to catch the offenders and hang them, thus keeping the countryside "quiet". Although useful as a method of quietening things down, however, it doesn't do people any good to be hung! You will find the remedy expressed in this rule: WHEN YOU GIVE A CONFESSIONAL TO A PERSON WITHOUT FINDING THE EARLIER BASIC, YOU HANG THEM. If you can't chase back a Confessional to an F/N you are going to get continuous Ethics trouble from that person from then on until it is remedied. When you give a guy a Confessional and it doesn't produce anything and the needle is clean you should indicate that the Confessional was unnecessary. You will probably get an F/N. HCO's interest in someone is normally in what is going on, what is he up to NOW. So one tends to omit to ask how come this guy has been committing overts for the past two-and-a-half years-the same ones-and it is still going-on? Back in that earlier zone is one hell of an overt, continuous overts against Scientology or LRH. So what is it? You should trace it back and you could find a dilly! It's the EARLIEST item available on that chain that will get the F/N. And remember that overts of Omission are always preceded by overts of Commission. So you should ask yourself "How come all these overts of omission?" There's an earlier overt of commission, you can be sure. This gives us another rule: IF YOU CANNOT F/N A CONFESSIONAL, YOU HAVEN'T GOT IT. Now it could be the buttons are out (invalidate, protest, action unnecessary). Did you know you can beef up a TA (send it up high) by doing an unnecessary action? It acts somewhat like forcing a wrong item on a pc It puts him on a protest, a rejection and effort to stop the action. That is where a lot of the unpopularity of Confessionals stems from. Of the rudiments ARC Break, problem, withhold, the Confessional specializes in overts and withholds. So the full panorama of Confessional buttons is Ruds plus False, Suppress, Invalidate, Evaluate, Protest, Unnecessary. These buttons are of more interest to Qual but are perfectly valid in an HCO Confessional. So if the TA goes up during a Confessional you would check ruds or buttons. IF YOU DON'T GET AN F/N ON A CONFESSIONAL YOU SHOULD HAVE A LINE TO QUAL THAT CLEANS IT UP WITHIN 24 HOURS. Every time the Ethics Officer can't fly a Confessional it has got to be a 24 hour urgent review. The Confessional repair list consists of the ruds and buttons, 361 HCO's Technical action should be "Why the hell doesn't this thing fly?" There is earlier stuff on that chain, or there is other stuff not yet found. That it flies (F/Ns) means he hasn't done that. It can of course be an ARC Break needle-people ARC Break with the physical universe, with fellow men, feel wronged in some way and have to take it out on somebody, and so commit the overt. But the somebody they attack is not the source of the upset. They mis-identify the source. If their think was straight they would be able to see what the score was and have no charge on it. An overt therefore is preceded by an ARC Break, and you will find an ARC Break is the result of a problem. So each time you don't take a Confessional to FIN you run up against this. This gives another way for them to get unpopular. But if it didn't FIN, you also know it was necessary to give the person a Confessional! If you give a person a Confessional and you see a trail of catastrophes in that person's wake afterwards you know it didn't fly. Similarly a person who makes huge overts out of every little action, which is in essence self-invalidation, has behind that somewhere a huge overt-big enough to set the police of several galaxies after them! If it doesnt FIN you haven't got it! The FIN has never been integrated into Confessional technology up 'til now. There hasn't been anything issued that says run a Confessional to FIN and tells you what to do if it doesn't or won't FIN. THE E-METER AND THE CRIMINAL The joker in all this is that the E-Meter reads on Reality. So you can have a guy who reads on none of your questions, but you find out the next day he had done exactly what you asked him. Yet it didn't read! A real criminal just doesn't read on having killed his grandmother in cold blood five minutes before the Confessional. Even if he admits it it doesn't read! But a real criminal won't clear and won't FIN. Occasionally they will RS. You have to handle it on a gradient of reality. "Why wasn't that an overt?" is one way you could try. He would at first be very surprised at the very thought of it being an overt. But you could get a stream of justifications off. Another way is to magnify the overt. You can use that on a "no-overt" case. The tech of it belongs more in the field of auditing. However HCO should make an attempt to fly it. It doesn't matter how good or bad. If there is any question on the FIN or if you can't take it to FIN send it over to Qual to find the reason why. Anytime a Confessional is done, some notification of the fact must go into the pc folder otherwise the C/S can make an error in C/Sing because of the omitted data. In fact, unless there is criminal data in the Confessional the whole thing should be slid into the folder. HCO AND CASE GAIN (See HCO P/L 20 July '70, Cases & Morale of Staff) The percentile of people who have case gain will be proportional to the level of morale in your org. So it is of interest to HCO to ask the CIS how many no-case-gain cases he has (Pile 4) trace them down and isolate them. The names of those not doing well (Piles 2 and 3) should also be known and the numbers so you can make sure the greater percentage is getting good case gain. HCO can get trouble stemming from lack of staff case progress. For instance you find an Exec giving excuses for not doing his job. It can be due to a no-case-gain under him enturbulating seniors and associates. They in turn, not recognizing him as the source of the enturbulation, buy the stops and the "can't be dones" and find some other excuse as to why not to do their job. Recognize that when someone dumps his hat on you he has overts, man! 362 An executive instead of reporting that people don't want to work in his division should be asking "How come they don't want to work in the division?" Things will get better to the degree that such cases producing stops and "cant's" have a line for them to be handled on. HCO should turn over to the CIS a list of those who have received Confessionals. The files of the Confessional are turned over and on those that did not FIN, using the repair list, Qual gets it cleaned up or otherwise. Begin a campaign to get all these cases winning. If there is any query as to which of the four categories of case folders (per HCO P/L 20 July '70) a person belongs on, it goes on the one lower. For instance a category (Pile 2) queried as to status immediately becomes Pile 3. Pile 4 cases go to HCO and are given Confessionals. If he gets an FIN, okay. If he doesn't, then it is purely a Div I disciplinary action-Non Enturbulation order or whatever. Put up a notice where it can be seen to the effect that "Anyone who feels bad after a Confessional or who feels they have been falsely given a Confessional should turn in their names to the Qual Examiner". The Ethics Officer can "hot-up" his Confessional by putting in some test buttons-overts, withholds, missed withholds. You could even do a pre-assessment for the Confessional. It's all in what you are looking for. STATISTICS HCO has its neck out to the degree that it does not have Stats. Make sure there is someone in Dept 3 who can handle stats, collect them, graph them and post them up. A person with bad or low stats on post will always trace back to having committed an overt of some kind or another. AMNESTIES In order to take advantage of an amnesty, the person accepting it should make a written statement of the Crimes on which he is accepting the amnesty. STATUS OF REPAIR ACTION A Confessional repair action is not classed as an auditing session in that the data revealed in it is actionable and is turned over to HCO. So before turning over to Qual a Confessional that didn't FIN, tell the person "You have told me all you wish to. You recognize that any further discoveries in this line will be actionable." Written into published form by 4th Mate Flag for L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:RL:rr.aap Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 363 HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex HCO POLICY LETTER OF 15 NOVEMBER 1970 Remimeo HCO Hats Tech Hats CONFESSIONALS HCOs may not do Confessionals or "See Checks". HCO may only do Meter Checks. This consists of putting the pc on a meter and noting down the TA, state of needle and attitude of pc. Where these reads are non optimum (no F/N VGI state of meter) the pc may be sent to Qual for further check. Too many cases, too many case programmes, have been fouled up by non C/Sed See Checking or Confessionals in the past for the practice to continue. Real criminals may have bad meters but crimes are often so unreal to them that they do not read (meters needle read only on things within the reality or borderline reality of a person). This permits unskilled See Checking or Confessional actions to pass right by the culprit. HCO should learn full investigatory procedure and should only do metering to establish the pc's meter state, asking no questions. HCO Investigatory Procedure P/Ls that MUST be known to HCO are: HCO P/L May '65 - ETHICS OFFICER HAT HCO P/L 19 Sept '70 - Data Series No. 16, INVESTIGATORY PROCEDURE HCO, P/L 19 Sept '70 Issue 11 - Data Series No. 17, NARROWING THE TARGET TECH & QUAL Asked to do "Confessionals" or "See Checks" Tech and Qual may do them only as part of a C/S programme and only as a gradient in the general action of improving the reality of the case. An R/S still means crimes. All the other data is true and should be known but POLYGRAPHS, LIE DETECTORS, METERS ONLY REGISTER AT THE REALITY LEVEL OF THE BEING, and the reality level of a criminal is too bad for reads to occur in a majority of cases. Thus the guilty are falsely freed and the innocent are subjected to annoyance and upset. Overts, crimes, etc may come off first as a critical thought under which lies a harmful (overt) act. On such gradients one builds up reality and so releases overts. No meter or See Check or Confessional is sufficiently valuable to use in detection of crime. The state of the meter itself is of value since it tells one whom to investigate. Thus neither Tech nor Qual should assist investigations but should work on the case against proper C/Ses to get off the overts and withholds for the case benefit. 364 Overts disclosed in sessions may not be used for justice purposes. Therefore only crimes discovered by routine investigation are actionable. It could be that a crime discovered by investigation is also gotten off in session. That it was also gotten off in session does not protect the person from discipline. That it was gotten off in session is irrelevant and sessions are not part of justice procedures. SICKNESS The broad general clues about suspects are: The person with the worst meter (TA and needle state) is the most suspect. The person whose job product is itself an overt act is the most likely to commit other crimes. The person who is most crazy is the most likely to be the guilty one. The person who is chronically ill is a suspect. These are true because the cause of insanity and sickness is overts. The person who acts most "PTS" is the one who has most harmed his fellows. The person with the worst stats is the most likely suspect. Beyond these technical observations one cannot go in the field of justice. HCOs should learn Investigatory procedures when looking for criminals. Confessionals and Sec Checks will fail them and they also mess up cases. Investigatory procedures are quite good enough. L. RON HUBBARD Founder LRH:sb.rd Copyright (c) 1970 by L. Ron Hubbard ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 365 CHRONOLOGICAL INDEX OF CONTENTS 1950 20 Nov. Instruction Protocol-Official (reissued 2 Sept. 1970) Vol. 4-108 12 Dec. Certification Board-Duties & Responsibilities 115 1954 The Church of Scientology Creed 280 1955 7 Nov. Hubbard Communications Office (Operational Bulletin) 165 1957 20 Mar. Staff Certificate Display 165 20 Mar. Ministerial Ordination 281 6 Apr. Membership Handling (excerpt) (HCOB) 205 11 Apr. Intensives for Staff see-212 28 Apr. HCO Board of Review-Goal 165 2 May Qualifications of a Permanent Staff member see-239 3 May Ministerial Qualifications see-281 16 May Intensives for Staff 212 3 June Qualifications of a Permanent Staff Member (Assoc Sec Directive) 239 11 June Staff Intensives (Assoc Sec Directive) 212 15 Aug. Ministerial Qualifications (supersedes 3 May 1957) see-281 19 Aug. Release All Certificates 166 2 Sept. Field Certificates 166 5 Sept. Validation of Staff 240 16 Sept. HGC Policy Vol. 4-498 19 Nov. HCO-Final Authority on Certificates (HCOB) 166 1958 28 Mar. Only Org Offices can Certify Clears (HCOB) 167 12 June Ministerial Qualifications (second revision) 281 30 June Procedure for Certifying Clears (HCOB) (revision of HCOB 28 May 1958) 168 30 June Clear Bracelet Procedure (revision of 25 Feb. 1958) 169 9 July Staff Clearing HICOB) 213 1 Oct, HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 116 27 Oct, Staff Member Processing 213 17 Nov. Clear Bracelets (HCOB) 170 25 Nov. HCO Board of Review-Fimetion and Practice 117 1959 28 Feb. HCO Board of Review Ditties 119 10 Mar. Permanent Staff Members 240 20 Mar. Certificates Handling 170 24 Apr. Final HPA Exam-HCO Board of Review 121 2 July Staff Auditing Requirement Vol. 0-120 22 July Processing of Staff Members 213 29 July Sending Certificates by Mail 171 28 Aug. BScn Interneships 308 31 Aug. Certifications 171 27 Nov. Purpose-HCO ])card of Review (excerpt) 114 27 Nov. HCO Board of Review (excerpt) 164 31 Dec. Routing of Certificates for Sterling Areas 172 1960 18 Jan. Qualifications of Permanent Staff Members 241 22 Feb. HPA Qualifications 172 25 Apr. Important Certification Change 173 29 Apr. Certification Change 173 3 May Keeping Memberships in Force 206 18 May Certifications 174 23 May Cancellation of Certificates Vol. 1-366 2 June Requirements for Staff Posts 241 7 June Staff Auditing 213 7 July Training Applicants Vol. 2-318, Vol. 4- 132 28 July International Membership Privileges Vol. 2-195 3 Aug. Security of Persons Leaving Staffs 353 11 Oct, Case Assessments for Students 123 7 Nov. HCO Area Secretary Hat Addition Vol. 1- 31 23 Nov. Reality Test for Students see- 128 26 Nov. Permanent Staff Member Requirements 242 13 Dec. Security Checks 353 21 Dec. Staff Clearing-New Policy 214 1961 28 Jan. New Security Rules 354 12 Feb. Certificates and Awards-ReAsed List 175 13 Feb. Permanent Staff Requirement Changes (modifies 26 Nov. 1960) 243 17 Feb. Staff Post Qualifications Permanent Executives to be Approved see-244 22 Feb. Permanent Staff Exam 124 26 Feb. Qualification of Executives 243 13 Mar. Staff Auditor Training Vol. 1- 114 22 Mar. Staff Members Ordered to Processing 215 25 Mar. Security Rules (cancels 28 Jan. 1961) 355 CHRONOLOGICAL INDEX OF CONTENTS 1961 (cont.) 28 Mar. Personnel Policies-Staff Post Qualifications Permanent Executives to be Approved (modifies 17 Feb. 1961) 244 2 Apr. Staff AuditorTraining-Sequence of Study 334 7 Apr. Examinations of Academy Students to be done by Director of Processing 126 9 Apr. Staff Intensives (modified) 216 16 May HPA/HCA Requirement 176 22 July Executives' Pay 247 19 Sept. Reality Test for Students (cancels 23 Nov. 1960) 128 20 Sept. Training Policy 128 3 Oct. Auditing Schedules 217 6 Oct. Staff Clearing 218 23 Oct. Pay of Executives (modifies 22 July 1961) 247 2 Nov. Allowed Processes from Courses 129 2 Nov. Training Quality (reissued 3 Mar. 1967) 129 14 Nov. Stabilization of Clean 176 21 Nov. Training Course Requirements Vol. 4-306 27 Dec. Processing D of I 356 27 Dec. Sec Checks on Staff 356 1962 3 Jan. Upgrading of Auditors Vol. 4-308 5 Jan. Examination for HGC Auditors 336 7 Jan. HCO Board of Review-Class I I Awards 130 17 Jan. Responsibility Again (reissued 7 June 1967) 357 22 Jan. Security Checks 358 22 Jan. Crash Programme Vol. 4- 26 23 Jan.Permanent Executives (amends 17 Feb. 1961) 247 27 Feb. Clean Hands Clearance Check 358 17 May Staff Staff Auditor's Hat 219 21 May Permanent Staff 248 21 May Tape Examinations Vol. 4-158 29 May Interne Hat-What is Expected of Internee 309 5 June Permanent Staff Privilege 206,248 6 June ARC Break Cleanup Programme 349 29 June Staff and I Interne Auditors 311 30 July Certification and Validation Requirements Vol. 4-326 31 July Oral Examination for HPA/HCA 131 10 Sept. Staff Clearing Program 221 12 Sept. Goal Processing-Importance of 224 13 Sept. Certificate Application Form 177 28 Sept. Saint Hill Briefing Course Terminations Vol. 4-414 2 Oct. Termination & Classification Vol. 4-415 12 Oct. HPA/HCA Written Examination Vol. 4-334 19 Oct. Preparation of HPA/HCA Certificates 179 29 Oct. Religion 282 30 Oct. Security Risks Infiltration 359 4 Dec. R2-12 Validation 179 1963 13 Feb. Academy Taught Processes Vol. 4-339 14 Feb. How to Examine Theory Examinations Vol. 4-163 30 Apr. The Saint Hill Staff Co-Audit 225 17 June Staff Clearing Program (amends 10 Sept. 1962) 226 5 July Sales of Lifetime Memberships or Shares 207 9 July HPA/HCA Certificate Check Sheet Vol. 4-342 12 Aug. Certificates and Awards ISO 22 Aug. ARC Break Assessments on Staff 228 8 Oct. New Saint Hill Certificates and Course Changes Vol. 4-434 26 Nov. Certificate and Classification Changes Everyone Classified Vol. 4-360 4 Dec. Org Staff W/H Checks 228 11 Dec. Classification for Everyone (amends 26 Nov. 1963) Vol. 4-364 13 Dec. Co-Audit 229 1964 5 Feb. Founding Scientologist Certificate Vol. 2-264 21 Feb. Issuing of Certificates 183 21 Feb. Staff Regulations Auditing Venus Job Vol. 0- 43 19 Mar. Staff Regulations-Staff Intensives, 230 16 June Personnel Records-Admin Carte (modifies 12 Aug. 1963) 184 1 July Certification and Classification 186 10 Aug Good Workers Vol, 0- 44 5 Sept. Examinations 131 16 Sept. Terminations Vol. 4-447 18 Sept. Final Classification on Termination from Saint Hill Vol. 4-447 23 Sept. Policies: Dissemination and Programmes Vol. 2-4 1, Vol. 4- 40 13 Nov. Provisional Class VI Classification (cancels IS Sept. 1964) Vol. 4-449 31 Dec. Certificates 187 366 1965 circa '65 Qualifications Division 5 Org; Board Outline 3 7 Feb. Keeping Scientology Working (reissued IS June 1970 & 28 Jan. 1973) 43 14 Feb. Safeguarding Technology (reissued 7 June 1967) 48 5 Mar. Certificates and Awards New Status of Honorary Awards 188 16 Mar. Further Material on Study Examinations see- 133 29 Mar. Administration-Flows and Expansion The Fast Flow System 78 2 Apr. Meter Checks 140 2 Apr. Star-Rate Checkouts for Process (modifies 27 Feb. 1965) Vol. 4-453 7 Apr. Book Auditor 190 8 Apr. HCO, Org Executive and Divisional Secretaries, Justice on, and Auditing of Vol. 1-565 9 Apr. Correction to Policy Letters on Certification and Awards 191 12 Apr. Classification Pan Marks 131 16 Apr. Drills, Allowed Vol. 4-188 19 Apr. Training and Processing Regulations Technical Discipline Students' Questions Vol, 1-388, Vol. a- 65 21 Apr. Basic Certificates - Uncertified Personnel 192 21 Apr. Membership-Attestations 207 23 Apr. Clarification Auditing of Org Executives Vol. 1-566 24 Apr. Review 341 28 Apr. Routing (excerpt) 141 28 Apr. Power Processes 343 28 Apr. Technical Personnel Vol. 4- 67 29 Apr. Bonuses 231 29 Apr. Ethics-Review (excerpt) (correction to 24 Apr. 1965) 345 4 May Release Award-Saint Hill 80 13 May SHSBC Unit-Graduation Vol. 4-457 16 May Academy Courses - General Remarks Zero Courses Hubbard Recognized Scientologist Vol. 4-347 17 May Academy Processing Vol. 4-224 27 May Processing Vol. 4-570 17 June Scientology Pins (amends & cancels 12 Apr. 1965) Vol. 2-381 1 July Comm Cycle Additives Vol. 1-426 1 July Ethics Chits Vol. 4- 69 4 July Pc Routing-Review Code 346 7 July Releases, Policy on Vol. 4- 71 9 July Qual Goofs 142 10 July Lines and Terminals-Routing Vol. 0- 113 11 July Assignment of Tech Personnel (amends & cancels 5 July 1965) Vol. 4- 70 12 July Release Policies Starting the Pc Vol. 2-326, Vol. 4-572 19 July Release Checks, Procedure for Vol. 4-574 26 July Release Declaration Restrictions Healing Amendments 193 30 July Preclear Routing to Ethics Vol. 1-427, Vol. 4-606 31 July Purposes of the Qualifications Division 1 2 Aug. Chaplain 283 5 Aug. Release Check Outs 143 6 Aug. Qualifications Technical Actions (HCOB) 58 7 Aug. Floating Needle on Former Releases 145 9 Aug. Release Check Outs (addendum to 5 Aug. 1965) 145 17 Aug. Certification of Franchise Students 193 23 Aug. Crediting of Auditor in Release Log Book 194 23 Aug. Classification at Upper Levels Temporary measure Vol. 4-392 24 Aug. Pcs Released Routing Vol. 4-606 Sept. Membership Policies 208 Sept. Current Policy-Franchise Vol. 3-253 21 Sept. Auditor Estimation Test 337 24 Sept. Free Release Check Vol. 2-275 30 Sept. Statistics for Divisions (excerpt: Qual Division 5) 2 14 Oct. Potential Trouble Source Routing 348 14 Oct. Course Pattern (amends 27 Feb. 1965) Vol. 4-464 19 Oct. Release Declarations 146 22 Oct, Requirements for Student Classification 146 27 Oct. Grade Award Insignia 194 0 Nov. The Cramming Section 305 3 Nov. Release Pins 195 30 Nov. The Promotional Actions of an organization (excerpt: Qualifications Division 5) 4 10 Dec. Membership Billing (Sec ED 147 INT) 209 13 Dec. Numbering of Certificates 196 15 Dec. Additions to "The Promotional Action, of a. Organization" seeing, 205 28 Dec. Met Allowed Vol. 4- 77 30 Dec. ITS Auditing and Routing Vol. 1-439, Vol. 4-578 1966 4 Jan. Personnel Staff Status 249 13 Jan. Regulations for Auditing of Staff & Students 233 17 Jan. Uncrossed Certificates-HAS, MBAs HQS 197 19 Jan. Chaplain, Transfer of 283 1 Feb. HGCCum Interne Training and Staff Auditors 63 1 Feb. Staff Auditor and Supervisor Procurement 65 10 Feb. Tech Recovery 66 10 Feb. Bonuses for Service Delivery Vol. 3-204 10 Feb. Check Sheets, Course Vol. 4-466 14 Feb. Doctor Title Abolished Vol. 2-119 7 Mar. HGC Cum (Continued) 69 7 Mar. Star Rates on Tech and Qual Staff 70 8 Mar. High Crime 71 29 Apr. Policy Check Outs and Meter 252 9 May Bonuses Adjusted (correction to 10 Feb. 1966) Vol. 3-206 29 June Keep Academy Check Sheets Up-to-Date 132 20 July Staff Status see-253 21 July Tech vs Qual 82 1 Aug. Sign Ups and Discounts 198 1 Aug. Refund Addition-Membirship Refunds (adds to 31 July 1966) Vol. 3-347 5 Aug. Chaplain's Court-Civil Hearings 284 6 Aug. Declare, Multiple 83 16 Aug. Release Grades 199 22 Aug. Addendum to HCO Pol Ltr of 20 July 1966 "Staff status" 254 6 Oct. Cramming-Students Who Flunk Classification for a Level 306 12 Oct. Examinations Vol. 4-198 17 Oct. Bonuses Vol. 3-209 7 Nov. Clear Check-outs in Continental Orgs 147 15 Nov. Routing of Chaplain's Court Orders 286 21 Nov. Addendum to HCO PC of 17 October 1966 "Bonuses" Vol. 3-211 1967 1 Feb. Student Auditing of Preclear (replaces 29 Oct. 1965) 132 3 Mar. Training Quality (reissue of 2 Nov. 196 1) 129 21 Mar. Org Exec Course Vol. 0- 3 7 June Safeguarding Technology (reissue of 14 Feb. 1965) 48 7 June Responsibility Again (reissue of 17 Jan. 1962) 357 1 Sept. ARC Break Cleanup Programme (excerpt from ED 473 WW 842 SH) 350 6 Sept. Clear Check Outs see-148 1 Sept. Interne Training Programme 312 13 Sept. Further Material on Study-Examinations (reissue of 16 Mar. 1965) 133 13 Sept. Clear Check Outs (amends 6 Sept. 1967) 148 15 Sept. Release and Clear Check Outs 149 15 Sept. Examiner Bonuses 151 20 Sept. Confidential Data Vol. 4-90 22 Sept. Solo Auditing Folders 135 22 Sept. Ministerial Qualifications (reissue of 12 June 1958) see-281 22 Sept. Routing Form Attestations Vol. 1-62 25 Sept. Grades Above Clear 153 8 Oct. Clear Checks and Re-Clear Checks HICOB) 152 20 Oct. The Lines of the Qualifications Division The Interview Invoice Section 102 2 Nov. Qualifications Division, Depts. of Examinations, Review and Certifications and Awards 5 2 Nov. Chaplain's Section (excerpt) 7, 287 8 Nov. Clear Checks and Re-Clear Checks 154 28 Dec. Qual Senior Datum 73 1968 9 Jan. Cancellation of HCO PL of 12 Sept. 1967 and HCO PL of 13 Sept. 1967 154 11 Jan. Speed of Service (ED 805 INT) 84 6 Feb. Organization-The Flaw 79 7 Feb. Fast Flow and Ethics 84 24 Feb. Fast Flow for SHSBC Students' Preclears (amends 30 Dec. 1966) 85 2 Mar. Qual Sec Must Be Clear (modifies 15 Sept. 1967) 74 11 Mar. False Attestation 85 13 Mar. Statistics 75 14 Mar. Policies Governing the Qualifications Division Fast Flow (reissued 8 May 1968) 86 19 Mar. Staff Status (20 July 1966 amended) 253 8 May Policies Governing the Qualifications Division Fast Flow (reissue of 14 Mar. 1968) 86 15 May Additions to HCO PL 14 March 1968, reissued 8 May 1968, "Policies Governing the Qualifications Division" 91 31 May Scientology Technology 49 17 June ARC Break Registrars and Auditors (corrects 2 Nov. 1967) 7,350 1 Aug. Cancel Attestation on UK and US SHSBC... (LRH ED 29WW 16SH I EU I US) 92 26 Aug. Security Checks Abolished 360 367 1968 (cont.) 27 Aug. Sea Org Internes 315 2 Sept. Chaplain 287 7 Sept. Review Complete-Pc Attestations 92 18 Sept. Examiner's Form see-163 30 Sept. Examiner's Form (Revised) see-163 13 Oct. Examiner 155 14 Oct. The Auditor's Code AD 18 Vol. 4-111 19 Oct. Course Completion Student Indicators Vol. 4-202 29 Oct. Star for Clan Vill C/S Qual 7 2 Nov. Auditor's Code-Add to Pol Ltr 14 October AD IS see Vol. 4-112 21 Nov. Senior Policy 49 2 Dec. Examinations 135 9 Dec. Qual Has No Backlog (LRH ED 61 INT issued as HCO PL 4 Oct. 1970) 75 11 Dec. Examiner (addendum to 13 Oct. 1968) 155 13 Dec. Cancellation (of 14 Mar. 1968) 93 1969 5 Jan. Staff Status Two (modifies 4 Jan. 1966) 255 12 Jan. Auditors and Training 340 13 Jan. Standard Examinations 136 17 Jan. Pc Attestations 93 20 Jan. ARC Break Program 351 20 Jan. Classification see-200 20 Jan. A Vital Target-Trained Auditor Programme (LRH ED 81 INT) Vol. 4- 93 20 Jan. Attestation Reinstated (LRH ED 82 INT issued as HCO PL 3 Sept. 1969) 95 28 Jan. Addition to HCO Pol Ltr of 14 March 1968 Policies Governing the Qualifications Division Fast Flow 94 5 Feb. Press Policy-Code of a Scientologist Vol. 0- 25 12 Feb. Religion 288 13 Feb. Ethics Protection Conditions - Blue Star, Gwen Star, Gold Star Vol. 0-248, Vol. 1-492 6 Mar. Scientology is a Religion 289 4 Apr. Scientology Marriage Ceremonies 291 24 Apr. A Scientology Church Register 291 5 May Dianetic Course Examinations 137 5 May Auditor's Code and Dianetics Vol. 4-234 8 May Fast Flow by Attestation Vol. 4-237 9 May Examiner's Form (30 Sept. 1968 revised) see- 163 13 May Cramming Section Service to Trained Auditors 307 20 May Keeping Dianetics Working in an Area (HCOB) 50 24 June Dianetics-Pre-Aurfiting Examination 138 11 July Dianetics Auditing Completion Certificate 199 22 July Fast Flow Training (cancels 28 Jan. 1969) 94 3 Sept. Attestation Reinstated (LRH ED 82 INT issued as a Policy Letter) 95 7 Sept. Classification (20 Jan. 1969 amended & reissued) 200 21 Sept. Staff Training Officer 237 13 Nov. Interneships and Case Supervisors 316 15 Nov. Rights and Duties 76 18 Nov. Dianetics-Right to Audit 201 18 Nov. Dianetics - Right to Teach 202 1970 26 Jan. Examiner and Floating Needle (revises 13 Oct. 1968 & I I Dec. 1968) 156 26 Jan. Examiner's Form (replaces & revises 9 May 1969) see- 163 26 Jan. Scientology Prayer 292 23 Feb. Ethics Quality of Service Vol. 1-506, Vol. 4-100 28 Mar. R6EW and Clear (cancels & replaces 28 Jan. 1970) 157 29 Mar. Qual Sears Revised (excerpt) (amends 30 Sept. 1965) 8 6 Apr. Scientology Release Attestation Form 96 11 Apr. Review Complete? 158 16 Apr. Monte 293 18 Apr. Correction to HCO P/L 13 Nov. 1969 see-316 25 Apr. Guarantee of Service Delivery . 203 10 May Single Declare (cancels 6 Aug. 1966) 98 21 May Fast Flow Grades Cancelled (LRH ED 103 INT) 99 23 May Cancellation of Policies Governing the Qualifications Division-Fast Flow 101 30 May Cutatives 52 3 June Orders to Divisions for Immediate Compliance (excerpt: Division V) (LRH ED 107 INT) 9 8 June Student Auditing Vol. 4-227 15 June Keeping Scientology Working (reissue of 7 Feb. 1965) (winced 28 Jan. 1973) 43 17 June OIC Change-Cable Change (excerpt) (cancels 29 Mar. 1970, amends 30 Sept. 1965) 10 17 June Technical Degrades 54 25 June Expanded Lower Grades Chart of Abilities Gained and Inabilities Lost (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) see- 159 1970 (cont.) 25 June Expanded Lower Grades-Chart of Abilities Gained and Inabilities Lost (revised & reissued 17 July 1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159 15 July Reorganization of the Correction Division I I 17 July Expanded Lower Grades - Chart of Abilities Gained and Inabilities Lost (revision & reissue of 25 June 1970) (cancels 6 Apr. 1970) 159 20 July Cases and Morale of Staff 234 20 July Internships and Case Supervisors (amends 13 Nov. 1969 &IS Apr. 1970) 317 22 July Hubbard Scientist of Standard Tech 319 30 July The Tech and Ethics of Confessionals 361 8 Aug. Reorganization of the Correction Division (amends 15 July 1970) 14 2 Sept. Instruction Protocol-Official (reissue of 20 Nov. 1950) Vol. 4- 108 8 Sept. Examiner's 24 Hour Rule 161 22 Sept. Ideal Scenes and Statistics for Correction Division Five 18 3 Oct. Medicine and Dianetics 298 3 Oct. The Role of the Medical Officer 300 4 Oct. Qual Has No Backlog (originally issued as LRH ED 61 INT, 9 Dec. 1968) 75 11 Oct. Medical Officer's Code 303 27 Oct. A Book: "The Background to the Religion of Scientology and Ceremonies of the Church of Scientology of California World Wide" 294 15 No, Confessionals 364 1971 13 Jan. Exam 24 Hour Rule (additional information) 162 13 Jan. Attestation at Certs & Awards 204 5 Feb. Ong Gross Divisional Statistics Revised (excerpt: Qual Division 5) (amends 30 Sept. 1965, 17 June 1970 & 22 Sept. 1970) 22 7 Feb. FEBC Org Board Division 5 23 17 Feb. Clan VII 320 5 Mar. The Fantastic New HGC Line (HCOB) Vol. 4-581 6 Mar. Line Design-HGC Lines, An Example Vol. 4-585 8 Mar. Examiner's Form (replaces & revises 9 May 1969 & 26 Jan. 1970) 163 12 Apr. Ordination Ceremony 29S 4 June Prayer Day Ordination Ceremony 296 19 July Internes (HCOB) 322 2 Aug. Additional Qual Stat 28 2 Aug. Study Time 256 9 Aug. ARC Break Program (cancel, 20 Jan. 1969) 352 14 Aug. Die V Mini Qual Org Board (revised 5 Sept. 1971 & 19 Nov. 197 1) 29 24 Aug. Interne Checksheets - Okays to Audit 324 2 Oct. Divisional Summary for Division V Correction Division (FDD 18 Qual Intl 30 23 Oct. Personnel Programming Rules (HCOB) 259 23 Oct. Personnel Programming Technology (HOOD) 262 23 Oct. Personnel Programming White Form (HCOB) 264 23 Oct. Master Personnel Programming Tally Sheet (HCOB) 268 23 Oct. Personnel Programmer Ethics Intervention Rights (HCOB) 272 23 Oct. Individual Staff Study Orders (HCOB) 273 26 Oct. Tech Downgrades 56 6 Nov. Selling Internships (amends 20 July 1970) 325 6 Nov. Interneships Line-Up-Auditor Interneships 326 6 Nov. Case Supervisor Interneships 328 6 Nov. HGC Auditors and HOC Auditors in Training 329 8 Nov. Interneships Electronic Attestation Form see-330 21 Nov. Scientology Courses Examination Policy (addition to 8 Mar. 1966) 139 7 Dec. Correction Division-Purposes, Ideal Scenes, Products, Statistics (cancels 22 Sept. 1970, 15 July 1970 & 8 An& 1970) 35 14 Dec. The Linn of the Correction Division Qual Interview and Invoice Lines and Beatings (amends 20 Nov. 1967) 106 14 Dec. Qual Student Lines 107 14 Dec. Qual Preclear Lines 109 14 Dec. Qual Staff Service Lines III 14 Dec. Qual Technical Lines 112 14 Dec. Qual Interview and Invoice Officer Lines Administration 113 1972 13 Jan. Tips on Personnel Programming (HCOB) 274 13 Jan. Inter-Dependent Halting and Programming Functions 276 14 Jan. Management Cycle (24 June 1970 revised) 277 14 Jan. The "OK To Be A - - " System 278 22 Jan. Personnel Programming 258 5 Feb. Div V Mini Qual Org Board (revision of 14 Aug. 1971 & 19 Nov. 1971) 42 16 Feb. The Purpose of the Department of Personnel Enhancement 210 18 Feb. Interneships-Electronic Attestation Form (revises 8 Nov, 197 1) 330 22 Feb. Interneship Errors Found 332 368 HUBBARD SCIENTOLOGY ORGANIZATIONS THE CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY ADVANCED ORGANIZATIONS Church of Scientology of California Advanced Organization of LOS Angeles 916 South Westlake Street Los Angeles, California 90006 Church of Scientology Advanced Organization United Kingdom Saint Hill Manor East Grinstead, Sussex, England Church of Scientology Advanced Organization Denmark Jernbanegade 6 1608 Copenhagen V Denmark HUBBARD COLLEGES OF SCIENTOLOGY Church of Scientology of California American Saint Hill Organization 2723 West Temple Street Los Angeles, California 90026 Church of Scientology Hubbard College of Scientology Saint Hill Manor East Grinstead, Sussex, England Church of Scientology Saint Hill Denmark Jernbanegade 6 1608 Copenhagen V Denmark CONTINENTAL AND AREA ORGANIZATIONS UNITED STATES PUBLICATIONS ORGANIZATION Church of Scientology of California Publications Organization C/O ASHO 2723 West Temple Street Los Angeles, California 90926 CELEBRITY CENTRES Church of Scientology of California Celebrity Centre 1661 North La Brea Avenue Hollywood, California 90026 Church of Scientology Celebrity Centre New York 65 East 82nd Street New York, New York 10028 LOCAL CHURCHES WASHINGTON, D.C. Founding Church of Scientology 2125 S Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20008 AUSTIN Church of Scientology 2504 Rio Grande Austin, Texas 78705 HAWAII Church of Scientology 143 Nenue Street Honolulu, Hawaii 96821 SAN DIEGO Church of Scientology 926 "C" Street San Diego, California 92102 SAN FRANCISCO Church of Scientology of California 414 Mason Street San Francisco, California 94102 LAS VEGAS Church of Scientology 2108 Industrial Road Las Vegas, Nevada 89102 LOS ANGELES Church of Scientology of California 2005 West 9th Street Los Angeles, California 90006 PORTLAND Church of Scientology 1607 N.E. 41st Street Portland, Oregon 97232 SEATTLE Church of Scientology 1531 4th Avenue Seattle, Washington 98101 ST. LOUIS Church of Scientology 3730 Lindell Boulevard St. Louis, Missouri 63108 TWIN CITIES Church of Scientology 730 Hennepin Avenue Minneapolis, Minnesota 55403 BOSTON Church of Scientology 448 Beacon Street Boston, Massachusetts 02115 BUFFALO Church of Scientology 1116 Elmwood Avenue Buffalo, New York 14222 DETROIT Church of Scientology 19 Clifford Street Detroit, Michigan 48226 MIAMI Church of Scientology 1235 Brickell Avenue Miami, Florida 33131 NEW YORK Church of Scientology of New York 25-30 West 74th Street New York, New York 10023 PHILADELPHIA Church of Scientology 8 West Lancaster Avenue Ardmore, Pennsylvania 19003 SACRAMENTO Church of Scientology of California 819 19th Street Sacramento, California 95814 CHICAGO Church of Scientology 1555 Maple Street Evanston, Illinois 60201 CANADA TORONTO Church of Scientology 124 Avenue Road Toronto 180, Ontario VANCOUVER Church of Scientology 4857 Main Street Vancouver 10. British Columbia OTTAWA Church of Scientology 292 Somerset Street, West Ottawa MONTREAL Church of Scientology 1168 St. Catherine Street, W.101 Montreal, Quebec H2Y 1B5 UNITED KINGDOM LOCAL CHURCHES Saint Hill Foundation Saint Hill Manor East Grinstead, Sussex PLYMOUTH Hubbard Scientology Organization 39, Portland Square Sherwell Plymouth, Devon MANCHESTER Hubbard Scientology Organization 43 Faulkner Street Manchester LONDON Hubbard Scientology Organization 68, Tottenham Court Road London W.1. SCOTLAND HAPI Fleet House 20 South Bridge Edinburgh Scotland AUSTRALIA/NEW ZEALAND ADELAIDE Church of the New Faith 57 Pulteney Street Fullarton, Adelaide 5000 South Australia MELBOURNE Church of the New Faith 724 Inkerman Road North Caulfield 3161 Melbourne, Victoria, Australia PERTH Church of the New Faith Pastoral House St. George's Terrace Perth 5000 Western Australia SYDNEY Church of the New Faith 1 Lee Street Sydney 2000 New South Wales Australia AUCKLAND Church of Scientology New Imperial Buildings 44 Queen Street Auckland, New Zealand EUROPE PUBLICATIONS ORGANIZATION Church of Scientology Publications Organization C/O SH Denmark Jernbanegade 6 1608 Copenhagen V Denmark LOCAL CHURCHES COPENHAGEN Church of Scientology Hovedvagispade 6 1103 Copenhagen K Denmark Church of Scientology Frederiksborgvej 5 2400 Copenhagen V Denmark PARIS Church of Scientology 12, rue de la Montagne Ste Genevieve 75005 Paris, France VIENNA Scientology-Osterreich A-1070 Wien Marlahilferstrasse 88A/Stg. 3/1/9 Vienna, Austria BRUSSELS Church of Scientology 45A, Rue de l'Ecuyer 1000 Brussels, Belgium AMSTERDAM Church of Scientology Singel 261 Amsterdam, Netherlands BERLIN Church of Scientology 1000 Berlin 12 Giesebrechstrasse 10 Berlin, Germany MUNICH Church of Scientology 8000 Munich 2 Lindwurmstrasse 29 West Germany GOTEBORG Church of Scientology Magasinsgatan 12 S-411 18 Goteborg, Sweden STOCKHOLM Scientology Kyrkan Kammakaregatan 46 S-111 60 Stockholm, Sweden MALMO Church of Scientology Skomakaregatan 12 S-211 34 Malmo, Sweden AFRICA JOHANNESBURG Church of Scientology 99 Polly Street Johannesburg, South Africa CAPE TOWN Church of Scientology 3rd Floor, Garmour House 127 Plein Street Cape Town, South Africa PORT ELIZABETH Church of Scientology 2 St Christopher's 27 Westbourne Road Port Elizabeth, South Africa 6001 DURBAN Church of Scientology 57 College Lane Durban, South Africa PRETORIA Church of Scientology 224 Central House Cnr Central & Pretorious Streets Pretoria, South Africa BULAWAYO Church of Scientology 508 Kirrie Bldgs. Abercorn Street Bulawayo Rhodesia [end]